Skip to main content

Full text of "The Princeton Seminary Bulletin"

See other formats


Digitized  by  the  Internet  Archive 
in  2016  with  funding  from 
Princeton  Theological  Seminary  Library 


https://archive.org/details/princetonsemina1731prin_0 


UK* 


THE 

Princeton 

SEMINARY 

BULLETIN 


VOLUME  XVII  NUMBER  3 NEW  SERIES  1996 


Commencement  1996 

Jehovah’s  Bystanders?  THOMAS  W.  GILLESPIE 

Leaders  with  Heart  LEONORA  TUBBS  TISDALE 

Neumann  Lecture 

The  Actualization  of  Christ’s  Achievement  in  Our  Historical  Existence: 

Breaking  out  of  the  New  Babylonian  Captivity  HERMAN  C.  WAETJEN 

Thompson  Lecture 

A Plethora  of  Epiphanies:  Christology  in  the  Pastoral  Letters  JOUETTE  M.  BASSLER 
Stone  Lecture 

Health,  Disease,  and  Salvation  in  African  American  Experience  JAMES  H.  EVANS,  JR. 
In  Memoriam 

David  Weadon:  A Tribute  KATHARINE  DOOB  SAKENFELD 

Remembering  David  MICHAEL  E.  LIVINGSTON 


Index  Vol.  XVII  (1996) 


PRINCETON  THEOLOGICAL  SEMINARY 


Thomas  W.  Gillespie,  President 
BOARD  OF  TRUSTEES 


Robert  M.  Adams,  Chair 


Ralph  M.  Wyman,  Vice  Chair 


Louise  Upchurch  Lawson,  Secretary 


Clarence  B.  Ammons 
Fred  R.  Anderson 
M.  Craig  Barnes 
Robert  W.  Bohl 
Warren  D.  Chinn 
Stewart  B.  Clifford 
Gary  O.  Dennis 
John  H.  Donelik 
Peter  E.  B.  Erdman 
Rosemary  Hall  Evans 
Mary  Lee  Fitzgerald 
John  T.  Galloway,  Jr. 
Francisco  O.  Garcia-Treto 
C.  Thomas  Hilton 
David  H.  Hughes 
Jane  G.  Irwin 
F.  Martin  Johnson 
Justin  M.  Johnson 


Thomas  R.  Johnson 
Curtis  A.  Jones 
Johannes  R.  Krahmer 
Henry  Luce  III 
David  M.  Mace 
Kari  Turner  McClellan 
M.  Scott  McClure 
Julie  E.  Neraas 
Young  Pai 
Earl  F.  Palmer 
Thomas  J.  Rosser 
Arthur  F.  Sueltz 
Thomas  K.  Tewell 
Virginia  J.  Thornburgh 
Jay  Vawter 

Barbara  Sterling  Willson 
George  B.  Wirth 


TRUSTEES  EMERITI  /AE 


Frederick  E.  Christian 
Sarah  B.  Gambrell 
Margaret  W.  Harmon 
Bryant  M.  Kirkland 
Raymond  I.  Lindquist 
George  T.  Piercy 


William  H.  Scheide 
Laird  H.  Simons,  Jr. 
John  M.  Templeton 
William  P.  Thompson 
Samuel  G.  Warr 
David  B.  Watermulder 


THE 

PRINCETON 

SEMINARY 

BULLETIN 


VOLUME  XVII 


James  F.  Kay,  EDITOR 

Daniel  L.  Migliore,  BOOK  REVIEW  EDITOR 

Steven  R.  Bechtler,  ASSOCIATE  EDITOR 


CONTENTS 


Commencement  1996 


Jehovah’s  Bystanders? 

Thomas  W.  Gillespie 

279 

Leaders  with  Heart 

Leonora  Tubbs  Tisdale 

rr\ 

00 

n 

Neumann  Lecture 

The  Actualization  of  Christ’s  Achievement  in 

Our 

Historical  Existence:  Breaking  out  of  the  New 

Babylonian  Captivity 

Hainan  C.  Waetjen 

29I 

Thompson  Lecture 

A Plethora  of  Epiphanies:  Christology  in  the 

Pastoral  Letters 

Jouette  M.  Bassler 

310 

Stone  Lecture 

Health,  Disease,  and  Salvation  in  African 

American  Experience 

James  H.  Evans,  Jr. 

326 

In  Memoriam 

David  Weadon:  A Tribute 

Katharine  Doob  Sakenfeld 

348 

Remembering  David 


Michael E.  Livingston  351 


ii  THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 

Book  Reviews 


Homosexuality  and  Christian  Community,  ed. 
Choon-Leong  Seow 

W.  Eugene  March  353 

Karl  Barth’s  Critically  Realistic  Dialectical  Theology: 
Its  Genesis  and  Development,  1909-1936, 
by  Bruce  L.  McCormack 

B.  A.  GetTish  354 

Numbers,  by  Dennis  T.  Olson 

Thomas  B.  Dozeman  35b 

Making  Sense  of  New  Testament  Theology:  “Modern” 
Problems  and  Prospects,  by  A.  K.  M.  Adam 

Deirdre  Good  359 

Not  the  Way  It’s  Supposed  to  Be:  A Breviary  of  Sin, 
by  Cornelius  Plantinga,  Jr. 

Stephen  L.  Stell  360 

The  Decalogue  and  a Human  Future:  The  Meaning  of 
the  Commandments  for  Making  and  Keeping  Human 
Life  Human,  by  Paul  L.  Lehmann 

Barry  Harvey  362 

Divine  Discourse:  Philosophical  Reflections  on  the 
Claim  That  God  Speaks,  by  Nicholas  Wolterstorff 

George  I.  Mavrodes  363 

A History  of  Israelite  Religion  in  the  Old  Testament 
Period,  2 vols.,  by  Rainer  Albertz 

J.  J.  M.  Roberts  365 

The  Social  World  of  the  First  Christians:  Essays  in 
Honor  of  Wayne  A.  Meeks,  ed.  L.  Michael  White 
and  O.  Larry  Yarbrough 

Brian  K.  Blount  367 

The  Sermon  on  the  Mount:  A Commentary  on  the 
Sermon  on  the  Mount,  including  the  Sermon  on  the 
Plain  (Matthew  5:3-7:27  and  Luke  6:20-49), 
by  Hans  Dieter  Betz 

A.  K.  M.  Adam  369 

The  New  Testament  and  Psalms:  An  Inclusive  Version, 
ed.  Victor  Roland  Gold  et  al. 

Moma  D.  Hooker  371 

Earthing  Christologies:  From  Jesus’  Parables  to  Jesus 
the  Parable,  ed.  James  H.  Charlesworth 
and  Walter  P.  Weaver 

James  D.  G.  Dunn  373 

CONTENTS 


iii 

Revelation,  Redemption,  and  Response:  Calvin’s 
Trinitarian  Understanding  of  the  Divine-Human 


Relationship,  by  Philip  Walker  Butin 

Charles  Partee 

375 

John  Calvin’s  Exegesis  of  the  Old  Testament, 
by  David  L.  Puckett 

Gary  Neal  Hansen 

376 

Jonathan  Edwards  and  the  Catholic  Vision  of  Salvation, 
by  Anri  Morimoto 

Don  Schweitzer 

00 

Sworn  on  the  Altar  of  God:  A Religious  Biography  of 
Thomas  Jefferson,  by  Edwin  S.  Gaustad 

James  H.  Moorhead 

379 

King  among  the  Theologians,  by  Noel  Leo  Erskine 

Peter  J.  Paris 

381 

A Fire  in  the  Bones:  Reflections  on  African-American 
Religious  History,  by  Albert  J.  Raboteau 

Stephen  D.  Glazier 

00 

A History  of  Christianity  in  Africa:  From  Antiquity  to 
the  Present,  by  Elizabeth  Isichei 

Mercy  Amba  Oduyoye 

00 

Daughters  of  Anowa:  African  Women  and  Patriarchy, 
by  Mercy  Amba  Oduyoye 

Willette  A.  Burgle 

386 

Proper  Confidence:  Faith,  Doubt,  and  Certainty  in 
Christian  Discipleship,  by  Lesslie  Newbigin 

Frederick  R.  Trost 

00 

00 

Thy  Will  Be  Done:  The  Conquest  of  the  Amazon: 
Nelson  Rockefeller  and  Evangelism  in  the  Age  of  Oil, 
by  Gerard  Colby  with  Charlotte  Dennett 

Alan  Neely 

390 

Scripture  and  Homosexuality:  Biblical  Authority  and  the 
Church  Today,  by  Marion  L.  Soards 

Robin  Scroggs 

392 

The  Cry  of  Tamar:  Violence  against  Women  and  the 
Church’s  Response,  by  Pamela  Cooper- White 

Maureen  A.  Wallin 

393 

In  the  Name  of  All  That’s  Holy:  A Theory  of  Clergy 
Malfeasance,  by  Anson  Shupe 

Donald  Capps 

395 

IV 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


Review  Article 

Ancient  Christian  Gospels:  Their  History  and 

Development,  by  Helmut  Koester;  New  Testament 
Apocrypha,  rev.  ed.,  2 vols.,  ed. 

Wilhelm  Schneemelcher  and  R.  McL.  Wilson; 

The  Apocryphal  New  Testament:  A Collection 
of  Apocryphal  Christian  Literature  in  an  English 

Translation,  by  J.  K.  Elliott  James  H.  Charlesivorth  399 

Index  Vol.  XVII  ( 1 996)  404 


The  Princeton  Seminary  Bulletin  is  published  three  times  annually  by  Princeton 
Theological  Seminary,  Princeton,  New  Jersey. 

Each  issue  is  mailed  free  of  charge  to  all  alumni/ae  and,  by  agreement,  to  various  insti- 
tutions. Back  issues  are  not  available. 

All  correspondence  should  be  addressed  to  James  F.  Kay,  Editor,  The  Princeton  Seminary 
Bulletin,  P.O.  Box  821,  Princeton,  NJ  08542-0803. 

The  Bulletin  publishes  lectures  and  sermons  by  Princeton  Seminary  faculty  and  adminis- 
tration, and  presentations  by  guests  on  the  Seminary  campus.  Therefore,  we  do  not  accept 
unsolicited  material. 


Jehovah’s  Bystanders? 

by  Thomas  W.  Gillespie 


Farewell  Remarks  to  the  Class  of  1996 
by  the  President  of  the  Seminary 

COMEDIAN  Flip  Wilson  once  quipped,  “I’m  a Jehovah’s  Bystander.” 
“They  wanted  me  to  be  a Witness,”  he  explained,  “but  I didn’t  want  to 
get  involved.”  There  is  a sense  in  which  that  sentiment  belongs  to  us  all. 

Consider  Israel  in  the  time  of  its  Babylonian  captivity.  Five  hundred 
eighty-six  years  before  Christ,  Jerusalem  fell  to  the  army  of  King  Nebuchadn- 
ezzar. The  city  was  sacked,  the  temple  destroyed,  and  the  leadership  of  the 
nation  carried  off  to  Babylon.  There  they  found  their  place  among  the  many 
other  military  and  political  victims  of  the  conquering  Babylonians. 

The  people  of  God  found  themselves  in  the  midst  of  cultural,  ethnic,  and 
religious  pluralism  of  the  first  magnitude.  Without  the  cultural  support  of 
their  king,  their  temple,  and  their  holy  land,  they  were  compelled  to  keep  faith 
alive  as  best  they  could  improvise.  As  the  Psalmist  lamented: 

By  the  waters  of  Babylon, 
there  we  sat  down  and  wept, 
when  we  remembered  Zion. 

On  the  willows  there 
we  hung  up  our  lyres. 

For  there  our  captors 
required  of  us  songs, 
and  our  tormentors,  mirth,  saying, 

“Sing  us  one  of  the  songs  of  Zion!” 

How  shall  we  sing  the  Lord’s  song 
in  a foreign  land? 

(Ps.  137:1-4) 

Clearly,  Israel  would  have  preferred  to  circle  up  the  wagons,  go  into  laager , 
and  keep  a low  profile.  In  that  situation,  however,  they  heard  the  prophet  of 
God  declare  to  them: 

“You  are  my  witnesses,”  says  the  Lord, 

“and  my  servant  whom  I have  chosen, 
that  you  may  know  and  believe  me 
and  understand  that  I am  He. 


2 8o 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


Before  me  no  god  was  formed, 
nor  shall  there  be  any  after  me. 

I,  I am  the  Lord, 

and  besides  me  there  is  no  savior. 

I declared  and  saved  and  proclaimed, 

when  there  was  no  strange  god  among  you; 
and  you  are  my  witnesses,”  says  the  Lord. 

(Isa.  43:10-12) 

In  an  exposition  of  this  text,  philosopher  Paul  Ricoeur  calls  attention  to  the 
fact  that  in  passages  like  this  the  biblical  authors  use  the  terms  “witness”  and 
“testimony”  metaphorically.1  Their  literal  sense  is  located  socially  in  the 
institution  of  a court  of  law,  where  there  is  a judge  and  a jury,  a prosecution 
and  a defense,  and  an  issue  to  be  tried.  The  prophet  of  God,  according  to 
Ricoeur,  uses  the  concept  of  a trial  as  a metaphor  for  human  history.  History 
is  the  trial  where  the  disputed  issue  is  Who  is  God?  Who  is  God  really?  Who 
is  really  God?  Thus  the  ringing  challenge: 

Bring  forth  the  people  who  are  blind,  yet  have  eyes, 
who  are  deaf,  yet  have  ears! 

Let  all  the  nations  gather  together, 
and  let  the  peoples  assemble. 

Who  among  them  can  declare  this, 
and  show  us  the  former  things? 

Let  them  bring  their  witnesses  to  justify  them, 
and  let  them  hear  and  say,  It  is  true. 

(Isa.  43:8-9) 

Ricoeur  points  out  further  that  the  testimony  a witness  gives  has  a quasi- 
empirical  character.  We  testify  to  what  we  have  seen  and  heard,  or  to  what  we 
have  at  least  experienced.  But  testimony  also  has  a convictional  dimension.  It 
represents  what  we  believe  in  the  depth  of  our  being.  Moreover,  testimony  in 
a trial  is  never  a neutral  act.  We  bear  witness  in  behalf  of  either  the 
prosecution  or  the  defense. 

This  is  the  biblical  context  in  which  we  hear  the  New  Testament  call 
Christians  to  the  witness  stand.  Following  the  resurrection,  the  disciples  asked 
Jesus  if  the  trial  of  history  was  about  to  conclude.  His  answer  was  this:  “It  is 
not  for  you  to  know  times  or  seasons  which  the  Father  has  fixed  by  his  own 

! Paul  Ricoeur,  Essays  on  Biblical  Interpretation,  ed.  Lewis  S.  Mudge  (Philadelphia: 
Fortress,  1980),  119-54. 


28i 


JEHOVAH'S  BYSTANDERS 

authority.  But  you  shall  receive  power  when  the  Holy  Spirit  has  come  upon 
you;  and  you  shall  be  my  witnesses  in  Jerusalem  and  in  all  Judea  and  Samaria 
and  to  the  end  of  the  earth”  (Acts  1:8).  History  continues.  The  trial  proceeds. 
The  issue  remains  unresolved:  Who  is  God?  Who  is  God  really?  Who  is 
really  God? 

The  God  who  claimed  Jesus  as  his  Son  and  raised  him  from  the  dead  still 
calls  his  people  to  give  their  testimony,  to  bear  their  witness.  That  responsibil- 
ity falls  especially  upon  those  whom  God  calls  to  leadership  roles  in  the 
church.  That  responsibility  falls  particularly  upon  the  Class  of  1996  as  you 
graduate  this  day  from  Princeton  Theological  Seminary  and  go  forth  to  places 
of  ministry  across  the  world. 

It  is  a world  very  much  like  ancient  Babylon  with  its  ethnic,  cultural,  and 
religious  pluralism.  It  is  a world  very  much  like  the  Greco-Roman  civilization 
into  which  the  risen  Christ  sent  his  apostles  armed  only  with  his  Spirit  and  his 
gospel.  The  world  into  which  you  go  now  is  called  by  many  postmodern, 
meaning  a world  without  intellectual  foundations,  a world  that  views  truth 
claims  as  matters  of  opinion  and  moral  convictions  as  personal  preferences,  a 
world  that  considers  what  William  James  called  “Truth  with  a big  T and  in 
the  singular”  evidence  of  false  consciousness. 

Speaking  on  this  theme  last  month  at  a west-coast  pastors’  conference,  a 
minister  attested  to  the  validity  of  this  assessment  from  his  own  ministry  on  a 
university  campus.  “Years  ago,”  he  said,  “my  witness  to  Jesus  Christ  was 
greeted  with  the  demand  ‘What  evidence  do  you  have  for  that  claim?’  [the 
modern  question].  Today  my  witness  is  met  with  the  sneer  ‘What  right  do  you 
have  to  make  such  a statement?’  [the  postmodern  question].”  It  is  no  wonder 
that  our  time  in  history  is  known  as  “the  age  of  suspicion.” 

Nathan  A.  Scott,  Jr.  picks  up  on  the  metaphor  suggested  by  the  Russian 
literary  critic  Mikhail  Bakhtin  and  renames  our  time  “the  age  of  carnival.”  A 
carnival  is  a scene  at  which  everyone  is  trying  to  get  your  attention,  to  lure  you 
into  their  sideshow,  to  play  their  game,  to  take  their  ride.  No  attraction  has  a 
privileged  position,  and  the  arrangement  is  without  rhyme  or  reason.  By 
comparison,  a three-ring  circus  is  a model  of  organization  and  rationality. 
According  to  Scott,  “What  Bakhtin  takes  to  be  the  most  fundamental  fact 
about  carnival  is  that,  under  its  strange  kind  of  dispensation,  ambivalence  of 
viewpoint  is  the  prevailing  sentiment:  nothing  is  accorded  a privileged  status, 
and  everything  is  relativized.”2 

At  such  a time  and  into  such  a world,  you  now  go  forth  to  assume  leadership 

2 Nathan  A.  Scott,  Jr.,  “The  House  of  Intellect  in  an  Age  of  Carnival,”  in  The  Whirl-wind 
in  Culture , ed.  D.  W.  Musser  and  J.  L.  Price  (Bloomington,  IN:  Meyer-Stone,  1988),  43. 


282 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


roles  in  the  church  of  Jesus  Christ.  It  is  admittedly  an  awesome  task.  But  no 
more  awesome  than  the  task  to  which  the  prophet  called  Israel  in  its  time  of 
Babylonian  captivity.  And  certainly  no  more  daunting  than  the  mission  the 
risen  Jesus  laid  upon  his  disciples. 

Do  not  look  to  the  culture  for  support  of  your  views  or  your  vision.  Do  not 
be  surprised  if  even  the  church  resists  your  witness  and  is  indifferent  to  your 
testimony,  for  the  church  today  is  an  acculturated  institution.  But  remember 
that  the  Lord  Jesus  Christ  does  not  send  you  forth  alone  to  bear  witness  in 
your  own  strength  and  according  to  your  own  wisdom. 

Ever  remember  his  promise,  “You  shall  receive  power  when  the  Holy  Spirit 
has  come  upon  you.”  Today,  the  Seminary  has  accredited  you  academically. 
Your  respective  churches  will  authorize  you  ministerially.  But  only  God  can 
empower  you  for  the  task  to  which  he  has  called  you  and  to  which  you  now 
turn  your  hand. 

May  the  Spirit  of  Christ  be  upon  you  and  with  you  all  the  days  of  ministry 
that  are  before  you,  and  may  you  be  found  credible  and  authentic  witnesses  in 
the  trial  that  human  history  is. 


Leaders  with  Heart 

by  Leonora  Tubbs  Tisdale 


Leonora  Tubbs  Tisdale , Associate  Professor 
of  Preaching  and  Worship  at  Princeton 
Theological  Seminary , preached  this  ser- 
mon at  Princeton  Seminary's  Baccalaure- 
ate Service , held  at  Nassau  Presbyterian 
Church  on  May  19,  1996. 


Texts:  1 Samuel  16:1-13 
Philippians  1:3-1 1 

IT  WAS  not  until  a month  ago  that  I finally  got  around  to  seeing  the  movie 
that  some  of  you  had  been  telling  me  for  weeks  that  I should  see:  Dead  Man 
Walking.  And  by  the  time  I went,  I had  a good  idea  what  to  expect.  I had  seen 
an  extensive  interview  on  the  “Today”  show  with  Susan  Sarandon,  and  so  I 
expected  to  like  the  real-life  character  she  plays,  Sister  Helen  Prejean.  I had 
heard  discussions  about  the  movie’s  balanced  treatment  of  the  death  penalty, 
so  I expected  it  to  leave  me  free  to  make  my  own  decisions.  I knew  that  the 
movie  would  probably  be  emotionally  draining,  so  I waited  until  a time  when  I 
was  viscerally  ready  for  it,  packed  in  plenty  of  Kleenex,  and  went  with  trusted 
friends.  And  I had  listened  to  no  less  than  five  student  sermons  that  used  some 
incident  from  the  movie  as  an  illustration  or  example  (some  of  them  very  fine 
sermons  preached  by  some  of  you),  so  I waited  expectantly  throughout  the 
movie  for  those  already  familiar  scenes  to  appear. 

But  what  I didn’t  expect— didn’t  fully  expect  at  all— was  that  there,  in  the 
East  Windsor  Cinema,  on  a Friday  afternoon  in  April,  I would  encounter  on 
the  Hollywood  big  screen  (of  all  places!)  a leader  who  would  make  me  both  so 
proud,  and  so  challenged,  to  be  a Christian. 

Here,  at  last  was  a movie  that  didn’t  paint  believers  as  insensitive,  legalistic, 
moralistic  jugheads  who  go  around  beating  everyone  over  the  heads  with  their 
KJV  Bibles.  Here,  at  last,  was  a movie  where  the  minister  type  (ironically,  in 
this  instance,  a nonordainable  Roman  Catholic  woman)  didn’t  mount  the 
pulpit  to  preach  pious  platitudes  or  to  hurl  hateful  epithets  of  prejudice 
against  some  out-group.  Here,  at  last,  was  a movie  in  which  the  Christian  was 
not  hopelessly  naive,  blatantly  stupid,  or  sickeningly  sweet. 

Here,  instead,  was  a movie  that  portrayed  a Christian  leader  with  heart 
— a heart  big  enough  to  embrace  in  love  both  the  families  of  the  murder 
victims  and  the  one  convicted  of  committing  the  murder; 

— a heart  wise  enough  to  interpret  the  gospel,  in  all  its  costly  grace,  in 
language  that  a death-row  inmate  could  hear  and  receive; 


284 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


— a heart  vulnerable  enough  to  enter  into  the  heartache,  anger,  and  pain  of 
another  and  to  walk  with  suffering  ones,  even  through  the  valley  of  the 
shadow  of  death; 

— a heart  brave  enough  to  take  a stand  for  justice  and  to  refuse  to 
compromise  or  apologize  for  it,  even  when  grossly  misunderstood  and 
misinterpreted; 

— and  a heart  humble  enough  to  admit  its  wrongs  and  to  seek,  through 
prayer,  a wisdom  that  comes  from  God  alone. 

In  Sister  Helen  Prejean,  I encountered,  in  a most  unlikely  place,  a leader 
with  heart.  And  I left  that  local  theater  both  deeply  moved  and  profoundly 
challenged.  For  by  comparison,  I found  my  own  heart  lacking. 

In  our  Old  Testament  reading  this  afternoon  we  are  reminded  that  what 
matters  most  to  God  in  the  quest  for  good  leaders  is  not  the  outer  appearance  — 
the  way  we  look,  the  charm  we  manifest,  the  ranks  we  attain,  the  degrees  we 
possess— but  what  is  on  our  hearts. 

Our  story  begins  when  Saul  was  king  in  Israel,  and  Saul,  as  the  scriptures 
tell  us,  was  the  kind  of  king  who,  from  the  outward  appearance,  had  it  all.  He 
had  wealth;  he  had  charm;  he  had  charisma;  and  he  had  good  looks.  Indeed, 
the  Bible  says  that  “there  was  not  a man  among  the  people  of  Israel  more 
handsome  than  [Saul];  from  his  shoulders  upward,  he  was  taller  than  any  of 
the  people”  (1  Sam.  9:2). 

But  the  Bible  also  tells  us  that  God,  in  time,  repented  for  having  made  Saul 
king  over  Israel.  Why?  Because  Saul  lacked  that  one  criterion  absolutely 
essential  for  leadership  under  God:  a good  heart.  Instead  of  obeying  and 
serving  God,  Saul  had  looked  out  for  his  own  vested  interests.  Instead  of 
heeding  God’s  commands  and  doing  that  which  best  profited  God’s  people, 
Saul  had  done  that  which  profited  himself.  Instead  of  erecting  altars  for  the 
worship  and  glory  of  God,  Saul  had  erected  a monument  unto  himself.  And 
God  was  not  pleased. 

And  so,  in  the  passage  we  read  this  afternoon,  God  basically  stages  a coup 
d’etat— an  overthrow  of  Saul.  While  Saul  is  still  king,  still  officially  in  power, 
God  sends  the  prophet  Samuel  out  to  the  tiny  village  of  Bethlehem,  to  the 
house  of  Jesse,  to  do  a very  risky  thing:  to  anoint  a new  king  over  Israel.  And 
this  time,  God  makes  it  very  clear  what  the  primary  criterion  should  be.  For 
when  the  oldest  of  the  sons  of  Jesse— a big,  strapping,  handsome  lad— comes 
before  Samuel  and  Samuel  says,  “Surely,  God,  this  must  be  the  one,”  God 
quickly  intervenes. 

“Do  not  look  on  his  appearance  or  on  the  height  of  his  stature,”  God  says, 
“For  I have  rejected  this  one.  The  Lord  does  not  see  as  mortals  see;  they  look 
on  the  outward  appearance,  but  the  Lord  looks  on  the  heart”  (v.  7). 


LEADERS  WITH  HEART 


285 


As  many  of  you  graduating  Hebrew  scholars  know,  we  really  don’t  have  a 
word  in  English  that  does  justice  to  the  Hebrew  understanding  of  “heart.” 
When  we  think  “heart,”  we  tend  to  think  Valentine’s  Day,  love,  and  warm, 
sentimental  feelings.  A “soft-hearted”  person  is  one  who  is  quick  in  empathy; 
a “big-hearted”  person  is  one  with  a generous  spirit.  And  those  sentiments 
certainly  capture  a part  of  what  the  Bible  means  by  “heart.” 

But  heart  in  the  Bible  means  more,  much  more. 

The  heart  to  the  Hebrews  was  not  only  the  seat  of  emotions;  it  was  also  the 
seat  of  reason.  It  was  through  the  heart  that  a person  gained  knowledge  and 
understanding,  made  plans,  and  pondered  the  deepest  things  of  life.  It  was  the 
heart  that  gave  a leader  the  discernment  to  rule  justly  and  wisely,  making  fair 
and  equitable  choices  on  behalf  of  a people.  To  say  that  a person  had  a good 
heart  in  Israel  was  also  to  suggest  that  the  person  had  that  intangible  quality 
called  “wisdom.” 

The  heart  was  also  the  locus  of  conscience  in  Hebrew  thinking.  When  the 
Psalmist  prays,  “Create  in  me  a clean  heart,  O God,  and  renew  a right  spirit 
within  me,”  that  Psalmist  is  asking  God  for  a renewal  of  conscience.  From  a 
hardened  or  uncircumcised  heart  could  flow  forth  wickedness  or  deceit  or 
hatred.  But  from  a tender  heart,  an  upright  heart,  a cleansed  and  renewed 
heart,  flowed  goodness,  honesty,  and  compassion. 

It  was  the  heart  that  guided  a leader’s  will.  If  the  leader’s  heart  was  centered 
on  God  and  God’s  desires  for  a people  — attending  to  God’s  special  concern 
for  the  poor  and  the  oppressed  — then  the  leader  was  able  to  guide  the  people 
in  the  ways  of  justice,  righteousness,  and  truth.  But  if  other  desires  ruled  the 
heart— pride,  self-promotion,  greed,  a lust  for  power— then  the  leader  fol- 
lowed other  paths. 

And  it  was  the  heart  that  revealed  where  a leader’s  ultimate  loyalty  lay.  A 
ruler  with  a good  heart  was  devoted  to  God,  worshiped  God,  and  stayed  ever 
open  to  God’s  guidance,  teaching,  and  correction.  But  a ruler  with  a bad  heart 
shut  God  out  and  often  went  after  other  gods— whether  they  were  the  gods  of 
other  peoples  or,  as  in  the  case  of  Saul,  the  god  of  self. 

The  heart,  in  short,  represented  the  essence  of  the  human  person.  From  a 
good  heart  could  flow  traits  like  wisdom,  integrity,  commitment,  courage, 
compassion,  justice,  and  ethical  decision  making.  And  it  was  for  that  rare  and 
elusive  leader— a leader  with  heart— that  God  sent  Samuel  seeking  in  Bethle- 
hem that  day. 

It  is  graduation  weekend  here  at  Princeton  Seminary,  and  while  a lot  has 
changed  in  the  three  thousand  years  since  God  sent  Samuel  to  Bethlehem, 
one  thing  has  not:  This  world  still  desperately  needs  leaders  with  heart. 

We  certainly  need  such  leaders  in  political  life  — leaders  who  are  not  simply 


286 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


media  darlings  like  Saul  or  attuned  to  what  the  latest  popularity  polls  would 
have  them  say  but  compassionate  and  knowledgeable  visionaries,  modeling,  in 
both  their  public  and  private  lives,  the  justice  and  righteousness  of  God. 

Several  weeks  ago,  I was  transporting  a group  of  teenagers  from  one  place 
to  another,  when  the  conversation  turned  to  the  upcoming  presidential 
election  in  this  land.  I was  distraught  to  hear  one  of  them  say  that  she  had  two 
friends  who,  though  they  would  turn  eighteen  this  year  and  be  eligible  to  vote 
for  the  first  time,  probably  would  not.  “But  why?”  I asked  (breaking  my  usual 
rule  about  not  interrupting  such  conversations  when  I am  in  the  role  of  the 
eavesdropping  adult).  Because,  the  general  consensus  from  the  back  seat 
seemed  to  be,  there  is  no  candidate  in  this  election  with  the  kind  of  vision, 
integrity,  and  compassion  that  inspire  trust.  No  leader  with  heart. 

Earlier  this  week,  I opened  the  Trenton  Times  to  see  an  article  regarding  the 
ongoing  debate  over  teaching  values  in  the  public  schools.  And  I thought,  as  I 
read  it,  how  much  we  continue  to  need  leaders  with  heart  in  our  school 
system.  Not  only  do  we  need  teachers  who  love  their  subject  matter  and  instill 
in  their  students  a love  for  it,  too.  We  also  need  teachers  who,  through  their 
care  for  and  respect  of  students,  model  values  far  beyond  words  in  the 
classroom.  Our  children  are  hungering  for  such  leaders  with  heart. 

In  the  workplace , too,  there  is  a longing  for  leaders  with  heart:  people  who 
not  only  go  about  their  own  work  with  intelligence,  commitment,  and  high 
ethical  standards  but  who  also  inspire  others  with  whom  they  work  toward 
greater  character  and  faith. 

My  husband  and  I recently  attended  the  wedding  of  a wonderful  couple  in 
our  church  who  had  been  introduced  to  each  other  by  the  groom’s  boss,  also  a 
member  of  our  church.  It  was  a joyous  wedding,  one  made  all  the  sweeter  by 
the  compatibility  of  this  couple  and  the  fact  that  they  had  been  waiting  until 
well  into  their  thirties  to  discover  one  another.  And  as  the  wedding  festivities 
proceeded  into  the  evening  in  typical  New  Jersey  style— with  a four-course 
Italian  meal,  much  toasting,  and  dancing— it  became  increasingly  apparent 
that  there  was  another  special  relationship  being  celebrated  on  this  night, 
namely,  the  love  and  affection  shared  between  this  groom  and  his  older 
mentor,  the  boss.  Not  only  was  the  boss  reported  to  have  been  driving  by  the 
church  all  afternoon  in  nervous  anticipation  of  this  marriage  as  if  it  were  his 
own;  not  only  did  he  appear  about  to  pop  his  buttons  every  time  he  was 
recognized  for  having  introduced  these  two  wonderfully  suited  people  to  one 
another.  What  was  also  apparent,  at  every  turn,  was  the  devotion,  admiration, 
and  respect  this  groom  had  for  his  boss.  For  this  young  man  had  discovered  in 
his  workplace  a boss  with  heart— one  who  not  only  mentored  him  in  his  work, 


LEADERS  WITH  HEART  287 

but  who  also  cared  enough  to  mentor  him  in  other  aspects  of  his  life  as  well. 
And  that  leader  had  obviously  made  all  the  difference. 

The  world  needs  leaders  with  heart.  And  so  does  the  church.  Pastors  and 
Christian  educators,  chaplains  and  teachers,  scholars  and  administrators 

—who  excel  not  only  in  knowledge  but  also  in  wisdom; 

—who  have  not  only  a seminary  degree  but  also  a high  degree  of  humility; 

—who  are  capable  of  loving  not  only  those  who  agree  with  them  but  also 
those  who  disagree  with  them; 

— and  whose  lives  are  spent  not  in  erecting  monuments  unto  themselves 
but  in  leading  others  to  the  altar  of  God. 

The  truth  of  the  matter  is,  Princeton  Seminary  Class  of  1996,  this  world 
desperately  needs  you  (as  it  needs  all  of  us  who  call  ourselves  Christian)  to  be 
such  leaders  with  heart— in  whatever  place  or  ministry  you  find  yourself 
placed  by  God. 

But  that  call,  as  many  of  you  have  shared  with  me  in  recent  weeks,  can  be 
somewhat  daunting. 

“Who  am  I,”  some  of  you  have  said  to  me,  “to  think  I am  ready  to  leave  this 
pasture  where  I have  been  busily  tending  books  and  papers  and  exams  and  to 
take  on  the  mantle  of  pastor  or  teacher  or  educator,  tending  a flock  of  God’s 
people?”  “Who  am  I,  ordinary  person  that  I am,  to  think  God  might  use  me 
to  preach  the  gospel,  to  comfort  the  afflicted,  to  guide  the  confused,  or  to  be  a 
role  model  for  anyone?”  “Who  am  I,  average  person  that  I am,  to  think  that 
God  might  be  calling  me  to  be  a leader  who  makes  a difference  in  my  country7 
back  home  or  in  the  community  to  which  I am  called?”  “Who  am  I,  woman 
that  I am,  to  think  that  God  actually  called  me  — and  not  one  of  the  seven 
sons— to  this  ministry?”  “Who  am  I,  who  know  so  well  how  far  short  my  own 
heart  falls  of  reflecting  the  heart  of  Christ,  to  think  that  God  can  use  me  to 
inspire  other  hearts  to  turn  to  God?” 

It  is  precisely  at  this  juncture  that  I believe  our  Old  Testament  text  for 
today  offers  us  good  news  and  encouragement.  For  it  reminds  us  of  that  which 
is  at  the  very  heart  of  the  gospel  itself:  God’s  way  is  often  to  choose  that  which 
the  world  deems  weak  to  put  to  shame  the  strong;  to  choose  that  which  the 
world  deems  foolish  to  shame  the  wise. 

Samuel  went  to  Bethlehem,  to  the  house  of  Jesse,  looking  for  a leader  with 
heart.  And  for  a while  it  looked  as  if  he  would  not  find  one.  Like  contestants  in 
a beauty  pageant,  Jesse’s  sons  paraded  before  Samuel  — first  Eliab,  then 
Abinadab,  then  Shammah. . . . From  the  oldest  to  the  youngest  they  came,  and 
each  time  Samuel  and  God,  judges  in  search  of  a beauty  that  had  nothing 


288 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


whatsoever  to  do  with  external  appearance,  would  confer:  “Is  this  the  one?” 
“No,  not  this  one.  I’m  looking  for  the  one  with  heart.” 

Finally,  when  all  seven  sons  had  filed  by  and  none  had  been  found  to  be 
king,  Samuel  asked  Jesse  in  exasperation,  “Are  all  of  your  sons  here?”  And 
that’s  when  Jesse  sent  out  to  the  pasture  to  bring  in  his  youngest,  David  — one 
who  had  no  resume,  no  history  of  grand  accomplishments,  no  wealth,  no 
power,  no  impressive  stature  — a mere  child.  But  it  was  this  one,  this  totally 
unexpected  one,  whom  God  deemed  to  have  that  most  important  leadership 
trait  of  all:  a good  heart.  It  was  this  one  whom  God  anointed  to  be  the  next 
king  over  Israel. 

Several  weeks  ago,  I went  back  to  the  town  where  I had  graduated  from 
college,  Chapel  Hill,  North  Carolina,  to  preach  at  the  University  Presbyte- 
rian Church  there.  And  the  weekend  became  something  of  a pilgrimage  of 
remembrance  for  me,  as  I reflected  upon  a leader  with  heart  whom  I 
unexpectedly  encountered  there  twenty-five  years  ago  and  who  profoundly 
changed  my  life. 

The  year  was  1971,  and  the  time  was  one  of  great  turmoil  and  upheaval  in 
the  life  of  this  nation.  Students  were  mounting  protests  on  college  campuses 
in  opposition  to  the  Vietnam  War.  The  President  of  this  nation,  Richard 
Nixon,  and  many  other  high  national  leaders  were  being  publicly  investigated 
regarding  their  roles  in  the  Watergate  scandal.  College  campuses  across  the 
land  were  troubled  places  where  students,  cut  loose  from  the  old  moorings  of 
authority  and  truth,  sought  to  find  their  way  to  meaning  through  drugs  or 
multiple  sexual  partners  or  other  self-destructive  means.  And  the  church  — 
once  strong  and  respected  in  the  era  of  the  1950s— seemed  to  be  losing  its 
voice. 

When  I decided  to  transfer  out  of  my  private,  church-related  women’s 
college  after  two  years  and  go  to  a large,  secular  state  institution  — the 
University  of  North  Carolina— my  parents  were  not  altogether  thrilled.  But  I 
went  anyhow,  searching  for  direction  and  purpose  in  my  life;  searching  for  a 
major  (for  I had  by  then  run  through  several);  searching  for  some  wisdom  and 
guidance  for  my  future;  and  searching  to  see  if  there  was  a way  to  think  about 
my  Christian  faith  that  made  sense  in  light  of  the  troubled  world  in  which  I 
found  myself. 

It  was  in  a large  lecture  hall  on  the  UNC  campus  that  I encountered  my 
leader  with  heart— though  I,  like  Samuel,  didn’t  immediately  recognize  him 
as  such.  He  was  a short,  wiry  man  with  a face  weathered  from  many  hours 
spent  in  the  sun.  And  as  he  lectured  to  that  packed  hall  of  two-hundred-plus 
students,  he  paced,  back  and  forth,  back  and  forth,  without  a note  in  his  hands. 


LEADERS  WITH  HEART 


289 


What  initially  astonished  me,  frankly,  was  that  his  courses  were  filled  to 
overflowing  with  students.  Because  in  the  heart  of  this  secular  university  in 
this  secular  era,  this  man  taught  not  math  or  political  science  or  literature  or 
economics.  He  taught  the  Bible. 

But  what  also  became  readily  apparent  to  me  — even  my  first  day  in  his 
class— was  that  he  taught  it  with  his  heart. 

He  taught  with  wisdom  and  reason,  allowing  me,  for  the  first  time,  to 
explore  the  world  of  historical  criticism  and  to  be  able  to  ask  all  the  hard 
questions  of  biblical  texts  I had  always  wanted  to  ask. 

He  taught  with  integrity  and  character,  introducing  me  to  the  world  of  the 
Old  Testament  prophets,  and  modeling— by  his  living  and  by  his  stances  on 
critical  social  issues  of  the  day— the  ethics  he  taught  from  the  scriptures. 

Above  all,  he  taught  with  a passionate  love  for  God  and  God’s  Word  that 
shone  through  in  every  word  he  spoke  and  that  caused  me  to  trust  him  to  lead 
me  also  in  ways  of  deeper  understanding  and  truth. 

His  name  was  Dr.  Bernard  Boyd,  and  though  I cannot  begin  to  estimate  the 
influence  this  one  leader  with  heart  had  on  the  lives  of  students  who  passed 
through  his  courses  at  UNC,  I can  tell  you  something  of  the  influence  he  had 
on  my  life. 

Because  of  this  leader  with  heart,  I changed  my  major  yet  one  more 
time  — to  religion  — and  took  every  single  Bible  course  he  taught.  When  I 
went  to  seminary  some  years  later,  it  was  not  because  I wanted  to  be  a 
preacher.  (That  vocation  caught  me  totally  by  surprise.)  It  was  because  Dr. 
Boyd  had  whetted  within  me  an  appetite  and  a desire  for  more  knowledge  of 
the  Bible,  and  I wanted  to  study  it  in  its  original  languages. 

Because  of  this  leader  with  heart,  I was  invited  to  take  courses  not  only  in 
the  classroom  but  also  in  the  home  of  the  Boyds— where  I attended  not  only 
to  the  subject  matter  of  the  course  we  were  taking  on  Deuteronomic  history 
but  also  to  the  obvious  love  and  affection  shared  by  Bernard  Boyd  and  his 
wife,  Thelma.  Their  home  was  a place  of  warmth  and  welcome  for  students, 
and  the  love  shared  between  these  two  people,  who  were  obviously  devoted  to 
one  another,  became  a model  for  me  when  I began  thinking  of  the  kind  of 
home  I wanted  in  the  future. 

And  because  of  these  leaders  with  heart,  I got  my  first  job  after  college  — as 
director  of  youth  ministry  in  a church  in  Spartanburg,  South  Carolina,  a job 
that  not  only  set  me  on  my  vocational  course  toward  ministry  but  also  led  me 
to  the  man  who  has  been  my  beloved  spouse  these  past  twenty-one  years,  A1 
Tisdale. 


290 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


Never  did  I imagine  as  a young  woman  sitting  in  Dr.  Boyd’s  lecture  halls  in 
the  early  seventies  and  listening  to  him  tell  stories  about  his  days  as  a seminary 
student— his  days  as  a Princeton  Seminary  student— that  my  own  path  would 
lead  me  to  this  place.  But  as  I walk  the  campus  these  days,  I often  do  so  with  an 
awareness  of  one  who  has  walked  them  before  me  and  with  a prayer  of  great 
thanksgiving  that  God,  at  such  an  impressionable  time  in  my  own  life,  sent  me 
a leader— a graduate  of  this  place— with  heart. 

The  church  and  the  world  today  are  desperately  in  need  of  leaders  with 
heart.  And  the  good  news  of  the  gospel  is  that  God  chooses  very  ordinary 
people  — a David  from  Bethlehem,  a Helen  Prejean  from  Baton  Rouge, 
Louisiana,  a Bernard  Boyd  from  Mt.  Pleasant,  South  Carolina;  a Diana 
Brawley  from  Wilmington,  North  Carolina,  a Cleo  LaRue  from  Corpus 
Christi,  Texas,  or  a Geetha  Arulmohan  from  Bangalore  — and  calls  them  forth 
to  be  such  leaders.  Not  because  they  have  it  all  together.  Not  because  they  can 
wow  and  dazzle  with  their  external  accomplishments  or  appearance.  And  not 
because  they  are  perfect  people  (for,  as  we  all  know,  King  David  was  by  no 
means  perfect).  But  because  they  have  that  most  important  of  all  leadership 
qualities  — hearts  that  are  open  to  God. 

And  with  such  hearts,  through  the  Spirit’s  anointing,  God  can  do  amazing 
things  in  church  and  world.  Using  that  which  the  world  may  deem  weak,  to 
show  forth  God’s  own  strength;  using  that  which  the  world  may  deem  foolish, 
to  show  forth  God’s  own  wisdom;  using  that  which  the  world  may  deem  very 
ordinary,  to  be  extraordinary  proclaimers  of  God’s  goodness  and  grace. 

The  movie  Dead  Man  Walking  ends  with  a scene  in  which,  through  a church 
window,  we  see  Sister  Helen  Prejean  and  the  father  of  one  of  the  murder 
victims  on  their  knees  at  prayer— opening  their  own  hearts  to  God  for  God’s 
cleansing,  God’s  wisdom,  God’s  guidance.  As  the  movie  ends,  so  would  I like 
to  end  this  sermon:  with  a prayer,  offered  many  years  ago  by  the  aposde  Paul 
for  a group  of  people  who,  as  he  openly  admits,  had  captured  his  own  heart  (as 
many  of  you  in  this  graduating  class  have  captured  mine).  A prayer  offered 
from  the  heart,  for  the  hearts  of  those  he  loved. 

“And  this  is  my  prayer  [for  you],  that  your  love  may  overflow  more  and 
more  with  knowledge  and  full  insight  to  help  you  to  determine  what  is  best,  so 
that  in  the  day  of  Christ  you  may  be  pure  and  blameless,  having  produced  the 
harvest  of  righteousness  that  comes  through  Jesus  Christ  for  the  glory  and 
praise  of  God.”  To  God  be  all  honor  now  and  forever.  Amen. 


The  Actualization  of 
Christ’s  Achievement  in 
Our  Historical  Existence: 
Breaking  out  of  the  New 
Babylonian  Captivity* 
by  Herman  C.  Waetjen 


Herman  C.  Waetjen,  the  Robert  S.  Dollar 
Professor  of  New  Testament  at  San  Fran- 
cisco Theological  Seminary  and  author  of  A 
Reordering  of  Power:  A Socio-Political 
Reading  of  Mark’s  Gospel,  gave  this 
Frederick  Neumann  Memorial  Lecture  in 
the  Main  Lounge  of  Mackay  Campus 
Center  on  April  i,  1996. 


IN  JOHN  14:12,  more  or  less  at  the  beginning  of  his  long  Farewell  Speech, 
Jesus  issues  a startling  pledge  to  his  disciples:  “Amen,  amen,  I say  to  you, 
the  one  who  believes  into  me  will  do  the  works  that  I do,  and  greater  than 
these  she  or  he  will  do  because  I am  going  to  the  Father.”  Throughout  most 
of  the  history  of  the  Christian  movement,  such  a promise  of  fabulous 
possibilities  has  tended  to  be  regarded  as  unimaginable  and  unfulfillable.  Not 
only  has  the  church  subjected  its  members  to  a hierarchical  relationship  of 
dependency  vis-a-vis  the  Christ  that  would  preclude  the  actualization  of  such 
a divine  potentiality,  but  as  a participant  in  the  culture  of  the  Western  world, 
the  church  has  been  captive  to  a five-hundred-year  trajectory  of  material 
rationality  that  has  eclipsed  the  reality  of  possibility.  Both  the  verticality  of  the 
faith  relationship  between  Jesus  and  his  disciples  and  the  delimitations  of  the 
materialist  paradigm,  which  originated  in  the  nominalism  of  William  of 
Ockham,1  have  foreclosed  the  fulfillment  of  the  covenantal  promise  of  John 
14:12.  Accordingly,  those  who  have  embraced  the  Christian  faith  throughout 
this  period  have  been  confined  to  a kind  of  Babylonian  captivity  that  has 
prevented  them,  like  the  paralytic  at  the  pool  of  Bethesda  in  John  5:5,  from 
entering  the  promised  land  of  health  and  wholeness  and  beginning  to 
experience  the  transcendence  implied  in  Jesus’  summons  “Keep  on  rising, 
take  up  your  mattress,  and  keep  on  walking.” 

Concomitantly,  this  very  same  trajectory  of  material  rationality  has  exerted 
a dominant  influence  on  the  exercise  of  historical  reason  in  its  scientific 
evaluation  of  the  New  Testament’s  witness  to  the  Easter  event.  A materialist 
paradigm  determined  by  causal-calculating  reason  cannot  affirm,  much  less 
corroborate,  the  reality  of  Jesus’  rising  from  the  dead,  and  contemporary  New 
Testament  scholarship  that  operates  within  this  paradigm  either  compro- 


* Dedicated  to  my  beloved  father,  Henry  Waetjen,  in  his  ninety-third  year,  in  profound 
gratitude  for  his  unconditional  love  and  faithful  support. 

1 My  thanks  to  D.R.  McGaughey  of  Willamette  University  for  the  insights  from  the  last 
chapter  of  his  forthcoming  hook,  Strangers  and  Pilgrims:  On  the  Role  of  Aporiai  in  Theology. 


292 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


mises  the  witness  of  the  New  Testament  or  relegates  it  to  the  realm  of  faith.2 3 
A very  recent  example  is  Gerd  Luedemann’s  1994  monograph,  The  Resurrec- 
tion of  Jesus.  In  the  concluding  chapter,  entitled  “Can  We  Still  Be  Christians?” 
Luedemann  writes: 

So  it  is  here  on  the  historical  Jesus,  as  he  is  presented  to  me  by  the  texts  and 
encounters  me  as  a person  through  historical  reconstruction,  that  the 
decision  of  faith  is  made,  not  on  the  risen  Christ  as  I would  have  liked  him 
to  be,  or  as,  for  example,  he  is  accessible  archetypally  to  all  human  beings  as 
a symbol  of  the  self.  However,  I believe  that  this  Jesus  was  not  given  over  to 
annihilation  through  death,  and  the  notion  of  his  being  with  God,  his 
exaltation,  his  resurrection  and  his  life  follow  almost  automatically  from 
our  communion  with  God— but  in  constant  relationship  to  Jesus’  human- 
ity—without,  however,  it  being  possible  to  make  statements  about  his 
present  being.  He  is  hidden  from  us  as  the  Exalted  One;  only  God  is 
manifest.  We  must  stop  at  the  historical  Jesus,  but  we  may  believe  that  he  is 
also  with  us  as  one  who  is  alive  now.  3 

Why  must  we  stop  at  the  historical  Jesus?  For  Luedemann,  of  course,  it  is 
necessary  because  the  resurrection  was  nothing  more  than  a hallucination. 
But  is  the  post-Easter  memory  of  the  early  church  invalid?  And  should  that 
memory  be  disregarded  because  its  formulations,  which  intimate  a new, 
indeed,  a divine  possibility  of  human  existence,  cannot  be  subjected  to 
enlightened,  materialist  reason?  Moreover,  why  is  it  impossible  to  make 
statements  about  Jesus’  present  being?  Must  the  directions  the  post-Easter 
Gospels  offer  for  such  projections  be  dismissed?  And  why  is  Jesus  hidden  from 
us  while  God  is  manifest?  Is  it  no  longer  possible  to  experience  the  post- 
Easter  Jesus  in  the  narrative  worlds  of  the  four  Gospels  or  in  those  arenas  of 
historical  existence  that  the  Gospels  indicate?  Why,  after  Richard  R.  Niebuhr’s 
formidable  critique  of  earlier  interpretations  of  the  Easter  event,  is  New 
Testament  scholarship’s  investigation  of  the  Gospels’  resurrection  narratives 
still  determined  by  the  dualism  of  Kantian  epistemology? 

Luedemann  acknowledges  that  he  has  conducted  his  investigation  of  the 
resurrection  traditions  under  the  “treasured”  influence  of  Wilhelm  Herr- 
mann, and  therefore  inherently  within  the  framework  of  Herrmann’s  loyalty 

2 See  Richard  R.  Niebuhr’s  critique  of  biblical  scholarship’s  interpretation  of  Jesus’ 
resurrection  in  terms  of  Kantian  epistemology  in  Resurrection  and  Historical  Reason  (New 
York:  Charles  Schribner’s  Sons,  1957),  1-7 1. 

3 The  Resurrection  of  Jesus:  History,  Experience,  Theology  (Minneapolis:  Fortress,  1994),  183. 
See  also  his  more  recent  book,  What  Really  Happened  to  Jesus:  A Historical  Approach  to  the 
Resurrection  (Louisville:  Westminster  John  Knox,  1995),  131-37. 


ACTUALIZATION  OF  CHRIST’S  ACHIEVEMENT  293 


to  nineteenth-century  historical  criticism  and  its  determination  by  Kantian 
epistemology.  Like  other  Kant-oriented  theologians,  Herrmann  identified 
history  with  nature  as  the  realm  of  necessity  and  therefore  presupposed  that 
the  scientific  methods  employed  in  the  investigation  of  nature  could  also  be 
applied  to  the  historical-critical  analysis  of  biblical  texts.  Christian  faith 
cannot  find  a resting  place  or  a foundation  for  itself  within  this  Kantian 
domain  of  The  Critique  of  Pure  Reason.  While  the  resurrection  traditions  of  the 
Gospels  may  be  subject  to  critical  analysis,  the  reality  of  Jesus’  rising  from  the 
dead  to  which  they  bear  witness  is  suspect  because,  like  the  other  miracles,  it 
cannot  be  integrated  into  the  causal  nexus  of  either  nature  or  history. 
Ironically,  neither  can  it  be  regarded  as  a “noumenal  reality”  and  appre- 
hended under  The  Critique  of  Practical  Reason,  because  in  his  analysis  of  the 
antinomies  of  reason,  Kant  postulates  that  the  thinking  self  is  an  immortal 
soul.  The  human  body  is  a material  reality,  subject  to  the  categories  of 
substance  and  causality.  Its  finitude  cannot  actualize  the  summum  bonum  of 
perfect  harmony  between  human  reason  and  moral  law.  Practical  reason, 
therefore,  presupposes  the  self-evident  proposition  of  the  immortality  of  the 
soul,  rather  than  the  resurrection  of  the  body,  to  enable  the  moral  faculty  of 
human  being  to  achieve  its  perfection. 

Like  Wilhelm  Herrmann,  Luedemann  makes  a Kant-like  differentiation 
between  historical  criticism  and  existential  faith,  but,  unlike  Herrmann,  the 
“living  personality  of  Jesus”  is  not  encountered  in  the  domain  of  practical 
reason  but  in  the  historical-critical  reconstruction  that  New  Testament 
scholars  have  derived  from  the  texts  of  the  Gospels.  To  quote  Luedemann 
again:  “The  man  Jesus  is  the  objective  power  which  is  the  enduring  basis  of  the 
experiences  of  a Christian.  Through  Jesus  we  are  ‘first  lifted  into  a true 
fellowship  with  God’.  Jesus  grasps  me,  makes  me  bow  down,  exalts  me  and 
makes  me  blessed,  loves  me,  through  all  the  strata  of  the  tradition.  He  is  the 
ground  of  faith. ”4 5  But  can  a historical-critically  reconstructed  Jesus  serve  as  an 
adequate  foundation  on  which  to  build  faith?  Like  Gerd  Luedemann,  John 
Dominic  Crossan  seems  to  think  so.  He  concludes  his  critical  investigation  in 
The  Historical  Jesus:  The  Life  of  a Mediterranean  Jewish  Peasant  with  the 
astonishing  sentence  “If  you  cannot  believe  in  something  produced  by 
reconstruction,  you  may  have  nothing  left  to  believe  in. ”5  Yet  no  critical 
reconstruction  of  any  kind  can  achieve  a representation  of  the  original  reality 
of  Jesus’  career  beyond  the  realm  of  probability.  And  if  such  a reconstruction 


4 Resurrection  of  Jesus,  182. 

5 (San  Francisco:  Harper,  1991),  426. 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


2 94 

were  to  be  adopted  as  the  ground  of  faith,  faith  would  be  nothing  more  than 
intellectual  consent. 

Luedemann’s  form-  and  redaction-critical  analysis  of  the  Easter  stories 
results  in  a virtual  identification  of  the  interpretations  of  the  post-Easter  Jesus 
by  the  earliest  Christians  with  the  critical  reconstruction  of  the  pre-Easter 
Jesus.  “Finally,  our  historical  reconstruction  led  to  the  insight  that  the 
structural  characteristics  of  the  Easter  experience  ...  of  the  forgiveness  of 
sins,  the  experience  of  life,  the  experience  of  eternity,  are  contained  in  the 
words  and  story  of  Jesus.  So  we  have  to  say  that  before  Easter,  everything  that 
was  finally  recognized  after  Easter  was  already  present.”6  For  Luedemann  the 
Easter  event,  whatever  it  was,  is  nothing  more  than  the  reinforcement  of 
earlier  experiences  conveying  to  the  disciples  a better  understanding  of  the 
Jesus  they  had  known.  But  can  this  or  any  historical  reconstruction  constitute 
a provenance  of  human  transformation?  Can  a historically  reconstructed  Jesus 
empower  us  to  do  his  works,  much  less  greater  works  than  those  the  Gospels 
attribute  to  him?  What  is  the  basis  of  the  extraordinary  possibility  that  Jesus 
presupposes  for  his  disciples?  It  appears  that  Luedemann’s  investigation  of  the 
resurrection  of  Jesus  leaves  us  captive  to  a Kantian  epistemology,  which,  as 
Richard  R.  Niebuhr  has  recognized,  absolutizes  the  categories  of  Newtonian 
science  and  cosmology  as  the  forms  of  sensibility  and  the  categories  of  reason 
by  which  the  mind  organizes  and  interprets  the  exogenous  world.7  But  if  the 
universal  structure  of  thought  is  essentially  a sign  process,  that  is,  if  the 
mediation  of  thought  is  always  subject  to  a historically  determined  linguistic 
system,  then  no  epistemological  theory  can  ever  establish  the  limits  of  pure 
reason.  Luedemann,  however,  is  content  in  his  reductionism  to  embrace  an 
elementary  faith.  As  a last  word  he  acknowledges  that  “the  unity  with  God 
experienced  in  faith  continues  beyond  death.”8 9 10  That  evidently  is  enough,  and 
consequently  he  exhorts  “Christians  to  live  by  the  little  that  they  really 
believe,  not  by  the  much  that  they  take  pains  to  believe. ”9 

A postmodern  approach  to  the  New  Testament  witness  to  Jesus’  resurrec- 
tion, as  it  is  developed  by  Marianne  Sawicki  in  her  book  Seeing  the  Lord: 
Resurrection  and  Early  Christian  Practices ,to  is  more  efficacious  in  enabling 
access  to  the  reality  of  resurrection  than  any  analysis  of  the  biblical  texts  that  is 
determined  by  a critical  methodology  founded  on  a Kantian  epistemology. 
The  reality  of  the  Easter  event  is  not  established  by  academic  scholarship 

6 Resurrection  of  Jesus,  181-82. 

7 Resurrection  and  Historical  Reason , 1 19. 

8 Resurrection  of  Jesus,  184. 

9 Ibid. 

10  ( Minneapolis:  Fortress,  1994). 


ACTUALIZATION  OF  CHRIST’S  ACHIEVEMENT  295 


performing  autopsies  on  those  Gospel  narratives  that  bear  witness  to  the 
Easter  event  but  rather  by  engaging  in  those  activities  prescribed  by  them, 
that  is,  identifying  with  the  hungry  and  the  poor,  obeying  the  teaching  of 
Jesus,  and  devoting  oneself  to  liturgy.  Evidently  influenced  by  Jacques 
Derrida’s  dictum  “There  is  nothing  outside  of  the  text,”11  Sawicki  contends 
that  the  continuity  of  the  risen  Lord’s  presence  and  the  experience  of  “seeing 
the  Lord”  are  constituted  by  the  reality  of  intertextuality.  Of  course,  if  there  is 
nothing  outside  of  the  text,  there  are  many  different  kinds  of  texts  that  are 
inscribed  with  meaning:  not  only  the  great  diversity  of  printed  matter  but  also 
culture  and  human  beings.  Ironically,  however,  the  texts  of  the  New  Testa- 
ment Gospels  are,  like  Jesus’  tomb,  empty.12  They  will  not  enable  us  to 
encounter  the  risen  Lord.  At  best,  they  are  “professional  training  manuals,” 
which  convey  bodily  and  textual  strategies  that  indicate  those  contexts  and 
activities  in  which  the  risen  Lord  will  be  seen.  According  to  Matthew,  that 
experience  will  occur  in  the  practice  of  the  ethics  of  the  Sermon  on  the 
Mount;  according  to  Luke-Acts,  it  will  take  place  in  our  participation  in  and 
our  response  to  a community  of  hungry  people. '3  The  referents  of  the  term 
“resurrection”  are  established  by  the  Gospels  and  are  always  beyond  the  New 
Testament  texts,  enabling  readers  to  identify  and  recognize  the  living  pres- 
ence of  the  risen  Lord  in  the  texts  of  the  world.  Accordingly,  Sawicki  argues, 
“It  would  be  a misconception  to  regard  the  gospel  words  as  referring,  after  the 
fact,  to  some  event  separate  and  self-contained  that  happened  independently 
of  those  words  and  that  subsists  apart  from  them  somewhere  in  the  human 
past.”'4  And  “those  who  want  to  see  the  Lord  must  devote  themselves  to 
liturgy  and  the  poor  (better  yet,  the  liturgy  with  the  poor)  as  well  as  to  printed 
texts.”'5 

Certainly  the  Gospels  are  not  historical  reconstructions  that  re-present  the 
actuality  of  the  unfolding  of  Jesus’  career  in  its  original  Palestinian  context. 
But  are  they  simply  “professional  training  manuals,”  designed  to  instruct  us 
where  we  will  see  the  risen  Lord?  As  artistically  constructed  texts,  they,  by  the 
signs  that  constitute  them,  put  forward  potential  narrative  worlds;  and  we,  by 
the  activity  of  reading,  (1)  transform  those  signs  into  people,  places,  actions, 
and  teaching  and  (2)  concomitantly  create  discrete,  self-contained  story 
worlds.  Our  own  discipleship  is  not  deferred  as  we  engage  in  this  aesthetic 


“Jacques  Derrida,  Of  Grammatology  (Baltimore:  Johns  Hopkins  University  Press,  1976), 

t58. 

12  Sawicki,  Seeing  the  Lord , 84-89. 
n Ibid.,  83,  89-91. 
o Ibid.,  93.  See  also  302-3. 

‘5  Ibid.,  303. 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


296 

activity.  But  we  are  the  advantaged  disciples  because  we  are  listening  to  an 
omniscient  narrator  informing  us  of  events  and  actions  in  the  life  of  Jesus  that 
his  original  disciples  do  not  experience.  For  example,  as  the  disciples  from 
outside  the  text,  in  contrast  to  the  disciples  inside  the  text,  we  learn  from  the 
narrator  of  Mark’s  Gospel  the  words  the  heavenly  voice  spoke  to  Jesus  as  the 
Spirit  descended  into  him  at  his  baptism,  “You  are  my  beloved  Son;  in  you  I 
began  to  take  pleasure.”  How  will  we,  privileged  with  this  knowledge,  answer 
the  question  the  disciples  verbalize  when  they  have  experienced  Jesus’  author- 
ity over  the  forces  of  chaos  in  the  stilling  of  the  storm,  “Who  then  is  this  for 
even  the  wind  and  the  sea  obey  him?”  How  will  we  evaluate  Simon  Peter’s 
confession,  “You  are  the  Christ,”  or  how  will  we  judge  his  subsequent 
elevation  of  Jesus  to  the  rank  of  Elijah  and  Moses  in  response  to  the 
transfiguration?  What  happens  to  us,  or  what  do  we  do  when  we  reach  the 
conclusion  of  Mark’s  Gospel  and  discover  there  is  no  closure?  The  end  proves 
not  to  be  the  end!  According  to  the  youth  of  Mark  16:5,  Jesus  has  been  raised 
from  the  dead,  and,  even  as  he  is  no  longer  in  the  tomb,  he  is  no  longer  in  the 
text.  He  is  on  his  way  to  Galilee,  most  likely  to  inaugurate  a second  career  that 
will  be  similar  to  the  first.  Inexplicably,  the  three  women  who  came  to 
complete  the  burial  of  Jesus’  corpse  remain  silent  in  spite  of  the  ecstasy  of 
their  revelatory  experience.  What  will  be  our  response?  Will  we  believe  the 
good  news  of  Jesus’  resurrection?  Will  we,  the  disciples  outside  the  text, 
create  a continuation  of  the  narrative  by  following  Jesus  to  Galilee?  Evidently 
that  is  our  only  recourse  to  determine  the  truth  of  the  youth’s  testimony. 
Words  cannot  deliver  the  certainty  of  Jesus’  resurrection,  even  in  the  light  of 
the  witness  of  Mary  Magdalene  and  Mary  the  mother  of  Jesus  inscribed  in  the 
Gospel  according  to  Matthew.  Nevertheless,  their  empirical  experience  of 
both  seeing  the  risen  Lord  and  grasping  his  feet  is  indispensable  in  establish- 
ing the  ontological  reality  of  his  resurrection. 

Jesus  did  not  merely  rise  into  the  Christian  proclamation,  as  Rudolf 
Bultmann  maintained;  nor  did  he  rise  into  intertextuality,  as  Sawicki  pro- 
poses. At  the  same  time,  the  Easter  event  is  not  to  be  reduced  to  a hallucina- 
tion or  a psychological  episode  that  occurred  within  the  consciousness  of  the 
disciples.  In  his  post-Easter  appearances,  Jesus  presented  himself  to  his 
disciples  as  an  objective  — not  physical!  but  objective  — reality;  and  a number 
of  Easter  stories  utilize  attributes  of  physicality  to  express  that  objectivity. 
According  to  Luke  24:34,  Jesus  invites  his  disciples  to  “Look  at  my  hands  and 
my  feet;  see  that  it  is  I myself.  Touch  me  and  see;  for  a ghost  does  not  have 
flesh  and  blood  as  you  see  that  I have.”  To  provide  additional  confirmation, 
he  asks  for  and  receives  a piece  of  broiled  fish,  which  he  eats  in  their  presence. 


ACTUALIZATION  OF  CHRIST’S  ACHIEVEMENT  297 


The  ontological  reality  of  Jesus’  resurrection  from  the  dead  can  only  be 
experienced  in  terms  of  physicality.  Sawicki,  therefore,  rightly  connects 
resurrection  with  the  bodily  imaging  of  God.16  Seeing  the  Lord  occurs 
concretely  in  “sharing  the  necessities  of  life,”17  that  is,  feeding  the  hungry, 
clothing  the  naked,  giving  hospitality  to  the  stranger,  caring  for  the  sick  and 
visiting  the  imprisoned,  as  the  parable  of  the  sheep  and  the  goats  in  Matthew 
25:31-46  discloses.  Nevertheless,  resurrection  is  more  that  caring  for  the 
poor  and  celebrating  the  liturgy.  Resurrection  is  more  than  engaging  in 
bodily  and  physical  strategies.  Resurrection  is  more  than  something  that 
happens  between  and  among  persons.’8 

Resurrection  is  the  entry  into  a new  moral  order  that  is  constituted  as  a 
terrestrial  reality  by  the  creative  act  of  God,  and  therefore  it  is  something  that 
happens  to  individual  human  beings.  It  is  a principle  component  of  the 
eschatological  projection  of  a new  heaven  and  a new  earth  that  originated  in 
the  millennialism  of  Jewish  apocalypticism,  and  it  seems  to  have  made  its 
earliest  appearance  in  the  Apocalypse  of  Isaiah  (Isaiah  24-27),  specifically  in 
Isaiah  26:19. 

Your  dead  shall  live,  their  corpses  shall  rise. 

O dwellers  in  the  dust,  awake  and  sing  for  joy! 

For  your  dew  is  a radiant  dew, 

and  the  earth  will  give  birth  to  those  long  dead. 

Daniel  12:2  enlarges  this  eschatological  vision  to  include  the  despicable  and 
the  ignoble.  “Many  of  those  who  sleep  in  the  dust  of  the  earth  shall  awake, 
some  to  everlasting  life,  and  some  to  shame  and  everlasting  contempt.” 
Resurrection  and  its  attendant  reconstitution  of  all  things  is  preceded, 
however,  by  a cataclysmic  judgment  that  terminates  the  old  moral  order.  The 
process  of  redemption  in  society  has  disintegrated. J9  New  forms  of  power 
have  been  introduced  that  have  altered  the  distribution  of  wealth.  The  old 
rules  that  governed  the  ordering  of  power  no  longer  guarantee  the  truth  of 
things.  As  political  oppression  and  economic  exploitation  intensify  the  social 
unrest,  those  who  become  aware  of  their  disenfranchisement  isolate  them- 
selves from  the  current  moral  order  and  form  communities  that  are  oriented 
toward  the  search  for  a new  kind  of  social  being.  Intellectual  activity  aided  by 


16  Ibid.,  336. 

17  Ibid.,  84. 

18  Ibid.,  79. 

19  See  Kenelm  Burridge,  New  Heaven— New  Earth:  A Study  of  Millenarian  Activities  (New 
York:  Schocken,  1969),  4-14. 


298 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


scriptural  interpretation  endeavors  to  comprehend  the  changes  that  have 
occurred  in  the  social  construction  of  reality. 

Exemplifying  this  phase  of  millenarian  formation  is  book  1 of  1 Enoch, 
which,  by  an  appropriation  of  the  myth  of  Genesis  6:1-4,  attributes  the 
disintegration  of  the  current  social  order  to  the  birth  of  giants  who  “con- 
sumed the  produce  of  all  the  people  until  the  people  detested  feeding  them. 
So  the  giants  turned  against  the  people  in  order  to  eat  them”  (1  Enoch 
7:3-4).20  These  giants  are  identifiable  as  systemic  structures  and  social 
institutions  that  transcend  the  power  and  control  of  the  peasantry  and  extract 
the  surplus  of  their  agricultural  production.  The  injustices  that  prevail  cannot 
be  eradicated  by  a reformist  response.  A new  condition  of  being  is  required, 
and  therefore  the  irremediable  moral  order  that  predominates  must  be 
terminated. 

Book  1 of  1 Enoch  foretells  the  eternal  punishment  of  the  watchers,  “the 
children  of  heaven,”  as  well  as  the  destruction  of  the  giants.  Daniel  foresees 
the  annihilation  of  the  four  chaos  monsters  that  devour  much  flesh.  First 
Enoch’s  Apocalypse  of  Weeks  anticipates  the  final  judgment  to  occur  during 
the  tenth  week  of  human  history: 

there  shall  be  the  eternal  judgment;  and  it  shall  be  executed  by  the  angels  of 
the  eternal  heaven.  . . . The  first  heaven  shall  depart  and  pass  away;  a new 
heaven  shall  appear;  and  all  the  powers  of  heaven  shall  shine  forever 
sevenfold.  Then  after  that  diere  shall  be  many  weeks  without  number 
forever;  it  shall  be  a time  of  goodness  and  righteousness,  and  sin  shall  no 
more  be  heard  of  forever.  (1  Enoch  91:15-17) 

The  Messiah  apocalypse  of  2 Baruch  offers  essentially  the  same  vision.  The 
creation  will  be  returned  to  primordial  chaos  during  the  thirteenth  epoch  of 
human  history,  and  the  fourteenth  and  final  age  will  mark  the  beginning  of 
eternal  justice  and  peace. 

Resurrection  is  God’s  re-creation  of  the  deceased  elect,  those  who  are 
identified  in  Isaiah  26:19  as  the  dead  who  belong  to  God:  “Your  dead  shall 
live;  their  corpses  shall  rise.”  Resurrection  opens  the  door  to  a joyful 
participation  in  the  reconstitution  of  all  things.  In  the  Similitudes  of  1 Enoch, 
Enoch  is  assured: 

The  righteous  and  elect  ones  shall  be  saved  on  that  day.  . . . The  Lord  of  the 
Spirits  will  abide  over  them;  they  shall  eat  and  rest  and  rise  with  that  Son  of 

20  All  quotations  of  1 Enoch  are  taken  from  the  translation  by  E.  Isaac,  in  The  Old 
Testament  Pseudepigrapha,  2 vols.,  ed.  James  H.  Charlesworth  (Garden  City:  Doubleday, 
1983-85),  1:13-89. 


ACTUALIZATION  OF  CHRIST'S  ACHIEVEMENT  299 


Man  forever  and  ever.  The  righteous  and  elect  ones  shall  rise  from  the  earth 
and  shall  cease  being  of  downcast  face.  They  shall  wear  the  garments  of 
glory.  These  garments  of  yours  shall  become  the  garments  of  life  from  the 
Lord  of  the  Spirits.  Neither  shall  your  garments  wear  out,  nor  your  glory 
come  to  an  end  before  the  Lord  of  the  Spirits.  (1  Enoch  62:1 3-16) 

The  Easter  appearances  of  the  risen  Jesus  to  Cephas,  the  twelve,  and  “to 
more  than  five  hundred  sisters  and  brothers  at  one  time”  unquestionably 
engendered  intellectual  ferment  (1  Cor.  15:5-6).  Recognition  was  vital, 
requiring  the  identification  of  the  risen  one  with  Jesus  of  Nazareth  and 
alternately  determining  the  significance  of  both  the  event  and  the  person. 
Among  the  variety  of  interpretations  that  emerged  was  the  myth  of  resurrec- 
tion, derived  from  the  eschatology  of  Jewish  apocalypticism  and  imposed  on 
the  event  of  Jesus’  rising  from  the  dead  to  signify  the  inauguration  of  the 
millenarian  vision  of  a new  heaven  and  a new  earth.  Attendantly,  from  within 
this  millenarian  orientation,  Jesus  himself  was  identified  with  the  barnasha  of 
Daniel  7:13-14,  a type  of  new  Adam,  who,  on  the  basis  of  his  appearance 
before  the  Ancient  of  Days,  recovered  the  characteristics  that  distinguish  the 
human  being  created  in  the  image  and  likeness  of  God:  dominion,  glory,  and 
kingship  (see  Ps.  8:4-8).  In  the  Hellenistic  Jewish-Christian  community,  the 
identification  of  Jesus  with  the  barnasha  of  Daniel  7:13-14  was  translated  into 
the  christological,  but  corporately  oriented,  title:  ho  huios  tou  anthropou.  By 
raising  Jesus  from  the  dead,  God  appointed  him  to  be  the  founder  of  a new 
humanity.  Accordingly  in  1 Corinthians  15:45,  the  apostle  Paul  acknowledges 
him  to  be  the  “Last  Adam”  who  is  a “life-giving  spirit,”  the  image  of  the  glory 
of  God  into  which  those  who  follow  him  are  being  metamorphosed  from  one 
degree  of  glory  to  another  (2  Cor.  3:18). 

A number  of  passages  in  the  letters  of  the  apostle  Paul  indicate  that  he 
embraced  this  interpretation  of  the  Easter  event.  Above  all,  of  course,  is  1 
Corinthians  15,  where  it  is  especially  obvious  in  his  circular  argumentation  of 
verses  12-13:  “Now  if  Christ  is  proclaimed  as  raised  from  the  dead,  how  can 
some  of  you  say  there  is  no  resurrection  of  the  dead?  If  there  is  no  resurrection 
of  the  dead,  then  Christ  has  not  been  raised.”  What  the  Corinthian  Christians 
evidently  are  rejecting  is  the  eschatology  of  the  resurrection  of  the  dead,  a 
reality  of  the  future  when  “the  trumpet  will  sound,  and  the  dead  will  be  raised 
imperishable,  and  we  will  be  changed.”  In  an  effort  to  convince  them,  Paul 
utilizes  the  analogy  of  a grain  of  wheat  in  order  to  develop  the  difference 
between  two  kinds  of  bodies,  the  flesh-and-blood  body  of  the  present,  which 
has  its  own  glory,  and  the  spiritual  body  of  the  future,  which  will  be  superior 
in  glory  to  the  physical  body  as  one  star  is  superior  in  splendor  to  another. 


300 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


But  the  millennial  myth  of  resurrection,  as  applied  to  the  Easter  event,  not 
only  guarantees  the  future  resurrection.  Above  all,  it  identifies  the  reality  of 
Jesus’  rising  from  the  dead  as  the  beginning  of  a new  creation  as  well  as  the 
birth  of  a new  humanity.  The  realized  eschatology  of  the  new  creation  is  the 
hub  of  Pauline  theology  from  which  the  spokes  of  his  contextualizing 
interpretations  radiate.  J.  Christiaan  Beker  has  articulated  it  well.  The  apoca- 
lyptic reality  of  the  regnum  Christi  is  the  “deep  structure”  or  “coherent 
center”  from  which  “a  variety  of  symbols”  is  drawn  in  response  to  the 
contingencies  of  Paul’s  evangelizing  contexts.21  Paul  himself  acknowledges  it 
as  such  in  Galatians  6:15.  “For  neither  circumcision  nor  uncircumcision  is 
anything,  but  a new  creation.  And  as  many  as  follow  this  rule,  peace  on  them 
and  mercy  and  upon  the  Israel  of  God.” 

If  the  Easter  event  of  Jesus’  rising  from  the  dead,  as  interpreted  by  the  myth 
of  resurrection,  signifies  the  establishment  of  a new  creation,  Jesus’  death, 
accordingly,  must  denote  the  end  of  the  old  creation.  In  this  respect  the 
millennialism  of  Jewish  apocalypticism  also  functions  as  the  “deep  structure” 
of  Pauline  theology.  For  if  Jesus’  death  terminates  the  old  moral  order,  Paul 
can  simultaneously  declare,  as  he  does  in  2 Corinthians  5:17,  “old  things 
passed  away;  new  things  have  happened.” 

Moreover,  Jesus’  death,  like  his  rising  from  the  dead,  becomes  a vital  factor 
in  the  establishment  of  a paradigmatic  experience  into  which  all  humanity  can 
enter,  namely,  dying  and  rising  with  Christ.  Paul  enlarges  on  this  in  Romans 
6:4.  “Therefore  we  were  buried  with  him  through  baptism  into  death  so  that 
even  as  Christ  was  resurrected  from  the  dead  through  the  glory  of  the  Father, 
so  let  us  walk  in  the  newness  of  life.”  The  myth  of  resurrection,  accordingly, 
provides  the  key  to  the  interpretation  of  Jesus’  rising  from  the  dead  and, 
retrospectively,  to  the  interpretation  of  Jesus’  death. 

But  the  consequence  of  participating  in  Jesus’  death  must  be  clearly 
apprehended.  “If,”  as  Paul  says,  “one  died  on  behalf  of  all  and  consequently 
all  died,”  that  death  must  be  claimed  as  the  end  of  my  involvement  in  the  old 
moral  order.  “Old  things  passed  away.”  My  eschatological  death,  therefore, 
terminates  my  participation  in  the  human  condition  of  sin  that  dominates  the 
old  moral  order  as  well  as  the  alienation  that  that  disease  engenders.  The 
wonderful  outcome  is  reconciliation  with  God.  Paul’s  understanding  of 
atonement  is  derived  not  from  the  temple  cult  but  from  the  interpretation  of 
Jesus’  death  as  the  end  of  the  old  creation.22  “For  if  being  enemies  we  were 

21  J.  Christiaan  Beker,  Paul  the  Apostle:  The  Triumph  of  God  in  Life  and  Thought  (Philadel- 
phia: Fortress,  1980),  17. 

22  See  Matthew  27:51-53  for  the  influence  of  the  millennialism  of  Jewish  apocalypticism. 


ACTUALIZATION  OF  CHRIST’S  ACHIEVEMENT  301 


reconciled  to  God  through  the  death  of  his  Son,  how  much  more,  being 
reconciled,  shall  we  be  saved  by  his  life”  (Rom.  5:10).  We  are  reconciled  to 
God  through  the  death  of  his  Son,  but  not  without  our  own  participation  in 
that  death.  We  are  also  saved  by  his  life,  but  not  without  our  participation  in 
his  resurrection.  There  is  no  cheap  grace  here! 

“Being  saved”  begins  with  an  entry  into  the  reality  of  resurrection.  It  is 
analogous  to  the  experience  of  Lazarus,  the  Beloved  Disciple  in  the  narrative 
world  of  the  Fourth  Gospel.  After  the  stone,  which  seals  the  cave  of  nonbeing 
in  which  he  is  buried,  has  been  rolled  away  and  Jesus  has  issued  the  call  to 
come  forth,  he,  with  hands  and  feet  bound  and  eyes  covered  with  a burial 
cloth,  by  some  prodigious  effort  succeeds  in  exiting  from  the  tomb.  Re- 
created or  resurrected,  he  is  ready  to  begin  a journey  into  a new  moral  order. 
But  unbinding  must  first  take  place  before  he  is  able  to  walk  and  to  see;  and 
since  he  is  unable  to  set  himself  free,  he  needs  some  assistance  from  the 
community  to  which  he  belongs.  Like  Lazarus’,  our  salvation,  our  being 
saved,  lies  in  our  being  unbound  and  set  free.  By  entering  the  new  creation, 
which  God  constituted  through  the  Easter  event,  we  have  been  resurrected 
with  Christ,  and  therefore  we  have  become  members  of  a new  humanity 
bearing  the  identity  of  “life-giving  spirits.”  As  Paul  says  in  1 Corinthians 
15:45,  “The  first  human  Adam  became  a living  being;  the  last  Adam  a 
life-giving  spirit.”  Those  who  are  “in  Christ,”  the  last  Adam,  are  “life-giving 
spirits”!  That,  however,  is  a paradoxical  identity.  For  although  we  have  died 
with  Christ  and  have  been  raised  with  Christ,  and  therefore  are  participating 
in  the  new  humanity  of  “life-giving  spirits,”  we  are  undergoing  a metamorpho- 
sis that  is  transfiguring  us  into  the  image  and  stature  of  our  pioneer,  the 
resurrected  Christ.  The  process  of  transformation  gradually  enables  us  to 
“rule  in  life”  and  to  engage  in  the  activities  of  the  dikaiosyne  ton  theou , the 
justice  of  God  (Rom.  5:17). 

It  is  in  this  domain  of  being  “in  Christ,”  the  last  Adam,  and  consequently 
also  being  on  the  way  into  a reordering  of  power  that  all  the  possibilities  of 
this  new  creation  become  realizable.  The  scale  and  scope  of  those  possibili- 
ties, disclosed  by  Jesus  in  the  narrative  world  of  the  four  Gospels,  are 
originated  and  activated  by  God’s  breath,  the  Holy  Spirit.  We,  who  are 
“life-giving  spirits”  because  we  belong  to  a new  humanity  and  are  therefore 
being  metamorphosed  from  one  degree  of  glory  to  another  (2  Cor.  3:18),  are 
called  to  incarnate  those  possibilities  as  God’s  surrogates  with  and  for  our 
fellow  human  beings. 

The  Easter  event,  as  interpreted  by  the  myth  of  resurrection,  has  inaugu- 
rated the  long  awaited  reconstitution  of  all  things.  This  is  the  time  of  the 


3°2 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


regnum  Christi , the  reign  of  Christ.  Paul  characterizes  it  as  the  age  in  which 
the  Christ  abolishes  every  rule,  every  authority  and  every  power;  that  is,  all  the 
forms  and  forces  of  death  that  prevent  all  who  have  been  created  in  God’s 
image  and  likeness  from  “ruling  in  life.”  Only  after  this  work  has  successfully 
been  completed  will  the  Christ  return  the  kingship  to  God  and  become 
subordinate  to  God,  as  Paul  states  in  i Corinthians  15:28.  This  reign  of 
Christ,  however,  must  not  be  construed  as  the  elite  sovereignty  of  the  Lord 
Jesus  Christ.  The  new  creation  is  not  a reconstruction  of  a hierarchical 
ordering  of  power.  The  kingship  of  the  risen  Christ  is  a horizontally  struc- 
tured rule  in  which  all  the  members  of  the  new  humanity  have  an  equal  share. 
For  the  Christ,  as  Paul  contends  in  1 Corinthians  12:12,  is  the  community  of 
the  one  and  the  many:  “For  even  as  the  body  is  one  and  has  many  members, 
and  all  the  members  of  the  body  being  many  are  one  body,  so  also  the 
Christ.”2} 

The  objective  of  this  corporate,  horizontally  constituted  kingship  is  the 
deliverance  of  the  creation  from  its  bondage,  the  redemption  of  the  old  moral 
order  and  all  who  participate  in  it.  This  is  the  work  that  God  has  reserved  for 
and  entrusted  to  the  new  humanity;  and  the  languishing  creation  is  awaiting 
its  manifestation.  “For,”  as  Paul  declares  in  Romans  8:19-21,  “the  eager 
expectation  of  the  creation  is  waiting  for  the  unveiling  of  the  sons  and 
daughters  of  God.  For  the  creation  was  subordinated  to  futility,  not  willingly, 
but  on  account  of  the  one  (who)  subordinated  it  in  hope.  Because  the  same 
creation  will  be  liberated  from  the  enslavement  of  corruption  into  the  liberty 
of  the  glory  of  the  children  of  God.” 

This  is  the  assignment  the  new  humanity  is  called  to  fulfill.  To  say  the  least, 
it  is  an  awesome  undertaking,  and,  as  each  year  passes,  it  seems  more 
preposterous.  Nevertheless,  God  will  not  rescue  the  creation  unassisted. 
Incarnation  is  the  instrumentality  by  which  this  objective  will  be  achieved.  All 
who  participate  in  the  new  humanity  of  the  risen  Christ  and  therefore  are 
“life-giving  spirits”  are  called  to  collaborate  with  God  and  fulfill  this  commis- 
sion to  save  the  creation.  There  is  no  other  legitimation  for  Christian  identity. 

The  undertaking  is  realizable  only  if  the  reign  of  Christ  is  a horizontally 
shared  kingship.  Jesus  himself  acknowledged  that  in  his  confession  at  his  trial 
before  the  Sanhedrin,  “You  will  see  the  Son  of  the  Human  Being  (the  new 
humanity)  seated  on  the  right  hand  of  power.”  Christian  self-understanding 
humbly  but  courageously  embraces  this  privileged  position  of  being  co- 
enthroned with  the  resurrected  Jesus  and  therefore  also  being  co-enthroned 


2 3 See  Beker,  Paul,  306-10. 


ACTUALIZATION  OF  CHRIST'S  ACHIEVEMENT  303 


with  God.  It  is  from  this  source  that  divine  possibility  originates  and  becomes 
actualizable  in  historical  existence. 

The  Synoptic  account  of  the  stilling  of  the  storm  dramatizes  this  reality. 
Jesus  falls  asleep  in  the  middle  of  a storm  while  sailing  across  the  Sea  of 
Galilee.  From  fear  of  drowning,  his  disciples  awaken  him,  not  because  they 
want  a miracle  to  save  them  but  because  Jesus,  who  in  view  of  his  location  “in 
the  stern  on  the  pillow”  is  the  pilot,  has,  by  falling  asleep,  lost  control  of  the 
boat.  They  simply  want  him  to  get  his  hand  back  on  the  rudder  and  guide  the 
boat  through  the  storm.  They  are  acting  according  to  the  old  paradigm  of 
Psalm  107:23-32.  To  quote  the  most  pertinent  verses,  “Then  they  cried  to 
the  Lord  in  their  trouble,  and  he  brought  them  out  from  their  distress;  he 
made  the  storm  be  still,  and  the  waves  of  the  sea  were  hushed.”  Jesus  delivers 
them,  but  in  an  unanticipated  manner,  namely,  by  assuming  the  role  of  the 
Lord  and  calming  the  wind  and  the  sea.  But  immediately  afterwards  he 
reproaches  them  for  being  cowardly  and  not  having  faith.  Yet,  at  least 
according  to  the  old  paradigm,  they  had  faith.  They  had  cried  out  to  the  Lord 
in  their  trouble.  Why  does  Jesus  reprimand  them?  Evidently,  the  old  para- 
digm of  dependence  is  no  longer  valid  to  those  who  are  following  Jesus  into  a 
new  moral  order.  Verticality  promotes  dependence  and  paralysis.  “Having 
faith”  now  involves  acting  out  of  the  empowerment  of  participating  in  the 
resurrection  of  Jesus  from  the  dead.  When  Jesus  subsequently  sends  the 
disciples  across  the  Sea  of  Galilee  alone,  they  are  hesitant  to  go  without  him 
because  they  remember  how  safe  and  secure  they  were  when  he  was  in  the 
boat  with  them.  Consequently,  it  is  necessary  for  him  to  compel  them  to  get 
into  the  boat  (Mark  6:45).  In  view  of  the  time  when  he  will  be  taken  away  from 
them,  they  must  learn  how  to  be  pioneers  in  his  place  for  those  who  will 
follow  them  into  a reordering  of  power.  As  they  begin  to  sail  across  the  sea, 
Jesus  ascends  “into  the  mountain”  to  pray  for  them;  when  he  descends  at  dusk 
he  observes  that  they  have  made  little  progress.  Yet  he  does  not  interfere. 
During  the  fourth  watch  of  the  night  he  comes  to  them  walking  on  the  sea, 
and,  as  the  narrator  informs  us,  “he  was  wanting  to  pass  them  by”  (Mark 
6:48).  Jesus  is  anxious  about  them,  but  he  refuses  to  be  paternalistic.  They 
must  be  trained  for  the  future,  for  their  exercise  of  sovereignty  and  power  will 
be  essential  for  the  fulfillment  of  their  commission.  They  must  learn  the  limits 
of  the  authority  they  bear  as  members  of  the  community  of  the  Son  of  the 
Human  Being. 

The  disciples,  however,  see  Jesus  walking  on  the  sea  and,  imagining  him  to 
be  a ghost,  cry  out  in  fear.  He  responds  to  their  alarm  immediately,  “Keep  on 
being  courageous!  I AM.  Stop  being  afraid!”  In  his  self-disclosure  he  employs 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


3°4 

the  phrase  ego  eimi,  the  Septuagint  translation  of  Yahweh’s  self-identification 
to  Moses  at  the  burning  bush,  and  also  the  Septuagint  translation  of  Yahweh’s 
declarations  of  transcendence  and  matchlessness  in  Isaiah  41-48.  In  perform- 
ing an  act  that  is  traditionally  limited  to  God,  as  Job  9:8  indicates,  Jesus  by  his 
use  of  “I  AM”  reveals  the  identity  and  destiny  of  the  new  humanity,  that 
community  of  “life-giving  spirits”  that  is  willed  by  God  to  be  transformed 
into  the  image  and  stature  of  the  risen  Lord.  When  Jesus  climbs  into  the  boat, 
the  wind  ceases,  but  his  disciples  are  profoundly  unsettled:  “They  went  out  of 
their  minds!”  They  do  not  understand  the  significance  of  what  they  have 
witnessed  because,  as  the  narrator  explains,  “they  did  not  understand  about 
the  loaves,  but  their  heart  was  hardened”  (Mark  6:53).  The  sovereignty  that 
Jesus  manifested  by  walking  on  the  sea  is  the  same  as  that  by  which  he  fed  the 
multitudes;  it  is  the  sovereignty  of  the  New  Human  Being  whom  God  gave 
birth  to  and  who  therefore  is  God’s  Offspring.  The  disciples,  however, 
continue  to  let  their  society  and  its  culture  determine  the  limitations  of 
possibility  in  historical  existence. 

Marianne  Sawicki  is  right  when  she  states,  “The  first  evangelists  find  that 
they  cannot  bring  anyone  to  the  possibility  of  resurrection  through  the  mere 
telling  of  a story.”24  Her  insistence,  however,  is  on  the  teaching  that  succeeds 
the  wonder  working  of  the  early  prophets,  teaching  that  will  enable  the 
disciples  “to  reach  and  recognize  the  risen  Lord,”  to  see  “what  they  literally 
cannot  see:  Jesus  in  the  hungry,  the  thirsty,  the  strange,  the  naked,  the  sick, 
and  the  imprisoned. ”25  But  the  possibility  of  resurrection  is  not  established 
simply  and  only  on  the  basis  of  “seeing  the  Lord”  in  the  communities  of  the 
poor  and  the  oppressed.  Personal  participation  in  Jesus’  resurrection  and  its 
entry  into  a reordering  of  power  is  paramount.  If  the  disciples  and  Peter 
follow  the  risen  Jesus  to  Galilee  where  he  is  initiating  a second  career,  they 
will  not  only  “see  the  Lord”  as  he  continues  his  ministry  among  the 
marginalized  masses,  they  will  also  participate  in  his  resurrection,  even  as  they 
participated  in  his  death;  and  consequently,  like  him  at  the  beginning  of  his 
career  in  the  narrative  world  of  Mark’s  Gospel,  they  will  be  called  into  being 
as  God’s  beloved  daughters  and  sons  and  simultaneously  be  empowered  to 
actualize  the  possibilities  of  the  reign  of  Christ. 

At  the  conclusion  of  Matthew’s  narrative  world,  the  eleven  representatives 
of  the  new  Israel  “see  the  Lord”  on  the  Sinai-like  mountain  of  Galilee  where 
the  risen  Jesus  appears  to  them.  “But  some  doubted”  (28:17).  What  they 
doubt  is  not  clarified,  but  most  likely  the  reader  is  to  assume  that  it  is  the 

Seeing  the  Lord,  84. 

Ibid.,  87. 


ACTUALIZATION  OF  CHRIST’S  ACHIEVEMENT  305 


reality  of  Jesus’  resurrection  from  the  dead.  Nothing  is  said  or  done  to  resolve 
their  doubts.  The  risen  Jesus  claims  to  have  received  “all  authority  in  heaven 
and  on  earth,”  thereby  intimating  the  fulfillment  of  Daniel  7:13-14  and  the 
confirmation  of  his  identity  in  resurrection  as  the  bar  nasha  or  the  New 
Human  Being.  He  issues  the  so-called  Great  Commission  and  at  the  same 
time  insinuates  the  means  by  which  their  doubts  will  be  resolved.  By  fulfilling 
their  authorization  to  make  disciples  of  all  ethnic  communities  in  the  same 
way  Jesus  disciples  them,  any  doubts  of  the  reality  of  his  resurrection  that 
might  persist  will  be  dispelled. 

But  there  is  more  than  the  teacher’s  teaching  that  is  to  be  taught  to  disciple 
others.  Eleven  ascended  the  cosmic  navel  of  the  mountain  in  Galilee;  twelve 
descend.  The  teacher  joins  the  eleven,  and  as  the  twelfth,  constitutes  the  new 
Israel  and  imparts  equal  participation  in  his  identity  as  the  bar  nasha , the  New 
Human  Being,  and  equal  participation  in  the  fullness  of  his  authority  in 
heaven  and  on  earth.  The  I AM,  with  which  he  identified  himself  to  his 
disciples  while  walking  on  the  Sea  of  Galilee  (14:27),  now  encloses  them  — and 
us!  “See,  I with  you  AM  ( ego  meth  hymon  eimi)  even  to  the  consummation  of  the 
age.”  Drawn  into  the  I AM  of  Emmanuel,  “God  with  us,”  the  community  of 
the  New  Human  Being,  which  the  risen  Lord  constitutes  on  this  Sinai-like 
navel  in  Galilee,  is  empowered  to  continue  the  world-transforming  ministry 
of  Jesus. 

In  the  Acts  of  the  Apostles,  the  evangelist  Luke  draws  his  readers  into  the 
Pentecostal  experience  of  the  disciples,  after  Matthias  has  been  chosen  to 
replace  Judas  as  the  twelfth  representative  of  the  new  Israel.  “All  were 
together  in  one  place;  and  suddenly  from  heaven  there  came  a sound  like  the 
rush  of  a violent  wind,  and  it  filled  the  entire  house  where  they  were  sitting. 
Divided  tongues,  as  of  fire,  appeared  among  them,  and  a tongue  rested  on 
each  of  them”  (2:1-3).  All  of  them,  both  the  women  and  the  men,  receive 
empowerment  through  the  same  gift  of  God’s  Spirit  that  had  descended  upon 
Jesus  at  his  baptism.  While  Jesus  was  anointed  by  the  Spirit’s  settling  upon 
him  in  the  physical  appearance  of  a dove,  signaling  that  he  was  being 
sanctioned  by  heaven,  his  disciples  are  ratified  by  a supracephalic  flame  that 
signified  the  dawn  of  the  new  age  and  their  participation  in  the  apotheosis  of 
the  risen  Lord.26 

In  the  Fourth  Gospel,  Jesus  breathes  the  Spirit  on  his  disciples  on  Easter 
evening  (20:22),  and  as  a result  his  earlier  promise  of  14:1-3  is  fulfilled,  “In 

26  For  the  significance  of  the  “tongue  of  fire,”  see  Richard  Oster,  “Numismatic  Windows 
into  the  Social  World  of  Early  Christianity:  A Methodological  Inquiry,”  Jottrnal  of  Biblical 
Literature  101  (i982):2 12-14. 


306 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


my  Father’s  house  are  many  rooms;  and  if  not,  I would  tell  you  because  I am 
going  to  prepare  a place  for  you.  Again  I am  coming  and  I will  receive  you  to 
myself  so  that  where  I AM  ( ego  eimi ) you  also  are.”  As  bearers  of  God’s 
presence  they  become  “rooms”  in  “the  Father’s  house,”  rooms  that  Jesus 
prepared  by  going  away  into  death  and  resurrection.  Accordingly  empowered, 
they  will  begin  to  fulfill  Jesus’  promise,  “the  works  that  I do  you  will  do  and 
greater  works  than  these  because  I am  going  to  the  Father.” 

The  Gospels  are  not  “about”  access  to  one  who  died.  Their  generic  content 
is  not  to  communicate  the  means  of  approaching  someone  dead.2?  All  of  them, 
in  their  own  distinctive  modes,  end  without  closure  indicating  or  intimating 
where  and  by  what  means  the  reality  of  the  Easter  event  can  be  experienced. 
The  “seeing”  that  is  required  results  from  a personal  entry  into  death  and 
resurrection  with  Jesus  and  concomitantly  actualizing  the  divine  possibilities 
that  belong  to  the  legacy  of  the  new  humanity.  Seeing  clearly  is  a divine  gift, 
but  sometimes,  as  in  the  story  of  Jesus’  opening  the  eyes  of  a blind  human 
being  in  two  stages,  the  sight  that  is  gained  is  imperfect,  and  a second  remedial 
touch  is  necessary  (Mark  8:22-26). 

Lazarus,  as  the  Beloved  Disciple  of  the  Fourth  Gospel,  offers  an  apposite 
epistemological  model.  Although  he  is  not  identified  by  the  narrator  as  the 
Beloved  Disciple,  we  as  the  readers  can  make  that  identification  on  the  basis  of 
the  first  of  the  Easter  episodes  in  the  Fourth  Gospel.  When  Mary  Magdalene 
reports  her  discovery  of  an  empty  tomb,  two  disciples,  Simon  Peter  and  “the 
one  whom  Jesus  loved,”  scramble  to  investigate.  The  details  the  narrator  gives 
are  crucial  for  the  identification  of  the  Beloved  Disciple. 

The  two  were  running  together,  and  the  other  disciple  ran  ahead  faster 
than  Peter  and  came  to  the  tomb  first  and  bending  over  he  sees  the  strips  of 
linen,  but  he  did  not  enter.  Then  Simon  Peter  comes  following  him  and  he 
entered  the  tomb.  And  he  views  the  strips  of  linen  and  the  face  cloth  that 
was  on  his  head,  not  lying  with  the  linen  strips  but  folded  up  into  one  place. 
Then  the  other  disciple  entered,  the  one  coming  to  the  tomb  first,  and  he 
saw  and  believed.  (20:4-8) 

There  is  no  way  to  account  for  the  strange  conduct  of  the  Beloved  Disciple 
except  to  identify  him  with  Lazarus.  He  outruns  Peter  but  does  not  enter  the 
tomb.  He  has  surmised  what  has  happened,  but  he  is  hesitant  to  enter  the 
tomb  because  he  himself  came  out  of  a tomb.  Nevertheless,  he  eventually 
enters,  stands  beside  Peter,  eyeballs  the  same  empirical  objects  of  Jesus’  burial 
garments,  and  believes.  His  faith  is  not  simply  a leap  into  the  dark,  nor  is  it 


o Against  Sawicki,  Seeing  the  Lord,  302. 


ACTUALIZATION  OF  CHRIST’S  ACHIEVEMENT  307 


based  on  scriptural  proof.  “For,”  as  the  narrator  observes,  “they  did  not  yet 
know  the  scripture  that  he  must  rise  from  the  dead.”  He  believes  because  of 
his  own  experience  of  resurrection.  When  he  sees  the  strips  of  linen  folded  up 
into  one  place,  he  remembers  that  he  himself  came  out  of  his  tomb,  bound 
hand  and  foot,  and  had  to  be  set  free.  Jesus,  in  his  resurrection  from  the  dead, 
had  the  authority  of  the  New  Human  Being  “to  lay  down  his  life  and  to  take  it 
up  again.”  The  seeing  and  believing  of  the  Beloved  Disciple  are  determined 
by  his  own  experience  of  resurrection  as  Lazarus.  That  is  the  epistemological 
foundation  of  his  faith. 

Marianne  Sawicki  ends  her  inquiry  into  Christian  origins  by  contending  for 
a postmodern  theology  that  does  not  “insist  on  a God  beyond  text  or  on 
causality  from  beyond  the  textual  world.”28  “As  modern  theology  worked  out 
a place  for  God  in  the  ‘depth  dimension,’  postmodern  theology  must  work  out 
a place  for  God  in/as  some  dimension  of  textuality.”2?  But  the  Easter  event  is 
not  simply  Jesus’  rising  into  the  texts  of  hungry  and  naked  bodies.  Those  are 
texts  that  belong  to  the  old  moral  order.  Certainly  Jesus  is  alive  and  active  in 
these  texts.  As  the  youth  in  Mark’s  Easter  story  declares,  “He  is  going  before 
you  into  Galilee.”  Jesus,  however,  enters  those  texts  from  the  new  text  of  the 
rule  of  God,  which  he  established  and  which  God  constituted  ontologically  by 
raising  Jesus  from  the  dead. 

Is  Jesus  alive?  Did  he  really  rise  from  the  dead?  Or  to  phrase  the  question  as 
Sawicki  does  toward  the  end  of  her  book:  “Could  he  recognize  himself?  Did 
his  personal  awareness  continue;  was  he  himself  still  around  to  enjoy  whatever 
happened  after  Calvary?  Did  he  come  out  of  the  tomb  laughing?  Will  I?”i° 
Sawicki  considers  these  questions  important  but  does  not  answer  them.  Those 
who,  like  Lazarus,  have  responded  to  the  call  to  exit  from  the  cave  of  nonbeing 
and  follow  Jesus  into  the  metamorphosis  of  resurrection  can  answer  with  a 
joyful  affirmation. 

Martin  Luther  designated  the  papacy  of  his  time  “the  kingdom  of  Babylon 
and  the  power  of  Nimrod  the  mighty  hunter.”3'  In  his  treatise  “The  Babylo- 
nian Captivity  of  the  Church,”  he  identified  the  configurations  of  bondage  in 
the  seven  ecclesiastically  constituted  sacraments  that  controlled  Christians 
from  birth  to  the  grave  and  prevented  them  from  realizing  their  freedom  in 
Christ.  The  biblical  scholarship  of  modernity,  insofar  as  it  continues  to  be 
captive  to  the  dualism  of  Kantian  epistemology,  is  another  kind  of  Babylonian 

28  Ibid.,  332. 

29  Ibid.,  333. 

3°  Ibid.,  336. 

31  Trans.  A.T.W.  Steinhaeuser,  in  Works  of  Luther,  vol.  43  (Philadelphia:  Muhlenberg, 
1 943)i  I7I- 


308 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


captivity,  which  debars  the  signs  of  identification  and  recognition  by  which 
the  risen  Jesus  made  himself  known. 32  Instead  it  substitutes  a reconstructed 
historical  Jesus  “as  the  clue  to  God  in  our  life”  and  closes  the  door  to 
participation  in  the  new  moral  order  of  the  resurrection  and  its  inherent 
possibilities.  The  ecclesiastical  promulgation  of  transcendent  Christologies, 
informed  by  ancient  creeds  torn  out  of  their  historical  contexts,  is  another 
kind  of  Babylonian  captivity  that  restrains  Christians  from  entering  into  a 
horizontal  relationship  with  the  risen  Lord  and  enjoying  the  ecstatic  sense  of 
self-worth  that  he  wills  to  share  by  drawing  them  into  his  I AM.  Postmoderni- 
ty’s intertextuality  into  which  the  risen  Jesus  disappears  without  the  perspec- 
tive of  the  new  creation  is  yet  another  kind  of  Babylonian  captivity.  Although 
it  acknowledges  the  identification  of  the  risen  Jesus  with  the  hungry  and  the 
homeless,  the  sick  and  the  diseased,  the  immigrant  and  the  imprisoned,  its 
efficacy  is  limited  by  its  denial  of  the  gospel’s  referent  of  the  text  of  a new 
humanity. 

The  apostle  Paul  acknowledges  the  empirical  reality  of  this  text  in  2 
Corinthians  3:2-3,  where  he  identifies  the  Corinthian  Christians  as  a “letter.” 
“You  are  our  letter,  written  in  our  hearts,  known  and  read  by  all  human 
beings,  and  thereby  made  visible  that  you  are  a letter  of  Christ  being 
ministered  to  by  us,  not  written  with  ink  but  with  the  Spirit  of  the  living  God, 
not  on  stone  tablets  but  on  the  physical  tablets  of  the  heart.”  The  old 
covenant  was  inscribed  on  stone  tablets  and  issued  to  Moses  in  an  ambiance  of 
glory  for  transmission  to  the  people  of  Israel.  Its  splendor,  however,  which 
was  reflected  in  the  face  of  Moses,  was  temporary;  and  to  conceal  its  fading 
character  Moses  covered  his  face  with  a veil.  The  new  covenant,  in  contrast,  is 
a text  inscribed  on  the  tablets  of  the  human  heart.  Accordingly,  it  is  a text 
within  a text,  and  insofar  as  it  is  inscribed  on  the  tablets  of  the  human  heart,  it 
may  remain  concealed  and  invisible.  The  text  of  the  new  covenant  becomes 
legible  only  when  it  is  expressed  externally  through  the  text  of  the  physical 
body  in  terms  of  deeds  and  words.  The  Word,  God’s  speech  activity,  must 
become  flesh.  Incarnation  is  the  medium  of  the  textuality  that  discloses  the 
ontological  reality  of  the  new  moral  order  that  was  constituted  by  the 
resurrection  of  Jesus  Christ  from  the  dead.  Those  who  embody  the  new 
humanity  are  letters  of  God  addressed  to  the  world.  They  are  texts  that  make 
the  reality  of  the  new  creation  readable;  they  are  texts  that  glow  with  an 
ambiance  of  glory.  To  quote  Paul  again:  “Now  if  the  ministry  of  death, 
chiseled  in  letters  on  stone  tablets,  came  in  glory  so  that  the  people  of  Israel 
could  not  gaze  at  Moses’  face  because  of  the  glory  of  his  face,  a glory  now  set 

i2  Niebuhr,  Resurrection  and  Historical  Reason,  175. 


ACTUALIZATION  OF  CHRIST'S  ACHIEVEMENT  309 


aside,  how  much  more  will  the  ministry  of  the  Spirit  come  in  glory?  . . . What 
once  had  glory  has  lost  its  glory  because  of  the  greater  glory”  (2  Cor.  3:7-8, 
10).  But  where  is  that  “greater  glory”?  If  the  text  of  the  new  covenant 
supposedly  manifests  itself  with  a greater  glory  than  that  of  the  old  covenant, 
in  what  ways  does  it  make  that  glory  visible?  How  is  it  disclosed  in  the  lives  of 
human  beings?  Somehow  the  effects  of  participation  in  the  new  creation  must 
shimmer  in  and  through  the  lifestyle  of  those  who  are  “life-giving  spirits.” 
That  kind  of  lifestyle  would  radiate  the  supremacy  of  life  in  the  face  of  all  the 
forms  and  forces  of  death  that  tend  to  dominate  the  sociocultural  order.  That 
kind  of  lifestyle  would  reflect  an  increasing  diminishment  of  alienation  and, 
conversely,  a flowering  reconciliation  with  God  and  fellow  human  beings. 
That  kind  of  lifestyle  would  exhibit  a freedom  that  struggles  to  remain  outside 
the  vicious  cycle  of  exchanging  rejection  for  rejection,  an  eye  for  an  eye,  a 
tooth  for  a tooth.  That  kind  of  lifestyle  would  display  the  integrity  of  the  five 
wise  virgins  of  Jesus’  parable,  who  expressed  their  identity  of  being  light 
bearers  by  their  vocational  activity  of  bearing  light.  That  kind  of  lifestyle 
would  reveal  a dedication  to  the  subversion  of  any  and  every  pollution  system 
that  divides  the  world  into  the  realms  of  the  clean  and  the  unclean,  and 
disadvantages  and  dehumanizes  those  who  are  identified  as  the  unclean. 
Accordingly,  that  lifestyle  would  be  engaged  in  service  and  ministry  to,  with, 
and  for  all  humankind,  but  always  out  of  the  freedom  and  unobligedness  of 
participating  in  the  lordship  of  Jesus  Christ. 

Involvement  in  this  kind  of  a lifestyle  is  not  a journey  into  diminishment 
but  an  odyssey  into  the  fullness  of  life  and,  simultaneously,  a transfiguration 
into  the  glory  of  God.  As  Irenaeus  articulated  it,  “The  glory  of  God  is  the 
human  being  fully  alive.”  Yet  as  the  Apostle  reminds  the  Corinthians, 

We  have  this  treasure  in  clay  pots,  so  that  it  may  be  made  clear  that  the 
immensity  of  power  belongs  to  God  and  does  not  come  from  us.  Oppressed 
in  every  way  but  not  crushed,  uncertain  but  not  despairing,  persecuted  but 
not  abandoned,  thrown  down  but  not  destroyed;  always  carrying  in  the 
body  the  death  of  Jesus  so  that  the  life  of  Jesus  is  made  visible  in  our  bodies. 
(2  Cor.  4:7-10) 


A Plethora  of 
Epiphanies:  Christology 
in  the  Pastoral  Letters 

by  JOUETTE  M.  BASSLER 


Jouette  M.  Bassler  is  Professor  of  New 
Testament  at  Perkins  School  of  Theology, 
Southern  Methodist  University,  and  au- 
thor of  several  books,  including  God  and 
Mammon:  Asking  for  Money  in  the 
New  Testament  (1991)  and  the  forthcom- 
ing Deception  in  the  Garden  (Indiana 
University  Press)  and  Vie  Remains  Faith- 
ful (Abingdon  Press).  She  gave  the  Alex- 
ander Thompson  Lecture  in  the  Main 
Lounge,  Mackay  Campus  Center,  on  Feb- 
ruary 28,  1996. 


I AM  OFTEN  asked,  and  frequently  ask  myself,  some  variant  of  the  question 
“What  is  a nice  woman  like  you  doing  working  in  a place  like  the  Pastoral 
Letters?”  First  and  Second  Timothy,  together  with  Titus,  are,  after  all,  not 
noted  for  their  rhetorical  power  or  theological  depth,  and  they  are  certainly 
not  supportive  of  women  in  my  role  as  teacher;  they  are,  in  fact,  not 
supportive  of  women  in  any  roles  except  those  of  submissive  wife  and  bearer 
of  children.1  They  have  occupied  a relatively  marginal  place  in  Pauline 
scholarship,  only  rarely  attracting  serious  attention,  and  then  usually  over 
predictable  issues.  Yet  these  documents  exert,  I must  confess,  a strange 
fascination  for  me.  On  the  one  hand,  their  pseudonymity  (which  I assume) 
raises  interesting  questions  about  their  origin,  their  purpose,  and  their 
relationship  to  each  other  and  to  the  undisputed  letters  in  the  Pauline  corpus. 
Their  content  raises  questions  about  the  social  location  of  the  intended 
audience,  the  identity  of  the  opponents,  the  circumstances  that  evoked  this 
particular  epistolary  response,  and  — not  least— the  nature  of  it.  On  the  other 
hand,  my  own  personal  response  to  the  social  agenda  imparted  to  the  church 
by  these  documents  is  so  negative  that  it  has  been  difficult  to  engage  them 
fairly.  If  I am  to  respond  convincingly  to  them,  I need  to  understand  the 
author’s  context  and  his  theology.  I need  to  understand  the  logic  and 
presuppositions  of  his  argument,  and  I need  to  discern  the  interconnectedness 
of  things  within  his  discourse.  One  cannot  effectively  critique  what  one  does 
not  understand.  What  follows,  then,  is  an  exercise  in  understanding  one 
critical  aspect  of  these  letters:  their  Christology. 

Such  an  exercise  presupposes,  of  course,  a modicum  of  theological  and 

1 The  women  mentioned  in  1 Timothy  3:11  may  be  women  deacons,  but  the  text  is  very 
cryptic  and  is  open  to  other  interpretations  as  well;  see  Jennifer  H.  Stiefel,  “Women 
Deacons  in  1 Timothy:  A Linguistic  and  Literary  Look  at  ‘Women  Likewise  New 

Testament  Studies  41  (i995):442-57-  Older  women  are  encouraged  to  teach  other  women 
(Titus  2:3-5),  hut  what  they  teach  is  submission! 


A PLETHORA  OF  EPIPHANIES 


3 1 1 


rhetorical  skill  on  the  part  of  the  author  of  these  letters,  and  scholars  have  not 
always  been  willing  to  grant  that.  Indeed,  the  letters  have  been  dismissed  in 
the  not-too-distant  past  as  “a  miscellaneous  collection  of  material”  with  “no 
unifying  theme  ...  no  development  of  thought.”2 3 4 5  Recently,  though,  some 
scholars  have  begun  to  recognize  in  the  author  a theologian  of  some  skill  and 
subtlety.  They  do  not,  to  be  sure,  tend  to  regard  him  as  Paul’s  equal,  but 
neither  do  they  pillory  him  as  an  inept  collector  of  diverse  materials.  Frances 
Young  expresses  an  opinion  that  is  emerging  with  some  frequency  in  these 
circles:  “These  epistles  may  not  make  sense  as  Pauline  theology,  but  they  do 
have  a theology  of  their  own.”-'  Lewis  R.  Donelson  concurs:  “The  author  has 
a cogent  and  consistent  theological  system. ”4  Moreover,  “it  is  time,”  says 
Young,  “to  reassess  the  theological  material  and  to  reconsider  its  function  in 
the  argument  of  the  whole. ”5  It  is  on  this  suggestion  of  a cogent  and 
consistent  theological  system  and  in  response  to  this  call  for  a reconsideration 
of  its  function  that  I present  the  following  thesis:  The  epiphany  Christology 
of  these  letters  functions  as  the  foundation  of  a pervasive  epiphanic  pattern 
that  touches  almost  the  whole  of  the  letters’  contents. 

My  argument  rests  on  several  presuppositions  that  should  be  laid  out 
clearly  at  the  outset.  I will  not  argue  these  points.  Though  others  have 
differing  opinions  on  them,  I have  not  yet  encountered  any  compelling 
evidence  to  the  contrary,  and  for  the  purposes  of  this  discussion  I simply 
mention  them  as  my  position  on  these  issues.  I presuppose  that  the  author  and 
addressees  of  these  letters  are  pseudonymous,  that  all  three  letters  were 
written  by  the  same  author  and  reflect  the  same  historical  circumstances,  that 
they  circulated  together  as  a “minicorpus”  from  the  beginning,  and  that  one 
can  therefore  speak  of  the  theological  system  of  the  corpus  as  a whole. 

I.  An  Epiphany  Overview 

Since  the  beginning  of  the  nineteenth  century,  when  serious  questions 
began  to  be  raised  about  the  Pauline  authorship  of  the  Pastoral  Letters,  much 
of  the  discussion  of  their  Christology  has  been  conducted  explicitly  or 
implicitly  in  an  apologetic  or  polemical  mode,  defined  and  fueled  by  the 
intense  debate  over  authorship  that  ensued.  Those  holding  to  Pauline 
authorship  saw  the  Christology  of  the  Pastorals  as  an  obvious  extension  of  the 

2 A.  T.  Hanson,  The  Pastoral  Epistles  (Grand  Rapids:  Eerdmans,  1982),  42;  see  also  E. 
Lohse,  Die  Entstehung  des  Neuen  Testaments  (Stuttgart:  Kohlhammer,  1972),  63-64. 

3 The  Theology  of  the  Pastoral  Letters  (Cambridge:  Cambridge  University  Press,  1994),  73. 

4 Pseudepigraphy  and  Ethical  Argument  in  the  Pastoral  Epistles  (Tubingen:  Mohr-Siebeck, 
1986),  66. 

5 Young,  Theology,  48. 


3 12 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


Christology  of  the  homologoumena,  tempered,  of  course,  by  the  impact  of 
time  and  experience  on  the  aging  apostle,  but  recognizably  Pauline.  J.  N.  D. 
Kelly,  for  example,  points  to  a veritable  “mass  of  convincingly  Pauline 
material”  in  these  letters  as  evidence  that  they  are  “in  substance  and  spirit” 
Paul’s  own  work.6 7  Those  regarding  the  letters  as  pseudonymous  have  used  the 
same  Pauline  yardstick  but  point  to  what  they  see  as  the  Pastorals’  obvious 
inferiority  vis-a-vis  the  apostle’s  theology  as  confirmation  of  their  non- 
Pauline  character.  “The  writer’s  ideas,”  says  Fred  D.  Gealy,  “are  more 
practical  than  profound.  Unlike  Paul,  he  does  not  himself  rise  to  lyrical 
heights  of  religious  expression. ”7  Like  so  many  commentators  of  this  period, 
Gealy  then  defines  the  Pastorals’  theology  by  listing  the  differences  between 
Paul  and  “Paul,”  with  the  authentic  letters  establishing  the  categories  and  the 
criteria.  As  long  as  Pauline  authorship  was  the  issue  or  the  assumption, 
appreciation  for  the  author’s  distinctive  Christology  was  difficult  to  achieve. 

Though  one  can  hardly  speak  even  now  of  a prevailing  consensus  on  the 
authorship  question,  some  recent  investigations  of  the  letters’  Christology 
have  moved  beyond  the  agenda  established  by  that  debate.  Assuming,  but  not 
defending,  the  letters’  pseudonymity,  some  scholars  have  begun  to  explore  the 
Christology  of  these  letters  on  its  own  terms  and  not  in  terms  of  its 
relationship  to  Paul’s  thought.  Some  interesting  observations  are  resulting 
from  this,  particularly  regarding  the  significance  of  the  “epiphany”  language 
found  in  these  letters. 

As  is  well  known,  in  the  Pastoral  Letters,  Jesus’  return  at  the  end  of  the  age 
to  judge  the  world  is  consistently  described  as  an  emcjxiveia,  not,  as  in  the  rest 
of  the  New  Testament,  as  a Ttapouoaa:  “I  charge  you  to  keep  the  command- 
ment without  spot  or  blame  until  the  em(j)dveia  of  our  Lord  Jesus  Christ, 
which  God  will  bring  about  at  the  right  time”  (i  Tim.  6:14-15);  “For  the 
grace  of  God  has  appeared  . . . training  us  ...  to  live  lives  that  are 
self-controlled,  upright,  and  godly,  while  we  wait  for  the  blessed  hope  and  the 
em((>dveia  of  our  great  God  and  Savior,  Jesus  Christ”  (Titus  2:13).  The  noun 
em<}>dveia  is  found  in  only  one  place  in  the  New  Testament  outside  the 
Pastorals:  in  2 Thessalonians  2:8,  as  part  of  a pleonastic  expression  describing 
the  second  coming  (iq  emcjxiveia  Tfjs  Ttapouaias  auTou,  NRSV:  “the 
manifestation  of  his  coming”).  The  verb  emct>cavu>  appears  nowhere  else  in  the 

6 A Commentary  on  the  Pastoral  Epistles:  I Timothy,  II  Timothy,  Titus  (New  York:  Harper  & 
Row,  1963),  34;  see  also  Gordon  D.  Fee,  1 and  2 Timothy,  Titus,  rev.  ed.  (Peabody,  MA: 
Hendrickson,  1988),  16. 

7 The  First  and  Second  Epistles  to  Timothy  and  the  Epistle  to  Titus  (New  York:  Abingdon, 
J955).  364- 


A PLETHORA  OF  EPIPHANIES 


3*3 


New  Testament  in  connection  with  this  event.8  Thus,  although  describing  the 
second  coming  as  an  “epiphany”  is  not  absolutely  unique  to  the  Pastoral 
Letters,  it  is  not  common  outside  those  letters,  and  only  in  them  is  this  event 
presented  purely  and  simply  and  repeatedly  as  an  emc|>dv€ia.  This  is  striking 
and,  one  suspects,  significant. 

Even  more  striking,  and  probably  more  significant,  is  the  fact  that  the  first 
coming  of  Jesus  is  also  called  an  em4>dveia: 

Join  with  me  in  suffering  for  the  gospel,  relying  on  the  power  of  God,  who 
saved  us  and  called  us  with  a holy  calling,  not  according  to  our  works  but 
according  to  his  own  purpose  and  grace.  This  grace  was  given  to  us  in 
Christ  Jesus  before  the  ages  began,  but  it  has  now  been  revealed  through 
the  appearing  [em^aveia]  of  our  Savior  Christ  Jesus  who  abolished  death 
and  brought  life  and  immortality  to  light  through  the  gospel.  (2  Tim. 
i:8a-io) 

The  author  of  these  letters,  but  no  one  else  in  the  New  Testament  canon,  uses 
the  same  Greek  noun,  em4>dveia  (and  the  related  verb  em<j)aCvci>),  to  refer 
both  to  the  past  event  of  Jesus’  first  coming  and  to  the  future  event  of  his 
second  coming.  What  is  the  significance  and  function  of  this  distinctive 
terminology? 

The  two  epiphanies  do  not  define  a process  — for  example,  from  lowliness 
to  exaltation.9  Instead,  each  reveals  a previously  hidden  divine  reality.  The 
first,  however,  is  not  a revelation  of  the  preexistent  Christ  or  a revelation 
through  Christ  of  God  but  a very  specific  revelation  of  God’s  saving  purpose 
and  grace  (2  Tim.  1:9-10),  God’s  goodness  and  lovingkindness  (Titus  3:4). 
This  is  important  and  sometimes  overlooked  in  discussions  of  this  topic.  At 
least  when  applied  to  Jesus’  first  coming,  the  epiphany  language  does  not  refer 
primarily  to  a revelation  or  manifestation  of  Christ  but  to  the  revelation, 
through  the  Christ  event,  of  a reality  about  God.  This  does  not  mean  that  we 
should  not  speak  of  an  epiphany  Christology,10  but  that  when  used  of  the 
Pastorals,  we  must  understand  it  to  refer  primarily  to  Christ  as  the  vehicle, 
and  not  the  content,  of  the  epiphany.  Moreover,  in  the  first  epiphany  the 

8 Outside  the  Pastorals,  the  verb  emc(>cuva>  is  used  only  in  Luke  1:79  and  Acts  27:20,  and 
in  these  texts,  it  refers  to  quite  different  events.  The  lexeme  4>avep6w  appears  much  more 
frequendy  in  the  New  Testament,  but  without  the  special  nuance  of  the  prefixed  form  (see 
below). 

9 So  Victor  Hasler,  “Epiphanie  und  Christologie  in  den  Pastoralbriefen,”  Tbeologische 
Zeitschrift  33  (i977):2oo. 

10  Hans  Windisch  comes  close  to  this  conclusion:  “von  einer  Epiphanie-Christologie  in 
den  Past,  nur  mit  grossen  Einschrankungen  gesprochen  werden  darP’  (“Zur  Christologie 
der  Pastoralbriefe,”  Zeitschrift  fur  die  neutestcnnentliche  IVissenschaft  34  [19351:227). 


3W 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


entire  Christ  event— birth,  life,  death,  resurrection,  bestowal  of  the  Holy 
Spirit— is  compressed  into  a single  revelatory  moment  (that  seems,  at  least,  to 
be  the  import  of  2 Timothy  1 : 10,  which  describes  the  effect  of  this  “epiphany” 
as  abolishing  death  and  bringing  life  and  immortality  to  light),11  and  this 
moment  is  presented  in  isolation,  not  as  part  of  God’s  past  salvific  activity. 
This  epiphany— and  the  plan  of  salvation  that  it  reveals  — is  not  presented,  for 
example,  as  the  climax  of  a covenant,  whether  with  Abraham  or  with  Moses.  It 
is  not  interpreted  in  terms  of  the  fulfillment  of  earlier  promises  to  Israel;12  it  is 
not  linked  with  earlier  prophecies  to  Israel; ‘3  and  it  is  not  interpreted  in  terms 
of  earlier  saving  interventions  such  as  the  exodus  or  the  return  from  exile  or 
the  Maccabean  revolt.  In  short,  these  letters  do  not  view  the  Christ  event  as 
part  of  a salvation-historical  scheme,  the  ongoing  historical  drama  of  God’s 
saving  actions.  When  the  historical  Christ  event  is  presented  as  an  emtjxiveia, 
the  understanding  seems  to  be  that  it  opens  a window  on,  or  provides  a 
glimpse  of,  an  eternal,  transcendent  reality.  It  reveals  God’s  saving  purpose 
and  grace,  but  there  is  no  obvious  sense  that  this  purpose  has  been  unfolding 
through  history;  it  has  simply  existed  from  eternity. 

The  second  epiphany  reveals  the  eschatological  glory  of  Jesus  when  he 
returns  as  judge  of  the  living  and  the  dead  to  consummate  God’s  saving 
purpose  (Titus  2:13).  When  the  parousia  is  thus  presented  as  an  em(j)tiveia, 
the  emphasis  shifts  from  apocalyptic  judgment  of  human  persons  and  empires 
to  the  revelation  of  divine  reality.  Epiphany  language  thus  seems  to  promote  a 
static  picture  of  a curtain  going  up  twice  to  reveal  tableaux  of  the  divine 
reality,  but  not  a live  drama.  This  perception  is  flawed,  however,  in  at  least 
two  significant  ways. 

First,  Dieter  Liihrmann,  in  his  careful  1971  study  of  em4>av€ia,  has 
demonstrated  that  in  the  Hellenistic  age  this  had  become  a fixed  term  for  the 
intervention  of  a god  or  goddess  on  behalf  of  his  or  her  devotees.  ^ In  the 
writings  of  this  period,  emcjxxveioi  did  not  refer  simply  to  an  “epiphany”  in 


11  See  Lorenz  Oberlinner,  “Die  ‘Epiphaneia’  des  Heilswillens  Gottes  in  Christus  Jesus: 
Zur  Grundstruktur  der  Christologie  der  Pastoralbriefe,”  Zeitschrift  fiir  die  neutestamentliche 
Wissenscbaft  71  (i98o):202-3. 

12  The  only  promises  mentioned  in  these  letters  are  promises  made  “before  the  ages 
began”  in  the  eternal  will  of  God  (Titus  1:2). 

'3  The  prophecies  referred  to  in  1 Timothy  1:18  and  4:14  are  Christian  prophecies 
associated  with  Timothy’s  ordination.  They  do  not  suggest  the  fulfdlment  of  Old  Testa- 
ment prophecies  (see  Jurgen  Roloff,  Der  erste  Brief  an  Tbnotheus  [Zurich:  Benziger  Verlag; 
Neukirchen-Vluyn:  Neukirchener  Verlag,  1988],  10 1-2). 

"4  “Epiphaneia:  Zur  Bedeutungsgeschichte  eines  griechischen  Wortes,”  in  Tradition  und 
Glaube:  Das  Friihe  Christentum  in  seiner  Umwelt:  Festgabe  fiir  Karl  Georg  Kuhn  zum  65. 
Geburtstag,  ed.  G.  Jeremias,  H.-W.  Kuhn,  and  H.  Stegemann  (Gottingen:  Vandenhoeck  & 
Ruprecht,  1971),  185-99. 


A PLETHORA  OF  EPIPHANIES 


3X5 


the  contemporary  sense  of  the  word,  that  is,  a sudden  revelation  of  divinity 
(with  the  emphasis  on  revelation  per  se).  Instead,  though  revelation  remains  a 
component  of  the  event,  the  emphasis  was  on  the  concept  of  a helpful 
intervention  (“ helfendes  Eingreifen ”)  by  the  deity  on  behalf  of  that  deity’s 
worshipers,  often  in  military  conflict  but  in  other  concrete  ways  as  well. 
Liihrmann  found  this  same  association  with  a “saving  intervention”  present  in 
the  Pastoral  Letters  and  signaled  with  particular  clarity  by  the  title  “Savior” 
that  is  applied  to  both  God  and  Christ  with  striking  frequency  in  these 
letters. ’5  Thus,  he  insists,  the  epiphany  language  of  the  Pastoral  Letters 
signals  not  merely  a revelation  but  also  an  intervention  that  has  salvific  results. 
We  will  need  to  explore  later  the  nature  of  that  saving  intervention,  but  it 
promises  to  augment  the  more  static  concept  of  revelation. 

Second,  the  two  christological  epiphanies  are  part  of  a more  comprehensive 
concept.  This  does  not  mean  — as  we  have  seen  — that  they  are  situated  within 
a broad  historical  vision  of  God’s  prior  saving  actions.  Rather,  the  period 
between  these  two  epiphanies  is  filled  with  a whole  series  of  epiphanic 
moments,  which  relieve  the  otherwise  static  picture  and  indeed  suggest  the 
nature  and  locale  of  the  active  intervention  that  is  constitutive  of  emtjxiveia. 

Some  hints  about  the  complexity  of  the  development  and  deployment  of 
the  epiphany  concept  in  these  letters  appeared  in  a 1935  article  by  Hans 
Windisch.16  Windisch  agreed  that  the  epiphany  concept  in  the  Pastorals  had 
two  primary  components.  He  identified  the  first,  however,  with  the  revelation 
of  God’s  plan  of  salvation  through  Christian  proclamation  and  teaching, 
which  then  worked  itself  out  through  Christian  renewal  in  baptism  and 
through  the  work  of  the  Holy  Spirit.  The  second  component  was  the  future 
double  appearance  of  the  great  God  and  of  our  Savior  Jesus  Christ  (Titus 
2:13).  Windisch  did  not  regard  the  historical  appearance  of  Jesus  as  an 
epiphany,  and  in  that  he  was  mistaken.1?  His  recognition  that  Christian 
proclamation  and  teaching  are  significant  components  of  the  Pastorals’ 
epiphany  scheme  was,  however,  an  important  one.  Windisch  did  not  follow 
through  on  this  insight,  though,  and  instead  went  on  to  promote  the  trctis 


'5  Ten  of  the  twenty-four  occurrences  of  the  tide  “Savior”  in  the  New  Testament  are 
found  in  the  Pastoral  Letters:  1 Timothy  1:1;  2:3;  4:10;  2 Timothy  1:10;  Titus  1:3,  4;  2:10, 
13;  3:4,  6.  See  Paul  Wendland,  “SflTHP:  Eine  religionsgeschichtliche  Untersuchung,” 
Zeitschrift  fur  die  neutestamentlicbe  Wissenschaft  5 (1904):  3 3 5-5  3. 

16  “Zur  Christologie,”  2 1 3-38. 

17  Windisch  discounted  2 Timothy  1:10  as  good  evidence  for  this  since  the  focus  in  this 
verse  is  on  the  activity  and  efficacy  of  the  Resurrected  One,  not  the  Incarnate  One  (ibid., 
224),  but  that  introduces  a distinction  foreign  to  these  letters.  The  Resurrected  One  is  the 
Incarnate  One  and  the  work  of  the  resurrection  is  of  a piece  with  the  incarnation  (1  Tim. 
3:16;  2 Tim.  2:8). 


316  THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 

0eou  Christology  that  he  saw  in  several  hymnic  and  liturgical  fragments  in  the 
letters. 

Lorenz  Oberlinner,  on  the  other  hand,  not  only  identified  Jesus’  historical 
appearance  as  an  epiphany,  he  saw  this  as  the  key  to  the  letters’  Christology: 
the  decisive  manifestation  in  Christ  of  God’s  will  to  save.  He  also  recog- 
nized—as  Windisch  did  — the  dynamic  quality  of  the  epiphany  concept  in 
these  letters.  It  defines  not  just  a single  point  (Jesus’  appearance  in  judgment) 
nor  even  two  discrete  points  (incarnation  and  parousia).  The  epiphany 
concept  encompasses  the  totality  of  the  helping  intervention  of  God  in  Christ 
and  therefore  includes  not  only  the  initial  revelation,  through  the  Christ 
event,  of  God’s  will  and  plan  to  save  but  also  (as  Windisch  had  shown)  the 
ongoing  revelation  in  and  through  the  proclamation  of  the  gospel  and  the 
final  revelation  of  salvation  itself  at  the  parousia.  Oberlinner  then  demon- 
strated how  the  traditional  christological  materials  — the  hymns  and  liturgical 
fragments  scattered  throughout  these  letters— have  been  reinterpreted  in 
light  of  this  epiphany  “ Grundstruktur .”l8  This  was  a decisive  step  in  the 
investigation  of  the  concept,  for  it  shows  that  emtjxiveia  controls  the 
meaning  of  other  material  and  not  the  other  way  around.  l9  Oberlinner  does 
not,  however,  explore  how  the  rest  of  the  material  in  these  letters— and  there 
is  a lot  of  it— might  fit  into,  or  be  interpreted  by,  the  epiphany  schema. 

Lewis  Donelson  has  approached  the  Christology  of  the  letters  from  the 
broadest  perspective,  looking  for  the  logical  connections  among  the  ethical 
statements,  christological  statements,  and  “other  dicta”  (which  includes  the 
rest  of  the  material  in  these  letters).20  His  work  is  filled  with  insightful 
observations,  but  he  is  primarily  interested  in  the  inner  logic  of  the  author’s 
ethical  system  and  the  role  pseudonymity  plays  in  it,  so  he  focuses  on  the 
deductive  and  inductive  logic  that  binds  the  statements  together,  and  many 
good  theological  insights  get  lost  in  his  technical  discussion.  There  remains 
work  to  be  done  on  a different  level,  namely,  clarifying  the  connections 
between  the  epiphany  Christology  of  these  letters  and  other  activities  de- 
scribed in  them. 

This  is  what  I propose  to  outline  here:  the  connections  between  the 
epiphany  Christology  and  other  epiphanic  aspects  of  the  letters,  in  the  hope  of 
showing  with  greater  clarity  than  has  heretofore  emerged  the  function  (or  a 

18  “Heilswillens  Gottes,”  192-2 13. 

■9  See  also  Hasler,  “Epiphanie,”  205.  Others,  however,  disagree:  See,  e.g.,  Hejne 
Simonsen,  “Christologische  Traditionselemente  in  den  Pastoralbriefen,”  in  Die  paulinische 
Literatur  und  Tbeologie,  ed.  Sigfred  Pedersen  (Gottingen:  Vandenhoeck  & Ruprecht,  1980), 
61. 

10  Pseudepigraphy,  129-54. 


A PLETHORA  OF  EPIPHANIES 


3T7 


function)  of  this  Christology  within  these  letters.  To  be  more  precise,  it  seems 
clear  that  the  second  coming,  though  called  an  epiphany,  has  essentially  the 
same  function  in  these  letters  as  it  does  — under  another  name  — in  other  New 
Testament  documents,  namely,  to  motivate  the  ethical  behavior  prescribed  in 
these  letters.21  But  how  does  the  first  coming,  with  its  distinctive  presentation 
as  a manifestation  of  God’s  saving  will  and  grace,  function  in  these  letters? 
Why  does  the  author  of  these  letters  emphasize  precisely  this  concept 
(incarnation  as  epiphany),  which  did  not  enhance  the  fiction  of  Pauline 
authorship  and  indeed  somewhat  undermined  it,  since  epiphany  Christology 
is  not  found  in  this  form  in  Paul’s  undisputed  letters?  How  does  this  peculiar 
epiphany  scheme  enhance  the  author’s  message?  It  serves,  of  course,  as  a 
warrant  for  the  message  of  God’s  saving  grace.  God’s  nature  as  a saving  God 
and  the  extent  and  nature  of  God’s  plan  of  salvation  are  revealed  in  the  Christ 
event.  Is  it  possible,  though,  to  identify  a connection  between  this  epiphany 
concept  and  other  aspects  of  the  letters  similar  to  the  connection  between, 
say,  the  christological  hymn  of  Philippians  2:6-11  and  the  surrounding 
exhortations,  or  between  the  christological  emphases  of  1 Corinthians  1:18-25 
and  Paul’s  description  of  the  church  and  himself  as  weak  and  despised?  Let  us 
review  the  evidence,  starting  with  the  first  epiphany. 

II.  The  First  Epiphany 

God’s  gracious  nature,  saving  will,  and  eternal  plan  of  redemption  are 
definitively  revealed  through  the  incarnation,  that  is,  through  Jesus’  earthly 
life  viewed  as  a whole.  This  is  most  clearly  indicated  in  2 Timothy  1:9-10,  the 
text  I cited  earlier.  Like  so  many  passages  in  these  letters,  this  one  seems  to 
bear  in  its  measured  cadences  the  imprint  of  a liturgical  origin;  but  that  does 
not  mean  it  cannot  also  convey  accurately  the  author’s  views.  In  fact,  because 
the  basic  idea  expressed  here  is  echoed  in  so  many  places  in  these  letters  (a 
point  I will  argue  below),  the  fragment  seems  to  be  an  important  statement  of 
the  author’s  christological  perspective.  “[God]  saved  us  and  called  us  with  a 
holy  calling,  not  according  to  our  works  but  according  to  his  own  purpose  and 
grace.  This  grace  was  given  to  us  in  Christ  Jesus  before  the  ages  began,  but  it 
has  now  been  revealed  through  the  appearing  of  our  Savior  Christ  Jesus,  who 
abolished  death  and  brought  life  and  immortality  to  light  through  the 
gospel.” 

The  basic  revelatory  pattern  here  is  a familiar  one  from  other  letters  in  the 


21  See  Donelson,  Pseudepigraphy,  146-52. 


3l8 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


Pauline  corpus:  a mystery  present  from  eternity  is  now  revealed.22  But  unlike 
these  other  earlier  texts,  it  is  not  the  mystery  of  the  inclusion  of  the  Gentiles 
that  is  revealed  (cf.  Col.  1:26;  Eph.  3:5-12)  or  God’s  mysterious  wisdom 
hidden  from  the  world  in  the  cross  (1  Cor.  2:6-10).  Instead,  it  is  God’s 
fundamental  salvific  purpose  and  saving  grace  that  are  revealed  through  the 
public  event  of  the  “appearing  of  our  Savior  Jesus  Christ.”  In  Titus  2:11  and 
3:4,  the  language  is  somewhat  more  oblique,  but  the  message  is  no  less  clear: 
“For  the  grace  of  God  has  appeared  [eTrecjiavT)],  bringing  salvation  to  all,”  and 
“when  the  goodness  and  loving  kindness  of  God  our  Savior  appeared 
[eTTec))dvT]],  he  saved  us  according  to  his  mercy.”2? 

What  is  striking  about  these  passages  is  that  Jesus  is  not  presented  as  the 
agent  of  God’s  plan,  that  is,  as  the  one  through  whose  death  and  resurrection 
God’s  saving  will  was  implemented,  but  as  the  revealer  of  it.  The  author,  by 
citing  traditional  material,  certainly  knows  and  affirms  the  message  of  the 
efficacy  of  Christ’s  death  (1  Tim.  3:16),  but  the  emphasis  here  is  on  Christ’s 
role  as  revealer.  In  the  formulations  in  Titus,  Christ  even  disappears  behind 
the  revelation.  That  is,  Christ  himself  is  not  mentioned,  only  that  which  is 
manifested  by  his  “appearing”:  God’s  grace  and  goodness  and  loving- 
kindness. 

This  emphasis  on  the  revelatory  aspect  of  the  Christ  event  can  also  be  seen 
in  a passage  that  does  not  speak  directly  of  revelation  at  all,  1 Timothy  2:5-6: 

For  there  is  one  God; 

there  is  also  one  mediator  between  God  and  humankind; 

Christ  Jesus,  himself  human, 

who  gave  himself  as  a ransom  for  all. 

The  christological  content  of  this  fragment  is  striking,  but  the  concept  of 
Christ  as  mediator  is  not  reflected  anywhere  else  in  these  letters.  The 
insistence  on  the  humanity  of  Christ  may  be  directed  at  some  level  against  the 
docetic  Christology  of  the  opposing  teachers  — though  this  is  speculative  since 
we  do  not  have  direct  evidence  of  their  Christology.  It  may  also  be  reinforced 
by  the  reference  to  Jesus’  Davidic  descent  in  2 Timothy  2:8.  In  1 Timothy, 
however,  the  passage  is  cited  as  a warrant  for  the  author’s  argument  in  2:1-7, 
and  Jesus’  humanity  is  not  in  any  way  relevant  to  that  argument.  Thus,  this 
point— though  of  interest  to  later  theologians  — cannot  reflect  the  author’s 
primary  interest  in  the  passage.  The  final  line  of  the  fragment,  “who  gave 

22  See  Nils  A.  Dahl,  “Form-Critical  Observations  on  Early  Christian  Preaching,”  in  Jems 
in  the  Memory  of  the  Early  Church  (Minneapolis:  Augsburg,  1976),  30-36. 

23  On  the  interpretation  of  these  two  verses  in  terms  of  the  incarnation,  see  J.  D.  Quinn, 
The  Letter  to  Titus  (New  York:  Doubleday,  1990),  212. 


A PLETHORA  OF  EPIPHANIES 


3J9 


himself  as  a ransom  for  all,”  contains  the  familiar  christological  motif  of  Jesus’ 
self-giving  (see  Titus  2:14;  1 Tim.  1:15;  Mark  10:45;  Gal.  1:4;  Eph.  5:2).  The 
emphasis  on  the  universal  object  of  this  self-giving  (“ransom  for  all' ’)  is 
characteristic  of  these  letters, 2*  and,  more  to  the  point,  it  picks  up  the 
language  of  verses  3-4,  for  which  this  fragment  serves  as  an  immediate 
warrant:  “This  is  right  and  acceptable  in  the  sight  of  God  our  Savior,  who 
desires  everyone  to  be  saved  and  to  come  to  the  knowledge  of  the  truth.” 
Surely,  then,  it  is  this  statement  about  Jesus  giving  himself  as  a ransom  for  all 
that  accounts  for  the  author’s  interest  in  the  fragment  and  led  to  its  incorpora- 
tion at  this  point  in  the  text:  it  reinforces  and  confirms  the  author’s  statement 
about  God’s  universal  salvific  will.25 

For  understanding  the  author’s  development  of  the  epiphany  theme, 
however,  the  comment  he  has  appended  to  the  fragment  is  even  more 
significant  than  the  fragment  itself:  to  piapTupiov  Kcapois  l8£ols.26  This 
phrase  is  variously  translated  by  such  phrases  as  “this  was  attested  at  the  right 
time”  (NRSV),  which  raises  the  question  “by  whom?”  and  “this  was  the 
testimony  at  the  proper  time”  (NAB),  which  raises  the  question  “what 
constitutes  the  testimony?”  The  variety'  of  translations  suggests  the  inherent 
ambiguity  of  the  phrase:  Who  or  what  does  the  attesting,  and  what  is 
attested?2?  The  phrase  is  indeed  terse  but  not  completely  enigmatic.  It 
probably  refers  to  Jesus’  act  of  self-giving  on  behalf  of  all  that  is  described  in 
the  preceding  verse.  This  is  the  testimony  to  God’s  desire  to  save  all  (v.  3)  and 
this  testimony  occurred  at  the  proper  time  (Koupois  l8£ois),  a phrase  that 
clearly  refers  in  these  letters  to  the  time  determined  by  God  (see  1 Tim.  6:15; 
Titus  1:3).  Thus  construed,  and  as  Hasler  notes,  the  expression  of  verse  6b 
belongs  to  the  linguistic  field  of  the  revelatory  concept.28 

This  clause  thus  provides  a dramatic  reinterpretation  of  the  significance  of 


24  See,  e.g.,  1 Timothy  4:10;  Titus  2:11. 

25  Oberlinner  suggests  that  it  was  the  author  of  these  letters  who  added  the  self-giving 
formula  of  verse  6a  to  the  one-God  acclamation  of  verse  5 and  that  he  did  so  in  order  to 
emphasize  that  the  ultimate  significance  of  Jesus’  death  lies  in  the  fact  that  it  reveals  God’s 
saving  will  (“Heilswillens  Gottes,”  203-5).  The  same  point  concerning  the  significance  of 
Jesus’  death  emerges,  though,  with  the  usual  assumption  that  verses  5-63  were  already  a 
unified  piece  of  tradition  when  the  author  incorporated  them  into  his  argument.  See  also 
Klaus  Wengst,  Christologiscbe  Eormeln  und  Lieder  des  Urchristentums , 2d  ed.  (Giitersloh: 
Giitersloher  Verlag,  1972),  72-73. 

26  It  has  been  suggested  that  these  words  were  also  part  of  the  quoted  fragment  (see,  e.g., 
Martin  Dibelius  and  Hans  Conzelmann,  The  Pastoral  Epistles  [Philadelphia:  Fortress,  1972], 
41),  and  they  are  printed  as  such  in  the  26th  and  27th  editions  of  Novum  Testamentum 
Graece.  The  words  Koapots  ihCois,  however,  reflect  the  author’s  vocabulary  (see  1 Tim.  6:15; 
Titus  1:3),  and  the  thought  of  verse  6b  is  continued  seamlessly  in  verse  7. 

27  Hanson,  e.g.,  calls  it  “very  obscure”  ( Pastoral  Epistles , 69). 

28  Hasler,  “Epiphanie,”  205. 


32° 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


Jesus’  death.  His  death  not  only  had  “ransoming”  power,  as  the  tradition 
confirms,  but  it  also  — and  perhaps  especially— had  testamentary  power,  as 
this  author  affirms.  That  is,  Jesus’  self-giving  death  witnessed  to,  and  thus 
revealed,  God’s  saving  will  and  plan  at  the  time  that  God  decreed.  As  an 
important  corollary  to  this,  the  author  notes  elsewhere  that  the  God  whose 
saving  will  and  plan  is  thus  revealed  “is  faithful  . . . and  cannot  deny  himself  ” 
(2  Tim.  2:13).  That  is,  the  Christ  event  (understood  broadly)  attests  to  God’s 
saving  nature  and  plan,  and  the  author  affirms  God’s  fidelity  to  that  nature 
and  plan. 

This  epiphany  was  also,  of  course,  a saving  intervention.  It  abolished  death 
(2  Tim.  1:10)  and  introduced  a mediator  whose  own  death  functions  as  a 
ransom  for  all  (1  Tim.  2:5-6). 

IQ.  The  Next  Epiphany 

Because  the  author  understands  the  first  epiphany  to  be  not  simply  a 
revelation  of  Christ  himself,  or  of  God,  but  a revelation  of  God’s  saving  will, 
this  revelation  is  not  limited  to  the  Christ  event  itself.  As  Windisch  and  others 
have  recognized,  these  letters  also  affirm  that  this  saving  will  is  revealed 
through  proclamation — first  Paul’s  and  then  the  church’s.29  That  is,  like  the 
Christ  event,  proclamation  is  an  epiphanic  event  (as  this  author  understands 
the  concept):  it  reveals  and  actualizes  God’s  will  to  save.  This  is  already 
indicated  in  1 Timothy  2:7,  the  verse  that  follows  immediately  after  the 
interpretation  of  Christ’s  death  as  a testamentary,  that  is,  a revelatory,  event: 
“for  this  [that  is,  for  testimony  to  God’s  saving  will]  I was  appointed  a herald 
and  an  apostle  . . . , a teacher  of  the  Gentiles  in  faith  and  truth. ”3°  Paul’s 
appointment  was  for  the  purpose  of  continuing  the  testimony  to,  and  thus  the 
revelation  of,  God’s  saving  will  through  the  proclamation  of  the  gospel. 

The  identification  of  both  the  Christ  event  and  the  proclamation  of  it  as 
successive  revelatory  events  is  explicit  in  2 Timothy  1:96-10. 1 have  cited  the 
text  twice,  but  it  is  easy  to  miss  the  striking  revelatory  language  of  this  pas- 
sage: “This  grace  was  given  to  us  [by  God]  in  Christ  Jesus  before  the  ages 
began,  but  it  has  now  been  revealed  [4)avepa>0eicrav]  through  the  appearing 


29  Windisch,  “Zur  Christologie,”  227;  Hasler,  “Epiphanie,”  202;  Donelson,  Pseudepigra- 

phy’  I34'  r , 

3°  Some  argue  that  verse  6b  refers  only  to  Paul’s  testimony  to  the  Christ  event,  yielding 
the  translation  found  in  the  NRSV:  “This  was  attested  at  the  right  time”— i.e.,  by  Paul. 
George  W.  Knight  is  probably  correct,  though,  when  he  says,  “The  solution  is  probably  to 
be  found  in  a both-and  rather  than  an  either-or  understanding,”  that  is,  the  testimony 
mentioned  in  verse  6b  refers  both  to  the  Christ  event  and  to  Paul’s  proclamation 
(1 Commentary  on  the  Pastoral  Epistles  [Grand  Rapids:  Eerdmans,  1992],  124). 


A PLETHORA  OF  EPIPHANIES 


32 1 


[8ia  tt|s  em4>ave£as]  of  our  Savior  Christ  Jesus,  who  abolished  death  and 
brought  life  and  immortality  to  light  [(J>amcravTo<;]  through  the  gospel.”  Two 
things  are  described  here  in  identical  ways.  The  first  event,  the  Christ  event, 
reveals  God’s  saving  nature  and  grace.  The  participle  4>avepo)0etaav  and  the 
noun  em(j>dveia  emphasize  the  epiphanic  character  of  this  event.  The  second 
event,  the  proclamation  of  the  gospel,  again  brings  to  light  this  salvation  (that 
is,  life  and  immortality).  A different  word  is  used  here  — <j>om£eiv,  not 
4>avepow— but  it  too  belongs  to  the  vocabulary  of  revelation. 31  The  appear- 
ing of  Christ  and  the  proclamation  of  the  gospel  both  have  the  same 
revelatory  function  and  point  to  the  same  transcendent  truth— salvation  as  the 
eternal  purpose  and  gift  of  God. 

In  Titus  1:2-3  the  revelation  through  the  gospel  is  described  in  more  detail: 

. . in  the  hope  of  eternal  life  that  God,  who  never  lies,  promised  before  the 
ages  began  — in  due  time  he  revealed  his  word  through  the  proclamation  with 
which  I have  been  entrusted  by  the  command  of  God  our  Savior.”  In  many 
ways  this  passage  is  parallel  to  2 Timothy  1:9-10,  with  one  significant 
difference.  In  2 Timothy  the  saving  grace  of  God,  given  before  the  ages  began 
('TTpo  xpdvtov  auovuov)  is  revealed  (cj)avepa>0eicrav)  through  the  incarnation. 
Here  the  promise  of  salvation  made  before  the  ages  began  (Ttpo  xpdvcov 
aiwviwv)  is  revealed  (etjxxveptocrev)  through  the  proclamation  entrusted  to 
Paul. 32  This  passage  thus  confirms  that  the  Christ  event  and  proclamation  are 
construed  by  this  author  as  parallel  epiphanic  events.  This  has  a significant 
corollary:  As  long  as  the  revelatory  aspect  of  the  Christ  event  is  emphasized, 
that  event  and  the  proclamation  of  it  are  functionally  equivalent.33 

IV.  Other  Epiphanic  Events 

This  recognition  is  very  helpful,  as  far  as  it  goes,  but  I think  the  influence  of 
this  epiphany  pattern  is  even  more  extensive.  If,  for  example,  the  proclama- 
tion of  the  gospel  is  an  extension  of,  or  repetition  of,  the  epiphany  of  the 
Christ  event,  the  proclaimers  become  themselves  agents  of  epiphany.  Then, 
just  as  it  is  important  to  affirm  God’s  faithfulness  in  the  context  of  the  first 
epiphany,  it  is  also  important  in  the  context  of  the  next  one  to  affirm  the 
faithfulness  of  these  agents.  Paul,  of  course,  is  the  first  of  these  agents:  “I  am 
grateful  to  Christ  Jesus  our  Lord,  who  has  strengthened  me,  because  he 
judged  me  faithful  and  appointed  me  to  his  service”  (1  Tim.  1:12).  Paul  is  also 


31  Cf.  1 Corinthians  4:5,  where  4>om£ei,v  and  (fxxrepow  are  clearly  synonymous. 

32  Philip  H.  Towner  correctly  identifies  the  Xoyos  (word)  of  v.  3 as  the  promise  of  eternal 
life  mentioned  in  v.  2 (1-2  Timothy  and  Titus  [Downers  Grove:  InterVarsity,  1994],  220-2 1). 

33  See  also  Hasler,  “Epiphanie,”  205;  Oberlinner,  “Heilswillens  Gottes,”  206. 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


322 

instructed  to  entrust  the  gospel  to  other  “faithful  people”  who  will  serve  as 
agents  after  him  (2  Tim.  2:2).  More  importantly,  the  letters  insist  that  Paul’s 
role  as  “herald,  apostle,  and  teacher”  (1  Tim.  2:7;  2 Tim.  1:11)  was  itself  part 
of  God’s  preexistent-but-now-revealed  plan  of  salvation  (2  Tim.  1:9).  The 
author  even  affirms  that  Paul’s  life  — that  is,  his  conversion— reveals  God’s 
saving  will:  “The  saying  is  sure  and  worthy  of  full  acceptance,  that  Christ 
Jesus  came  into  the  world  to  save  sinners  — of  whom  I am  the  foremost.  But 
for  that  very  reason  I received  mercy,  so  that  in  me,  as  the  foremost,  Jesus 
Christ  might  display  the  utmost  patience,  making  me  an  example  to  those 
who  would  come  to  believe  in  him  for  eternal  life”  (1  Tim.  1:15-16).  The 
Greek  word  used  here  is  evSei^Tai,  but  it  has  the  same  semantic  range  as 
emckctveiv  and  should  also  be  considered  part  of  the  epiphany  vocabulary  of 
these  letters.  Thus  Paul  is  not  only  the  proclaimer— by  God’s  plan,  command, 
and  will  — of  the  gospel  that  reveals  God’s  saving  will.  His  dramatic  conver- 
sion also  has  an  epiphanic  quality  insofar  as  it  reveals,  not  simply  to  him  but 
especially  to  others,  God’s  saving  grace  embodied  in  the  utmost  patience 
(p.aKpo0up,Ca)  of  Christ. 

The  words  and  lives  of  other  church  leaders  are  also  an  important  aspect  of 
the  wider  epiphany  scheme.  They  are  agents  of  epiphany  insofar  as  they 
proclaim  — and  thus  make  manifest— God’s  saving  intent.  Their  behavior, 
their  instructions,  and  their  exhortations,  however,  also  contribute  to  the 
“epiphany,”  for  “epiphany,”  as  Liihrmann  has  demonstrated,  includes  not 
only  revelation  but  also  the  active  component  of  saving  intervention.  We  need 
to  consider  what  shape  “saving  intervention”  can  — and  must— take. 

It  is  necessary  at  this  point  to  note  that  for  this  author  salvation  is  both  gift 
and  achievement.^  That  is,  the  author  retains  a strong  Pauline  message  of 
grace  poured  out  “not  because  of  any  works  of  righteousness  that  we  had 
done”  (Titus  3:5).  At  the  same  time,  though,  the  believer  attains  salvation  by 
responding  in  obedience  through  very  specific  and  prescribed  patterns  of 
behavior.  Both  gift  and  attainment  are  necessary,  and  saving  intervention,  to 
be  effectively  salvific,  should  address  both  spheres  of  the  salvation  process. 
We  have  seen  that  the  first  epiphany,  the  Christ  event,  is  saving  intervention 
insofar  as  it  alters  the  cosmic  order  to  effect  grace.  The  author  also  affirms 
that  this  event  intervenes  in  the  arena  of  human  behavior:  “The  grace  of 
God,”  says  the  author,  the  grace  that  is  the  basic  content  and  gift  of  the 
revelation,  “has  appeared,  bringing  salvation  to  all  and  training  us  to  live  lives 
that  are  self-controlled,  upright,  and  godly”  (Titus  2:11-12).  This  suggests 
that  the  first  epiphany  provides  “saving  intervention”  in  two  ways:  it  provides 


n See  Young,  Theology,  57. 


A PLETHORA  OF  EPIPHANIES 


323 


the  gift  of  a ransom  and  the  training  necessary  for  the  attainment  of  saving 
virtue.  That  statement  (“grace  . . . trains  us”)  is  too  abstract,  though,  to 
provide  by  itself  much  insight  into  the  way  the  author  understands  this 
epiphanic  “training”  to  occur.  The  author  does  not  appeal  with  any  regularity 
to  the  Holy  Spirit  as  the  vehicle  of  this  training,  though  it  is  perhaps 
presupposed, ??  and  Christ  himself  does  not  seem  to  remain  actively  present 
between  the  two  epiphanies.?6  What  these  letters  do  stress,  however,  is  the 
moral  teaching  and  upright  behavior  of  church  leaders,  which,  I suggest, 
constitute  in  this  author’s  mind  a second-level  epiphanic  intervention.  In 
cooperation  with  the  Holy  Spirit  and  as  agents  of  the  pedagogical  function  of 
divine  grace,  church  leaders  not  only  make  present  the  epiphany  of  the 
incarnation  through  their  proclamation;  through  their  teaching  and  exhorta- 
tion they  also  provide  the  ethical  information  and  concrete  intervention  that 
enables  the  moral  progress  that  brings  salvation;  and  through  their  lives  they 
model  that  moral  progress  (i  Tim.  4:15-16). 

There  is  one  final  but,  I think,  highly  significant  aspect  of  the  epiphany 
concept  that  percolates  through  these  letters.  I have  shown  that  the  primary 
components  of  emc^aveia,  as  this  author  understands  it,  are  (1)  the  revelation 
of  God’s  saving  intent  and  grace  through  the  Christ  event  and  through 
Christian  proclamation  and  (2)  the  active  intervention  that  takes  place  on  one 
level  through  the  soteriological  consequences  of  Christ’s  incarnation,  death, 
and  resurrection  and,  on  another  level,  through  the  teaching,  exhortation,  and 
example  of  faithful  church  leaders.  Once  that  is  established,  the  conclusion 
seems  near  at  hand  that  these  pseudonymous  letters  themselves  are  epiphanic 
vehicles. 

The  Christ  event  reveals  God’s  eternal  saving  purpose  and  grace,  the 
proclamation  reveals  God’s  reliable  promise  of  eternal  life,  and  the  letters 
reveal  God’s  “sure”  plan  of  salvation.  In  fact,  this  epistolary  epiphany  is 
emphasized  by  the  formulaic  phrase  moros  6 Xoyos  (NRSV:  “The  saying  is 
sure”),  which  appears  five  times  in  these  letters  to  attest  to  the  reliability  of 
the  revelation:  “Christ  came  into  the  world  to  save  sinners:  faithful/reliable  is 
the  word!”  (1  Tim.  1:15).  “A  woman  will  be  saved  through  childbearing, 

35  Only  in  Titus  3:5  is  the  Holy  Spirit  mentioned  as  the  “divine  power  to  effect  those 
things  that  lead  to  salvation”  (Young,  Theology,  69);  cf.  1 Timothy  4:1,  where  the  Spirit  is 
linked  with  prophecy,  and  2 Timothy  1:14,  where  the  author  links  the  Spirit  with  the  work 
of  the  ordained  church  leader  (see  also  2 Tim.  1:6). 

3*  Donelson  insists  that  the  epiphany  Christology  relegates  Jesus  “to  two  appearances, 
one  in  the  past  and  one  in  the  future,  with  no  present  contact”  ( Pseudepigrapby , 153).  This 
seems  confirmed  byj.  A.  Allan’s  study  showing  that  the  “in  Christ”  formula  in  these  letters 
does  not  retain  the  Pauline  sense  of  mystical  identification  with  Christ  (“The  ‘In  Christ’ 
Formula  in  the  Pastoral  Epistles,”  New  Testament  Studies  10  [1963]:!  15-2 1). 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


324 

provided  they  continue  in  faith  and  love:  faithful/reliable  is  the  word!”  (i 
Tim.  3:1). 37  “Godliness  . . . holds  promise  for  both  the  present  life  and  the  life 
to  come:  faithful/reliable  is  the  word!”  (1  Tim.  4:8).  “If  we  have  died  with 
him,  we  will  also  live  with  him:  faithful/reliable  is  the  word!”  (2  Tim.  2:11). 
“God  has  poured  out  on  us  the  Holy  Spirit,  so  that  having  been  justified  by 
grace,  we  might  become  heirs  according  to  the  hope  of  eternal  life: 
faithful/reliable  is  the  word!”  (Titus  3:8).  Moreover,  the  letters  serve  as 
vehicles  of  intervention,  for  just  as  the  grace  revealed  in  the  Christ  event  trains 
us  to  lead  the  godly  lives  that  result  in  salvation,  and  the  exhortations  and 
teaching  of  the  church  leaders  do  the  same,  so  too  the  letters  are  filled  with 
instructions  on  the  moral  life  that  is  necessary  to  attain  salvation. 

By  presenting  the  Christ  event  as  an  event  that  reveals  God’s  saving  will  and 
pedagogical  grace,  the  author  allows  a number  of  other  things  to  be 
understood  as  epiphanic  and  thus  to  be  linked  functionally  to  the  Christ  event. 
Proclamation,  Paul’s  conversion,  the  lives  of  church  leaders,  and  the  letters 
themselves  all  reveal  — as  the  Christ  event  did  — God’s  saving  plan.  And  if  the 
Christ  event  was  the  cosmic  intervention  that  abolished  death  and  redeemed 
us  from  iniquity,  it  is  particularly  through  these  church  leaders  and  these 
letters  that  quotidian  intervention  occurs  in  the  form  of  tutelage  in  the 
behavior  that  yields  salvation. 

None  of  these  individual  points  is  antithetical  to  views  found  in  Paul’s  own 
letters,  but  the  epiphany  framework  is  not  present  there  to  interpret  and 
reinforce  them,  and  the  very  richness  of  Paul’s  thought  dilutes  their  impact. 
The  fox,  it  has  been  said,  knows  many  things,  but  the  hedgehog  knows  one  big 
thing.38  The  author  of  these  letters  is  a hedgehog  to  Paul’s  more  christologi- 
cally  diverse  fox,  and  he  knows  one  big  thing:  God’s  saving  grace  has  been 
manifested  in  Christ,  through  the  gospel,  in  Paul’s  life,  in  the  words  and  deeds 
of  the  ordained  clergy,  and  through  these  letters  themselves.  Outside  of  this 
structure  lie  speculation  and  disaster;  within  it,  truth  and  salvation. 

This  is  a cogent  and  consistent  theological  system,  but  there  are  obvious 
dangers  here.  Presenting  the  Christ  event  and  the  proclamation  and  exhorta- 
tion of  church  leaders  as  functionally  equivalent  reinforces  the  clerical 
hierarchy  that  is  evident  elsewhere  in  these  letters. 3?  Suggesting  that  the 

37  Though  all  recent  English  translations  and  most  recent  commentaries  associate  the 
phrase  “Faithful  is  the  word”  with  the  statement  about  the  office  of  bishop  that  follows,  the 
phrase  is  used  elsewhere  in  these  letters  always  to  emphasize  a statement  about  salvation. 
That  suggests  that  it  should  be  linked,  as  here,  with  the  comment  on  women’s  salvation  in 
2:15  (see  Dibelius  and  Conzelmann,  Pastoral  Epistles,  51). 

3s  The  saying  is  attributed  to  various  people,  the  earliest  being  Archilochus,  a seventh- 
century  B.C.E.  Athenian. 

3’  See  Young,  Theology,  146. 


A PLETHORA  OF  EPIPHANIES 


325 

letters  themselves  stand  within  the  trajectory  of  epiphanic  events  reinforces 
the  message  projected  by  their  pseudonymity:  These  are  authoritative 
documents  whose  messages  of  salvation  and  of  exclusion  from  salvation,  of 
submission  and  silence  and  subordination,  are  to  be  taken  with  utmost 
seriousness.  By  taking  these  letters  into  its  canon,  the  church  has,  of  course, 
confirmed  this.  What  I am  suggesting  is  that  the  letters  themselves  contain 
the  seeds  of  this  suggestion,  quite  apart  from  the  disputed  verse  about  the 
inspiration  of  scripture  (2  Tim.  3:16).  On  the  other  side  of  the  ledger,  the 
pattern  also  suggests  a norm  by  which  to  judge  the  words  and  deeds  of  church 
leaders  and  even  biblical  texts:  to  be  truly  epiphanic  they  must  reveal,  as  the 
Christ  event  did,  that  God’s  saving  grace  embraces  all  of  humankind. 


Health,  Disease,  and 
Salvation  in  African 
American  Experience 

by  James  H.  Evans,  Jr. 


James  H.  Evans,  Jr.  is  President  and 
Robert  K.  Davies  Professor  of  Systematic 
Theology,  Colgate  Rochester  Divinity 
School/Bexley  Hall/Crozer  Theological 
Seminaiy.  His  most  recent  book  is  We 
Have  Been  Believers:  An  African- 
American  Systematic  Theology  (199  2). 
This  address,  the  fifth  of  his  Stone  Lectures, 
was  delivered  in  the  Main  Lounge,  Mackay 
Campus  Center,  on  February  15,  1996. 


FOR  MANY  people  in  the  African  American  community,  life  in  the  contem- 
porary world  should  carry  a warning  similar  to  that  found  on  tobacco 
products.  It  can  be  hazardous  to  your  health.  The  threats  to  the  health  of 
African  Americans  are  deeply  rooted  in  the  social  structures  of  Western 
culture.  Those  threats  are  obviously  manifested  in  the  ubiquity  of  advertising 
for  tobacco  products  and  alcoholic  beverages  in  many  African  American 
communities.  (However,  the  problem  is  more  deeply  rooted  than  the  images 
of  Joe  Camel  selling  cigarettes  and  a bull  selling  malt  liquor.)  The  healing  and 
wholeness  of  black  people  is  obstructed  by  powerful  forces  in  American 
society  that  are  difficult  to  isolate  and  even  more  difficult  to  resist.  The 
tremendous  growth  in  medical  technology,  scientific  advances  in  treatments, 
and  new  discoveries  in  various  medical  fields  have  complicated  the  issue  of 
what  it  means  to  be  healthy  in  our  culture.  Yet  for  African  Americans  the  issue 
of  their  physical  health  is  inseparable  from  the  ravages  of  racism  upon  their 
humanity.  There  is  a deep  suspicion  of  the  medical  delivery  system  among 
many  black  people  in  the  United  States.  This  suspicion  is  rooted  in  the 
collective  memory  of  incidents  like  the  infamous  Tuskegee  experiment. 
Beginning  in  the  1930s  more  than  four  hundred  black  men  were  either 
infected  with  syphilis  or  simply  diagnosed  and  left  untreated.  The  disease  was 
allowed  to  progress  in  these  men  even  though  effective  treatments  were 
readily  available.  The  sole  purpose  of  this  experiment  was  to  chart  the 
progress  of  the  disease  until  the  subjects  died.  This  experiment  was  conducted 
within  the  boundaries  of  the  law  and  was  halted  in  1972  as  a result  of  public 
outcry.  The  horror  of  the  willingness  to  sacrifice  the  health  and  lives  of  these 
black  men  for  the  sake  of  advancing  medical  science  is  exceeded  only  by  the 
insult  of  being  consistently  denied  access  to  the  medical  delivery  systems. 
(The  historical  experience  of  being  denied  access  to  “white  only”  hospitals 
during  legal  segregation  has  been  overlaid  with  the  contemporary  experience 
of  being  denied  quality  health  care.)  The  nightmare  of  the  Tuskegee  experi- 
ment is  the  backdrop  for  the  persistent  rumors  that  AIDS  is  the  result  of  a 


HEALTH,  DISEASE,  AND  SALVATION 


327 


genocidal  plot  in  which  the  virus  was  artificially  developed  and  intentionally 
introduced  into  the  black  population  in  Africa,  the  Caribbean,  and  the  United 
States.  It  is  less  important  that  irrefutable  substantiation  of  this  rumor  would 
be  difficult  to  produce  and  more  important  that  African  Americans  often  feel 
vulnerable  and  live  in  an  environment  of  fear  and  trepidation.  This  in  and  of 
itself  is  not  healthy. 

One  of  the  tasks  of  ministry  is  to  advance  the  spiritual  health  of  the 
Christian  community.  Ministers  are  called  to  be  “physicians  of  the  soul.” 
However,  for  people  of  African  descent  one  cannot  separate  the  health  of  the 
soul  from  the  health  of  the  whole  person.  The  health  of  the  whole  person  may 
include  but  is  not  the  same  as  the  full  function  of  all  the  biological  systems  in 
the  physical  body.  The  health  of  the  whole  person  simply  suggests  that  we  are 
more  than  flesh  and  bone;  that  we  are  our  bodies  and  more.  There  are  other 
religious  and  even  Christian  groups  that  harbor  their  own  suspicion  and 
ambivalence  toward  modern  Western  medicine  (e.g.,  Christian  Scientists). 
The  health  problems  of  black  folk,  however,  are  deeply  rooted  in  their 
inclusion  and  marginalization  within  Western  culture  and  societies. 

The  purpose  of  this  lecture  is  to  address  the  notion  of  health  in  African 
American  experience  as  a theological  problem.  By  exposing  the  religious 
underpinnings  of  this  issue,  insight  might  be  provided  that  will  enhance  the 
work  of  those  who  minister  to  African  Americans.  The  basic  assumption  is 
that  this  is  not  a problem  of  medical  ethics  but  something  much  more 
fundamental.  The  question  of  who  receives  quality  medical  care  in  our  society 
is,  at  heart,  a question  of  who  shall  be  saved?  The  theological  issue  here  is 
soteriology.  The  language  of  soteriology  is  almost  never  used  in  discussing 
this  issue  because  that  language  is  associated  with  narrow  theological  discus- 
sions of  sin.  When  the  concept  of  health  is  discussed,  it  is  most  often 
juxtaposed  with  the  concept  of  illness.  However,  it  is  my  thesis  that  the 
concept  of  health,  when  referring  to  black  people,  is  discussed  in  muted  tones 
and  within  the  narrative  framework  of  a rhetoric  of  disease. 

We  will  begin  with  a brief  examination  of  the  most  animated  public 
discussion  of  health  in  recent  years:  the  debate  on  the  Health  Security  Act 
proposed  in  the  early  1990s.  The  truncated  character  of  this  debate  suggests 
that  the  deeper  issues  remain  unaddressed.  A conceptual  overview  of  the 
major  scholarly  discussions  of  disease  in  the  field  of  medical  anthropology  will 
provide  the  context  for  a brief  examination  of  this  concept  in  the  experience  of 
black  people  in  Western  cultural  systems.  It  will  be  important  to  note  how  the 
Bible  speaks  to  the  notions  of  health  and  disease,  before  concluding  with  a 
proposal  for  revising  our  theological  understanding  of  salvation. 


328  THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 

I.  The  Health-Care  Debate:  More  Than  a Question  of  Ethics 


In  the  early  1990s  the  debate  over  health  care  in  the  United  States  was 
initiated  by  the  realization  that  many  of  the  nation’s  social  problems  were 
actually  health  problems.  Tens  of  millions  of  people  lacked  either  the 
resources  to  obtain  quality  medical  care  or  the  insurance  coverage  to 
guarantee  access.  While  a significant  portion  (14%)  of  the  national  gross 
product  was  spent  annually  on  health  care,  a large  percentage  of  the 
population  found  such  care  beyond  its  reach.  The  response  to  this  problem 
was  the  introduction  of  the  1993  Health  Security  Plan  by  the  President  of  the 
United  States.  The  aim  of  this  plan  was  to  guarantee  that  every  American 
citizen  had  access  to  quality  medical  care.  For  our  purposes,  the  details  of  the 
plan  and  its  relative  merits  or  faults  are  less  important  than  the  way  in  which 
the  issues  were  rhetorically  framed.  The  introduction  of  the  notion  of 
universal  coverage  spawned  four  major  questions,  but  in  the  final  analysis 
those  questions  left  unaddressed  the  fundamental  issue. 

First,  the  idea  of  universal  health  care  presented  a political/economic 
question.  “How  can  we  provide  universal  access  to  quality  health  care  and  at 
the  same  time  control  spiraling  costs?”  Here  the  issue  is  one  of  determining 
the  principles,  in  terms  of  money  and  power,  by  which  this  commodity  called 
health  care  is  allocated.  Second,  it  presented  an  ethical  question.  “Is  not 
health  care  a fundamental  good  to  which  each  American  citizen  is  entitled?”1 
Or  is  the  case,  as  former  Surgeon  General  C.  Everett  Koop  put  it,  that  “what’s 
good  for  each  American  is  not  necessarily  good  for  all  Americans  and  what’s 
good  for  all  Americans  is  not  necessarily  good  for  each  American”?2 3  Here  the 
issue  is  one  of  determining  whether  health  care  is  a fundamental  good  or  a 
relative  good;  whether  it  is  primarily  an  individual  possession  or  a community 
possession.  At  this  point  the  public  conversation  reached  its  most  heated  and 
unproductive  stage.  It  simply  pitted  individual  rights  against  group  responsi- 
bilities, and  given  the  propensity  toward  individualism  in  U.S.  society,  the 
conversation  was  doomed  to  futility.  Third,  the  debate  on  health  care  in  the 
United  States  presented  a cultural  question.  “Is  not  the  issue  of  universal 
entitlement  to  health  care  shaped  by  a Darwinistic  bias  toward  the  survival  of 
the  fittest  amidst  the  inexorable  forces  of  the  marketplace?  ”3  The  issue  here  is 
whether  the  idea  of  universal  health-care  coverage  is  antithetical  to  our 

1 See  William  F.  May,  “The  Ethical  Foundations  of  Health  Care  Reform,”  The  Christian 
Century  3,  no.  18  (June  1-8,  1994):  573;  and  Allen  D.  Verhey,  “The  Health  Security  Act: 
Policy  and  Story,”  The  Christian  Century  3,  no.  3 (January  26,  1994):  74. 

1 “The  Ethics  of  Health  Care:  An  Interview  with  C.  Everett  Koop,”  The  Christian  Centuty 
3,  no.  3 (January  26,  1994):  78. 

3 Verhey,  “The  Plealth  Security  Act,”  76. 


HEALTH , DISEASE,  AND  SALVATION 


329 


closely  held  notions  of  what  it  means  to  be  an  American.  The  fourth  question 
emerging  out  of  the  debate  was  a moral  one.  Quentin  D.  Young,  a physician, 
offered  these  reflections  on  the  formation  of  that  moral  question  in  his 
experience  at  Cook  County  Hospital  in  Chicago: 

Whatever  there  was,  County  had.  And  you  see  the  most  disenfranchised, 
the  most  impoverished,  the  wretched  of  the  earth.  I was  just  a middle-class, 
kind  of  liberal  person,  but  it  became  clear  that  a doctor  at  County  could 
adopt  one  of  two  philosophies  — and  the  staff  was  about  evenly  divided 
along  these  lines.  About  half  the  doctors  felt  that  they  were  witnessing 
divine  justice,  a heavenly— or  Darwinian  — retribution  for  evil  ways,  for 
excesses  in  drugs,  in  booze  and  everything  else.  Patients  came  to  the 
hospital  with  their  breath  laden  with  alcohol,  with  needle  marks  on  their 
arms,  their  babies  illegitimate  and  all  the  rest.  The  other  half  decided  that 
here  was  the  congealed  oppression  of  our  society— people  whose  skin  color, 
economic  position,  place  of  birth,  family  size,  you  name  it— operated  to 
give  them  a very  short  stick.  When  you  saw  them  medically  and  psychologi- 
cally in  that  broken,  oppressed  state,  it  was  clear  that  you  had  to  address 
issues  of  justice,  not  just  medical  treatment.  I had  to  decide  which  of  these 
value  systems  was  fair  and  just,  and  which  one  I could  live  with.  It  seemed  to 
me  the  first  approach  is  judgmental  and  harsh  and  simplistic.  Taking  the 
alternative  view  gave  me  a shot  at  being  a part  of  the  human  race.4 

Although  the  cultural  and  moral  questions  had  the  potential  to  open  public 
discourse  to  the  deeper  theological  questions  involved,  that  potential  was 
unrealized  because  of  the  absence  of  significant  theological  analysis  and 
because  the  underlying  question  centered  around  who  would  take  care  of  the 
poor.  The  ethical  debate  on  health  care  stalled  because  the  problem  was 
subtly  recast  as  a problem  of  the  poor.  Since  the  end  of  the  mass  immigration 
of  persons  from  Europe  early  in  the  twentieth  century,  the  poor  has  become  a 
way  of  referring  to  those  persons  who  are  marginal  to  society.  While  various 
ethnic  groups  have  and  will  continue  to  move  in  and  out  of  this  category,  the 
term  the  poor  has  always  been,  in  many  important  ways,  synonymous  with 
black  people.  As  Toni  Morrison  notes  in  her  brilliant  essay  Playing  in  the 
Dark:  Whiteness  and  the  Literary  Imagination,  black  people  have  historically 
been  a cipher  in  our  national  discourse.5  It  is  my  contention  that  within  the 
deep  narrative  structures  and  beneath  the  broad  cultural  connotations  of 

4 “Health  Reform  and  Civic  Survival:  An  Interview  with  Quentin  D.  Young,”  The 
Christian  Century  3,  no.  31  (November  2,  1994):  1014. 

5 (New  York:  Random  House,  1993). 


33° 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


health  in  our  society  lies  a rhetoric  of  disease.  Unless  this  rhetoric  is  critically 
examined  it  will  be  difficult,  if  not  impossible,  to  understand  the  meaning  of 
health  in  our  times  and  why  human  wholeness  has  proven  to  be  so  allusive  for 
the  Christian  community. 

II.  A Conceptual  Overview  of  Health  and  Disease 

Concern  with  health  and  disease  has  always  been  a part  of  human 
experience.  In  every  age  and  culture,  life  and  well-being  have  been  threatened 
by  those  conditions  we  call  disease.  Disease  is  as  old  as  life  itself  “because 
disease  is  nothing  else  but  life,  life  under  changed  circumstances.”6 *  It  is 
precisely  the  different  ways  in  which  the  forces  that  control  those  circum- 
stances of  human  life  are  construed  which  result  in  the  major  medical  theories 
and  the  concomitant  views  of  health  and  disease. 

Among  the  oldest  understandings  of  health  and  disease  is  that  of  ancient 
Egypt.  The  Egyptians  developed  a sophisticated  understanding  of  human 
biological  systems.  This  knowledge  enabled  them  to  develop  the  embalming 
processes  for  which  they  are  famous.  Beyond  their  knowledge  of  human 
anatomy,  they  understood  the  processes  by  which  matter  decomposed.  They 
developed  the  knowledge  to  delay  or  virtually  halt  the  process  of  decomposi- 
tion, which  they  referred  to  as  putrefaction.  This  notion  of  putrefaction  was 
the  basis  of  their  understanding  of  health  and  disease.  Disease  occurred  when 
nutriments  were  taken  into  the  body  but  not  absorbed.  These  nutriments 
remained  in  the  organs,  were  warmed  by  the  natural  heat  of  the  body,  and 
underwent  putrefaction,  which  resulted  in  disease. 7 The  Egyptian  notion  of 
health  is  the  reverse  of  disease.  Health  is  restored  and  maintained  by  ridding 
the  body  of  these  residues.  This  was  the  aim  of  medical  practice  in  ancient 
Egypt.  In  spite  of  the  attempts  of  some  scholars  to  claim  the  contrary,  ancient 
Egyptian  medicine  had  a rational  basis.  This  rational  basis  and  many  of  its 
fundamental  ideas  were  the  legacy  of  ancient  Egypt  to  Greece.8 

The  most  influential  theory  of  health  and  disease  in  Western  culture  is 
derived  from  the  ancient  Greeks.  As  far  back  as  the  time  of  Homer,  the 
Greeks  were  concerned  about  physical  health.  Health  was  a highly  desirable 
state,  and  illness  was  a sign  of  the  presence  of  evil.  Homeric  medicine  made  a 
distinction  between  what  we  would  refer  to  as  disease  and  illness.  Illness 

6 Henry  E.  Sigerist,  A History  of  Medicine,  2 vols.  (New  York:  Oxford  University  Press, 
I951-61),  1:38. 

7j.  B.  deC.  M.  Saunders,  The  Transitions  from  Ancient  Egyptian  to  Greek  Medicine 
(Lawrence:  University  of  Kansas  Press,  1963),  21. 

8 Many  of  the  ideas  that  made  their  way  into  that  body  of  works  called  the  Hippocratic 
Collection  bore  striking  similarity  to  medical  ideas  from  ancient  Egypt. 


33 1 


HEALTH,  DISEASE,  AND  SALVATION 

basically  referred  to  those  threats  to  health  that  persons  encountered  on  the 
battlefield.  To  be  ill  was  essentially  to  be  wounded.  This  is  why  The  Illiad  and 
other  Homeric  poems  so  vividly  recount  the  horrors  of  war.  On  the  other 
hand,  disease  was  inflicted  by  the  gods.  Zeus,  Apollo,  and  Artemis  could  show 
their  displeasure  by  sending  infirmity  to  plague  their  human  subjects.9 
Homeric  physicians  refused  to  treat  persons  with  diseases,  limiting  their 
practice  to  those  wounded  in  battle.  Following  the  Homeric  period,  Greek 
notions  of  health  and  disease  fell  into  two  fairly  distinct  traditions. 

The  first  and  dominant  tradition  developed  in  the  emergent  philosophical 
schools.  In  this  philosophical  tradition,  health  was  defined  as  the  state  of 
balance  or  equilibrium  within  the  body;  that  is,  those  substances  that  make  up 
the  body  must  be  maintained  in  specific  proportions  and  in  specific  relation- 
ship to  each  other.  Disease  occurred  when  this  balance  or  equilibrium  was 
upset.  Both  Plato  and  Aristotle  discussed  health  and  disease  in  their  attempts 
to  describe  the  nature  of  human  and  cosmic  reality.  Likewise,  Pythagoras,  the 
mathematician,  related  health  and  disease  to  his  view  of  reality.  For 
Pythagoras,  all  of  reality  could  be  explained  in  numerical  terms  and  existed  in 
an  ideal  mathematical  harmony.  Therefore,  “harmony,  perfect  equilibrium, 
perfect  balance,  were  the  goal  of  the  Pythagorean  life  and  also  the  key  to 
health.”10  Disease  occurred  when  that  delicate  balance  was  upset,  and  the  cure 
was  to  restore  that  balance  through  diet  and,  surprisingly,  music.  (Of  course, 
this  view  of  health  as  balance  and  disease  as  imbalance  was  also  characteristic 
of  other  ancient  cultures,  in  particular,  the  pre-Columbian  societies  of  the 
Maya.  Like  many  other  philosophical  ideas,  the  presence  in  Greek  thought  of 
this  view  of  health  and  disease  does  not  necessarily  prove  its  origin  in  Greek 
thought.) 

The  dominant  figure  in  Greek  medical  thought  was  Hippocrates.  Although 
some  scholars  have  argued  that  he  never  really  existed,  it  is  generally  believed 
that  he  was  born  about  460  B.C.  on  the  island  of  Cos  and  died  about  370  in 
Thessaly.11  Hippocrates  is  credited  with  bringing  the  power  of  unrelenting 
rationality  to  the  practice  of  medicine.  He  is  best  known  for  the  body  of 
writing  that  bears  his  name,  the  Hippocratic  Collection,  a massive  work  that 
systematically  sets  forth  a significant  portion  of  the  medical  knowledge  of  the 
day.  Although  it  is  not  likely  that  Hippocrates  wrote  the  entire  corpus,  its 
main  ideas  are  attributed  to  him.  Its  major  topics  are  anatomy,  physiology, 
general  pathology,  therapy,  diagnosis,  prognosis,  surgery,  gynecology,  obstet- 

9 Sigerist,  A History  of  Medicine,  2:20-2 1 . 

10  Ibid.,  97. 

11  Albert  S.  Lyons  and  R.  Joseph  Petrucelli  II,  Medicine:  An  Illustrated  History  (New  York: 
Abradale,  1978),  207. 


332 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


rics,  mental  illness,  and  ethics.  In  these  treatises,  the  foundations  of  modem 
Western  medicine  were  laid.  Hippocrates  is  also  remembered  for  the 
Hippocratic  Oath12  and  for  the  method  that  bears  his  name.  The  Hippocratic 
method  refers  to  the  unrelenting  rationalism  of  Greek  medical  thought. 
Eschewing  religious  and  magical  explanations  for  illness  and  disease,  this 
method  was  built  on  four  major  principles:  observe  all;  study  the  patient 
rather  than  the  disease;  evaluate  honestly;  and  assist  nature.  With  Hip- 
pocrates, the  physician  is  the  scientist,  medicine  is  the  mastery  of  nature,  and 
health  and  disease  are  no  longer  matters  of  mystery. 

The  second  and  subordinate  tradition  in  Greek  medical  thought  deals  more 
specifically  with  the  persistent  notion  that  disease  was  connected  with  the 
wrath  of  the  gods.  When  the  Homeric  physicians  would  not  treat  persons 
with  internal  diseases,  they  went  to  various  cultic  priests  who  helped  the 
patients  to  placate  the  offended  deities.  Even  during  and  after  the  time  of 
Hippocrates,  persons  sought  alternative  causal  explanations  of  health  and 
disease.  This  religious  system  of  medical  thought  centered  around  the 
mythical  figure  of  Asclepius,  the  Greek  god  of  healing.  Numerous  elaborate 
temples  and  a sophisticated  system  of  medical  treatment  evolved  from  the 
adoration  of  Asclepius,  beginning  about  the  sixth  century  B.C.  This  medical 
system  existed  side  by  side  with  the  practice  of  secular  medicine  in  Greece, 
and  the  temples  functioned  as  hospitals.  Since  the  cause  of  disease  in  religious 
medical  thought  was  the  wrath  of  the  gods,  health  could  only  be  restored  by 
appealing  to  the  god  of  healing.  In  Asclepian  temples,  patients  underwent  a 
series  of  treatments,  including  dietary  prescriptions  and  ritual  bathing. 
However,  the  most  important  component  of  the  healing,  called  incubation, 
involved  creating  an  atmosphere  in  which  the  patient  fell  into  a sleep-like 
state.  During  the  night  the  patient  would  be  visited  by  a priest  dressed  like  the 
god  Asclepius.  The  priest,  along  with  the  temple  assistants,  would  administer 
a series  of  treatments  that  included  traditional  and  secular  methods.  In  this 
system  the  cure  took  place  in  the  patient’s  dreams.  In  one  important  text  in 


12  “In  summary,  this  famous  testament  contains  both  affirmations  and  prohibitions.  It 
begins  with  pledges  to  the  gods  and  to  teachers  as  well  as  future  students.  The  prohibitions 
are  against  harm  to  the  patient,  deadly  drugs,  abortion,  surgery,  sexual  congress  with  the 
patient  or  his  household,  and  revelation  of  secrets  discovered  while  ministering  to  the  sick. 
The  duties  are  to  act  with  purity  and  holiness.  The  Oath  is  the  most  widely  known 
document  associated  with  the  name  of  Hippocrates.  Graduating  medical  students  for 
centuries  have  stood  to  swear  to  its  provisions  (either  unaltered  or  with  modifications).  Yet 
it  is  probably  not  a part  of  the  Hippocratic  teachings,  was  not  in  all  likelihood  sworn  by 
physicians  on  Cos,  and  is  at  variance  with  some  of  the  principles  and  practices  of 
Hippocrates”  (Ibid.,  115). 


333 


HEALTH,  DISEASE,  AND  SALVATION 

the  field  of  medical  history,  the  following  observation  is  offered: 

Clearly  the  most  important  ingredient  in  the  effectiveness  of  the  temple 
cure  was  faith.  The  suppliant’s  belief  in  the  efficacy  of  the  god  was  aided  by 
accounts  of  cures  on  tablets  and  probably  by  oral  descriptions  given  by 
temple  assistants.  . . . The  religious  and  spiritual  atmosphere  was  inspiring, 
and  the  appearance  and  ministrations  of  the  priest  acting  as  Asclepios,  with 
his  accompanying  retinue,  were  doubtless  impressive. ‘3 

The  persistence  of  religious  medicine  in  ancient  Greece  was  due  to  some  of 
the  dramatic  cures  accomplished  there.  However,  a contributing  factor  was 
the  refusal  of  secular  physicians  to  treat  what  they  thought  were  hopeless 
cases.  For  these  patients  there  was  nowhere  else  to  turn  for  the  restoration  of 
the  balance  that  constituted  true  health. 

While  Greek  ideas  of  medical  practice  set  the  course  of  Western  thought, 
four  other  major  notions  of  health  and  disease  were  articulated  in  subsequent 
centuries.  In  the  naturalistic  view,  health  is  defined  as  an  appropriate  lifespan 
that  ends  in  natural  death.  Disease  is  the  interruption  of  this  natural  process. 
The  tragedy  of  disease  is  not  that  it  may  result  in  death  but  that  it  interrupts 
the  natural  processes  of  life.  Philosophically  speaking,  disease  is  a permanent 
historical  phenomenon  that  signals  the  historical  existence  of  humanity. 
Disease  takes  a natural  and  historical  course  over  time,  just  as  human 
experience  does.  In  this  sense,  the  history  of  disease  is  part  of  human  history. 
Nevertheless,  disease  is  also  a sign  that  nature  has  been  violated.  This  view  is 
most  clearly  articulated  by  the  French  philosopher  Jean-Jacques  Rousseau. 
According  to  Rousseau  humanity  enjoyed  perfect  health  in  its  primitive, 
paradisiacal  state.  Disease  was  the  result  of  civilization.  However,  it  was  not 
merely  the  changed  environment  that  brought  about  disease  but  the  fact  that 
in  civilization,  humanity  strove  for  more  than  was  needed  for  life.  This 
journey  from  a natural  state  to  the  mastery  of  the  universe  resulted  in  pain  and 
disease. 14  In  the  religious  view,  as  we  have  already  noted,  disease  is  associated 
with  divine  punishment,  sin,  and  impurity.  In  the  moral  view,  the  source  of 
disease  is  the  inner  struggle  of  humanity  to  control  primitive  impulses  and 
desires.  In  Freudian  terms,  as  human  beings  seek  to  limit  aggression,  unful- 
filled desires  often  result  in  an  assortment  of  maladies.  Here  disease  is  the 
result  of  sin  defined  as  transgression  against  internal  moral  laws  rather  than 


o Ibid.,  183. 

14  VValther  Riese,  The  Conception  of  Disease:  Its  History,  Its  Versions  and  Its  Nature  (New 
York:  Philosophical  Library,  1953),  1 1. 


334 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


against  the  external  rule  of  the  gods  or  against  the  laws  of  nature.  In  the  social 
view , the  roots  of  disease  are  found  in  the  living  conditions  of  modern 
industrial  life.  Health  is  restored  by  the  provision  of  adequate  sanitation, 
inoculation,  and  education.  In  this  case,  diseases  are  social  “not  because  of  the 
social  nature  of  their  causes,  but  because  of  their  social  implications. ”‘5 

The  Greek  system  of  medicine  has  continued  to  define  Western  medicine 
at  the  level  of  rational  thought  and  scientific  practice.  Other  medical  systems 
have  emerged,  all  with  their  distinctive  economies  of  health  and  disease,  for 
example,  homeopathy,  hydrotherapy,  phrenology,  osteopathy,  chiropractic, 
and  Christian  Science.  Some  of  these  systems  have  stood  over  and  against  the 
dominant  medical  paradigm,  while  others  have  almost  merged  with  it. 
However,  discussions  of  the  philosophical  connotations  of  health  and  disease 
have  lost  their  centrality  in  medical  thought  with  the  emergence  of  germ 
theory  and  the  role  of  bacteria  in  the  causal  explanation  of  sickness.  Yet,  the 
notions  of  health  and  disease  continue  to  function  in  our  culture  as  rhetorical 
markers  that  help  us  to  define  our  reality  and  to  make  sense  of  that  which  we 
do  not  fully  understand. 

Several  important  moments  in  the  development  of  the  rhetoric  of  disease  in 
Western  culture  merit  brief  mention  here.  First  is  the  discovery  by  Rudolph 
Virchow  (1821-1902),  a pioneer  in  the  field  of  pathology  in  European 
medicine,  that  what  we  call  disease  is  not  one  thing  but  a series  of  symptoms 
for  which  we  have  no  other  explanation.  Disease  is  not  caused  by  outside 
agents  acting  on  the  body  but  is  the  result  of  the  response  or  lack  thereof  by 
the  body  to  internal  or  external  changes.  Disease,  in  the  view  of  Virchow,  “is 
but  a figurative,  imaginative  and  abstract  unity  ...  it  remains  an  abstraction  or 
pure  thought , stimulated , however , by  the  concrete  reality  of  observable  phenomena 
and , above  all , not  denied  by  them.”16  The  significance  of  this  insight  is  that  the 
difference  between  health  and  disease  is  blurred  and  the  criteria  for  distinguish- 
ing between  them  become  quite  relative.  Therefore,  disease  becomes  a label,  a 
rhetorical  convention,  rather  than  a solution  to  a problem.  H.  Tristam 
Engelhardt,  Jr.  notes  that  “disease  language  is  complex.  . . . Further,  disease 
language  is  performative;  it  creates  social  reality.”'7  This  purely  formal 
definition  of  disease  makes  it  possible  to  fill  the  category  with  a variety  of 
content.  For  example,  disease  can  take  on  a primarily  social  meaning.  This  has 

'5  Ibid.,  72. 

16  Ibid.,  62. 

'7  “Understanding  Faith  Traditions  in  the  Context  of  Health  Care:  Philosophy  as  a 
Guide  for  the  Perplexed,”  in  Health/Medicine  and  the  Faith  Traditions:  An  Inquiry  into 
Religion  and  Medicine,  ed.  Martin  E.  Marty  and  Kenneth  L.  Vaux  (Philadelphia:  Fortress, 
1982),  174-75. 


HEALTH , DISEASE,  AND  SALVATION 


335 


been  true  of  syphilis  throughout  the  centuries.  As  a disease,  it  has  no  timeless 
meaning.18  It  has  been  a symbol  for  the  defilement  of  Europe  by  so-called 
pagan  cultures,  and  it  has  been  the  symbol  for  the  defilement  of  non-Western 
cultures  by  Europeans.  Further,  the  development  of  the  notion  of  disease  as  a 
rhetorical  category  makes  it  possible  to  use  it  to  refer  to  that  which  we  do  not 
understand  and/or  by  which  we  feel  threatened,  for  example,  people  of  other 
races.  On  one  hand,  racial  difference  was  sometimes  admired  because  certain 
racial  groups  seemed  resistant  to  certain  diseases.  This  romantic  view  was 
applied  to  European  Jews  in  the  early  nineteenth  century.1?  More  often, 
however,  the  rhetorical  category  of  disease  made  it  possible  to  identify  certain 
racial  groups  as  threats  to  public  health.  In  the  1930s  German  National 
Socialist  propaganda  associated  Jews  with  the  Black  Plague.  Some  medical 
historians  linked  Africa  with  leprosy.  Disease  became  a convenient  conceptual 
category  within  which  to  couch  a purely  irrational  racism.  The  construction 
of  a rhetoric  of  disease  was  enhanced  by  a debate  on  the  nature  of  contagion. 
Humankind  has  always  recognized  that  disease  can  be  spread  from  person  to 
person.  However,  this  fact  has  often  been  overshadowed  by  the  belief  that 
there  were  divine  or  cosmic  reasons  for  its  spread.  In  the  eighteenth  century  in 
the  United  States  and  Europe,  a battle  emerged  between  those  persons  who 
believed  that  disease  was  contagious  and  those  who  believed  that  disease  was 
caused  by  environmental  changes  or  internal  bodily  changes.  The  contagion- 
ists  emerged  victorious  in  this  struggle,  thereby  enforcing  the  principle  of 
quarantine.  Disease  as  rhetorical  device  proved  quite  effective  in  buttressing 
arguments  for  racial  segregation,  isolation,  and  finally,  genocide,  or  ethnic 
cleansing.  This  rhetoric  has  had  a significant  impact  on  the  experience  of 
African  Americans  and  has  been  especially  potent  when  linked  with  religious 
discourse. 

ID.  Health  and  Disease  in  African  American  Experience 

One  of  the  ways  to  understand  the  complexities  of  African  American 
experience  is  to  examine  the  ways  in  which  the  rhetoric  of  health  and  disease 
has  been  employed  in  setting  limits  and  conscribing  life  chances.  This 
rhetoric  has  taken  a shape  peculiar  to  the  culture  of  the  United  States.  Its 
roots,  however,  like  those  of  many  other  ideological  forces  in  the  nation,  lie  in 
Europe.  Within  European  culture  the  rhetoric  of  disease  developed  with 

,R  H.  Tristram  Engelhardt,  Jr.,  “The  Social  Meanings  of  Illness,”  Second  Opinion  1 (1986): 
27- 

ly  See  Benjamin  Ward  Richardson,  Diseases  of  Modem  Life  (Union  Square,  NM:  Berming- 
ham  & Co.,  1982). 


336 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


distinct  racial  overtones.  One  of  the  more  celebrated  examples  of  this  was  the 
pornographic  fascination  of  the  European  medical-scientific  community  with 
the  physiognomy  of  Sarah  Bartmann.  Sarah  Bartmann  was  a woman  of  the 
Hottentot  tribe  in  South  Africa  who  was  exhibited  as  the  “Hottentot  Venus” 
throughout  Europe  for  more  than  twenty-five  years.  Large  European 
audiences  gathered  to  view  her  naked  body,  which  was  of  such  scientific 
interest  because  of  the  size  of  her  buttocks  and  her  sexual  organs.  Even  after 
her  premature  death  in  Paris  in  1815,  the  fascination  with  her  body  continued 
as  her  private  parts  were  preserved  for  viewing  and  study.  Her  black  body  was 
sacrificed  in  the  interest  of  others.  This  account  is  important  because  the 
obviously  sexual  fascination  of  her  captors  was  camouflaged  by  the  rhetoric  of 
disease.  That  is,  it  was  argued  that  her  body  and  the  difference  that  she 
displayed  was  the  result  of  disease.  Therefore,  the  study  of  her  body  was 
critical  to  the  health  of  the  general  public.  Black  women  and  black  sexuality 
were  related  to  disease.  This  is  the  reason  for  the  intermittent  European 
fascination  with  and  aversion  to  black  sexuality. 

The  rhetoric  of  disease  was  a critical  factor  in  the  maintenance  of  American 
slavery.  Although  the  argument  that  Africans  were  diseased  was  not  the 
primary  reason  given  for  their  enslavement,  it  was  instrumental  in  the 
maintenance  of  the  system  of  chattel  slavery.  One  writer  notes  that  “there  is  a 
long  history  of  perceiving  this  [black]  skin  color  as  the  result  of  some 
pathology.  The  favorite  theory,  which  reappears  with  some  frequency  in  the 
early  nineteenth  century,  is  that  the  skin  color  and  physiognomy  of  the  black 
are  the  result  of  congenital  leprosy.”20 

In  the  view  of  Benjamin  Rush,  a major  architect  of  the  rhetoric  of  disease, 
the  greatest  threat  to  public  health  was  the  presence  of  black  people.21  In 
scholarly  papers  Rush  argued  that  the  black  skin  of  African  Americans  was  the 
result  of  a form  of  leprosy.  Other  marks  of  this  diseased  state  were  the  size  and 
shape  of  their  lips  and  noses  and  the  texture  of  their  hair.  Interestingly,  Rush 
argued  that  this  disease  does  not  impair  the  physical  health  of  black  people 
because  it  was  not  infectious  within  the  race.  However,  he  notes  it  is  highly 

20  Sander  L.  Gilman,  Difference  and  Pathology:  Stereotypes  of  Sexuality,  Race,  and  Madness 
(Ithaca,  NY:  Cornell  University  Press,  1985),  101. 

21  Ronald  Takaki,  Iron  Cages:  Race  and  Culture  in  Nineteenth  Century  America  (New  York: 
Oxford  University  Press,  1990),  16-17.  Rush  was  a founder  of  the  Pennsylvania  Society  for 
Promoting  the  Abolition  of  Slavery,  a member  of  the  Continental  Congress,  a signer  of  the 
Declaration  of  Independence,  an  influential  educator,  and  a philosopher  of  republican 
ideology.  Moreover,  he  was  a doctor  of  medicine,  surgeon-general  in  the  Revolutionary 
army,  professor  of  the  theory  and  practice  of  medicine  at  the  University  of  Pennsylvania, 
and  the  head  of  the  Pennsylvania  Hospital’s  ward  for  the  insane.  Author  of  seminal  books 
on  the  diseases  of  the  mind,  he  would  later  be  regarded  as  the  Father  of  American 
Psychiatry. 


HEALTH , DISEASE,  AND  SALVATION 


337 


contagious,  and  it  is  quite  possible  for  whites  to  become  infected.  He  reports 
that  “a  white  woman  in  North  Carolina  not  only  acquired  a dark  color,  but 
several  of  the  features  of  a Negro,  by  marrying  and  living  with  a black 
husband”22  (There  is  no  mention,  curiously  enough,  of  whether  this  physical 
change  was  observed  in  white  men  who  cohabitated  with  black  women.)  The 
contagious  nature  of  the  disease  of  blackness  required  that  black  people  be 
quarantined.  Rush  argued  that  it  was  necessary  to  separate  the  races  for 
reasons  of  public  health.  The  creation  of  huge  racial  leper  colonies  was  only  a 
temporary  measure.  The  final  remedy,  according  to  Rush,  was  to  cure  black 
people  of  their  blackness.  Only  by  turning  their  skin  white  could  people  of 
African  descent  be  healed  of  their  infirmity.  Rush  recommended  the  ancient 
practice  of  bleeding,  or  purging,  to  accomplish  this  task. 

The  rhetoric  of  disease  was  not  always  associated  with  the  physical  color  of 
the  African’s  skin.  Black  people  were  also  thought  to  suffer  from  a variety  of 
mental  diseases: 

One  of  the  interesting  sidelights  of  [this  issue]  was  triggered  by  the  sixth 
national  census  of  1840.  When  the  results  were  published  in  1841,  it  was  for 
the  first  time  possible  to  obtain  data  concerning  mental  illness  in  the 
United  States.  The  total  number  of  those  reported  to  be  insane  and 
feeble-minded  in  the  United  States  was  over  17,000,  of  which  nearly  3,000 
were  black.  If  these  staggering  census  statistics  were  to  be  believed,  free 
blacks  had  an  incidence  of  mental  illness  eleven  times  higher  than  slaves 
and  six  times  higher  than  the  white  population.  The  antiabolitionist  forces 
were  thus  provided  with  major  scientific  evidence  that  blacks  were  congeni- 
tally unfit  for  freedom. 23 

In  1 85 1 , as  scientific  theories  of  racial  inferiority  emerged,  Samuel  Cartwright 
published  a paper  in  the  New  Orleans  Surgical  Journal,  in  which  he  identified 
certain  psychopathologies  to  which  black  people,  alone,  were  prey.  Chief 
among  these  was  “Drapetomania,”  a disease  that  caused  black  slaves  to  run 
away.2*  The  desire  to  be  free  and  resistance  to  the  institution  of  slavery  were 
thus  diagnosed  as  a mental  illness.  The  function  of  slavery  was  to  cure  black 
people  of  this  condition.  Many  in  the  medical  profession  saw  black  people  as  a 
disease  in  the  body  politic.  Only  when  that  disease  had  been  eradicated  could 
the  nation  reach  its  destiny. 

One  of  the  lesser  observed  sources  of  the  rhetoric  of  disease  as  blackness  is 


22  Ibid.,  31. 

23  Gilman,  Difference  and  Pathology,  137. 

2 4 Ibid.,  138. 


33« 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


found  in  the  theological  discourse  of  early  and  medieval  Christianity.  The 
propensity  of  early  Christian  writers  to  employ  the  racially  charged  symbols 
of  blackness  and  whiteness  to  denote  evil  and  good,  disease  and  health,  is  well 
documented.  Much  of  this  discourse  was  set  by  the  commentaries  of  St. 
Ambrose  and  St.  Bernard  of  Clairvaux  on  the  Song  of  Songs.  In  reading  that 
book  of  the  Bible,  both  assume  that  the  color  of  the  Shulamite  maiden  is  a sign 
of  her  fall  from  grace.  Blackness  is  associated  with  sin,  and  sin  is  associated 
with  disease.  Moreover,  in  this  line  of  thought  it  is  also  permissible  to  sacrifice 
the  body  of  black  people  to  enhance  the  health  of  white  people.  One  of  the 
most  revered  legends  within  the  medieval  church  involved  the  twin  physicians 
Cosmas  and  Damian. 

Born  in  Cilicia  in  the  third  century,  they  were  physicians  who  in  the  hope  of 
gaining  converts  to  Christianity  provided  their  services  without  fee.  They 
suffered  a grotesque  martyrdom  in  the  year  278  during  the  reign  of 
Diocletian  but  soon  gained  a following,  at  first  in  the  East  and  later  in  the 
West,  for  numerous  miraculous  cures  both  in  life  and  after  death.  . . . Their 
most  famous  miracle  occurred  at  a church  named  after  them  in  a formerly 
pagan  temple  at  the  edge  of  the  Forum  in  Rome,  where  they  appeared 
posthumously  to  replace  the  gangrenous  leg  of  the  church’s  sacristan  with 
the  leg  of  a Negro  who  had  died  of  old  age.2? 

Not  only  does  this  legend  buttress  the  unspoken  assumption  that  the  bodies  of 
black  persons  can  be  sacrificed  for  the  health  of  white  persons,  there  is  an 
interesting  twist  given  to  this  story  in  a sixteenth-century  painting,  attributed 
to  Fernando  del  Rincon,  depicting  this  famous  miracle.  In  this  painting  not 
only  does  the  sacristan  have  the  healthy  leg  of  the  black  person  grafted  onto 
his  body,  but  lying  on  the  floor  is  the  black  man  with  the  diseased  white  leg 
grafted  onto  his  body.  It  is  this  unspoken  and  almost  unconscious  assumption 
that  the  black  body  can  serve  as  a kind  of  ritual  victim  that  bears  the  sin  of 
disease  that  lends  complexity  to  the  rhetoric  of  disease  as  blackness.  Theophus 
H.  Smith  argues  convincingly  that  black  people  have  functioned  in  American 
religious  discourse  as  a pharmakon.l(>  A pharmakon  can  be  both  a poison  and  a 
cure;  both  a sign  of  disease  and  an  avenue  to  health  as  purity. 

The  categories  of  health  and  disease  furnished  a powerful  set  of  metaphors 
and  binary  oppositions  for  a culture  radically  divided  by  race.  The  idea  of 
disease  is  deeply  rooted  in  the  history  of  attempts  to  make  sense  of  the 


25  Lyons  and  Petrucelli,  Medicine:  An  Illustrated  Histo?y,  291. 

26  Conjuring  Culture:  Biblical  Formations  of  Black  America  (New  York:  Oxford  University 
Press,  1994),  81-109. 


HEALTH,  DISEASE,  AND  SALVATION 


339 


unknown.  The  Tuskegee  experiment  simply  confirmed  the  historical  assump- 
tion that  black  bodies  could  be  sacrificed  for  the  health  of  others.  The  debate 
on  providing  health  care  to  every  American  citizen  resurrected  the  submerged 
language  of  health  and  disease.  It  was  a debate  that  could  not  be  solved  at  the 
policy  level,  because  it  raised  much  deeper  questions.  Who  shall  be  saved 
from  this  disease  called  sin?  How  shall  we  be  saved?  Who  shall  heal  our 
sin-sick  souls? 


IV.  Health  and  Disease  in  the  Bible 

Within  the  history  of  medical  thought  in  the  West,  a rhetoric  of  disease 
emerged.  This  rhetoric  persisted  through  the  rationalistic  development  of 
medical  thought  and  practice  because  it  provided  a way  to  account  for  the 
strange  and  unknown  in  human  experience.  In  the  course  of  time,  that 
rhetoric  was  associated  with  people  of  African  descent.  This  association  was 
buttressed  by  Western  philosophical  and  cultural  discourse  and  by  certain 
aspects  of  Western  Christian  narratives.  The  system  of  chattel  slavery  in  the 
United  States  found  support  in  this  rhetoric  of  disease,  because  black  skin  was 
deemed  pathological.  The  question  confronting  us  at  this  juncture  is:  What 
resources  does  the  Bible  offer  to  counter  this  rhetoric  of  disease,  especially  as 
it  is  associated  with  blackness? 

The  contribution  of  the  Hebrew  scriptures  to  this  topic  is  found  in  (i)  their 
purity  codes  and  hygienic  restrictions  and  (2)  their  focus  on  the  relationship 
between  health  and  wholeness.  The  dietary  and  sanitary  restrictions  found  in 
the  Pentateuch  and  described  in  the  older  commentaries  stress  the  point  that 
these  mandates  had  their  source  and  ultimate  purpose  in  obedience  to  God. 
However,  later  scholars  have  argued  that  the  dietary  restrictions  against 
eating  certain  animals  had  a basis  in  the  maintenance  of  human  health  and  the 
prevention  of  disease.  In  addition,  the  practice  of  circumcision  is,  in  this  view, 
not  only  an  act  of  obedience  to  God  but  also  said  to  be  recognized  by  the 
medical  profession  as  good  preventive  medicine.  One  could  point  to  the 
biblical  injunctions  requiring  those  who  are  diseased  to  remain  separate  from 
the  community  as  a form  of  quarantine,  or  to  the  command  for  the  ritual 
washing  of  the  hands  as  a good  antiseptic  practice.  The  emphasis  on  showing 
that  the  mandates  of  the  Hebrew  Bible  are  consistent  with  good  secular 
medical  practice  is  meaningful  to  those  for  whom  good  medical  care  is  readily 
available,  but  it  says  very  little  to  those  whose  lives  are  circumscribed  by  the 
rhetoric  of  disease. 

A more  critical  perspective  on  the  origin  and  derivation  of  these  biblical 
mandates  would  recognize  that,  in  all  likelihood,  the  Israelites  inherited  a 


340 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


number  of  their  beliefs  about  disease  from  ancient  Mesopotamian  cultures.27 
Putting  the  biblical  mandates  regarding  dietary  restrictions  in  a broader  social 
context  might  yield  a different  perspective  on  dieir  origin  and  function: 

Much  has  been  made  of  a presumably  medical  basis  for  the  food  prohibi- 
tions in  Jewish  tradition,  but  there  may  be  other  explanations.  One  recent 
suggestion  is  that  the  taboo  against  pigs  was  originally  related  to  their 
competition  with  humans  for  water  and  grain  (scarce  commodities  in  a 
barren  land),  in  contrast  to  cattle  and  sheep  which  consume  relatively  little 
water  and  graze  on  forage  inedible  to  man.  Since  transmissible  parasitic 
diseases  and  infestations  such  as  tapeworm  are  also  found  in  sheep  and 
cows,  singling  out  trichinosis  in  pigs  would  not  be  wholly  logical.  However, 
to  discourage  the  raising  of  swine  so  as  to  conserve  water  and  grain 
resources  for  human  consumption,  a strict  religious  taboo  may  have  been 
necessary— considering  man’s  nearly  universal  agreement  on  the  delectable- 
ness of  pork.  Medical  observations  may  indeed  have  been  at  the  core  of 
hygienic  codes,  but  the  Biblical  listing  of  seemingly  unrelated  creatures 
prohibited  as  food  is  difficult  to  associate  with  purposes  entirely  hygienic.28 

While  one  cannot  deny  that  the  prophylactic  measures  found  in  the  Mosaic 
law  have  significance  as  preventive  medicine,  there  may  have  been  other 
factors  involved  in  their  development. 

The  ideas  of  health  and  disease  in  the  Hebrew  Bible  must  be  understood  in 
the  individual  contexts  in  which  they  are  discussed.  This  means  that  health,  as 
defined  in  the  Mosaic  law,  is  similar  to  the  description  adopted  by  the  World 
Health  Association  in  1946.  Health  is  “a  state  of  complete  well-being  and  not 
merely  the  absence  of  disease  or  infirmity.”2?  In  the  Hebrew  Bible,  health 
involves  the  unity  of  the  mind,  body,  and  spirit.  “The  healthy  person  is  the 
person  who  exhibits  physical,  mental,  and  spiritual  wholeness.  This  sense  of 
wholeness,  of  shalom,  of  well-being,  is  not  confined  merely  to  the  individual 
person,  but  extends  beyond  the  individual  to  the  community  as  well.  The 
healthy  person  is  an  integral  part  of  the  community.”?0  Health  and  disease  are 
complex  notions  in  the  Hebrew  Bible.  Health  is  not  merely  the  absence  of 
affliction  but  involves  a unique  quality  of  life.  Disease  cannot  be  explained 
simply  as  divine  punishment  for  sin  — a common  belief  among  ancient  Meso- 


2 ? Lyons  and  Petrucelli,  Medicine:  An  Illustrated  History , 71. 

28  Ibid. 

2?  Cited  in  John  J.  Pilch,  “Reading  Matthew  Anthropologically:  Healing  in  Cultural 
Perspective,”  Listening  24  (Fall  1989):  285. 

3°  Karen  S.  Carter,  “A  Biblical  Vision  of  Wholeness,”  Brethren  Life  and  Thought  33,  no.  1 
(Winter  1988):  60. 


HEALTH,  DISEASE,  AND  SALVATION 


341 


potamian  cultures  — as  the  story  of  Job  reveals.  It  is  an  indeterminate  aspect  of 
human  experience  that  derives  its  meaning,  in  large  part,  from  its  context. 

The  principal  biblical  resources  that  have  traditionally  been  used  to  address 
questions  of  health  and  disease  are  found  in  the  New  Testament.  Here  the 
presence  of  disease  is  often  associated  with  questions  of  theodicy.  Within  the 
New  Testament  there  is  evidence  for  at  least  six  different  explanations  for 
infirmity.3’  (i)  Disease  may  be  the  result  of  possession  by  demons  or  evil 
spirits  (Luke  13:10-17).  (2)  God  may  inflict  disease  to  punish  the  sufferer  for 
his  or  her  sins  (John  5:1-15).  (3)  Disease  may  be  punishment  for  the  sins  of 
one’s  parents  (John  9:3).  (4)  Disease  may  be  punishment  for  sins  in  a past  life 
(John  9:3).  (5)  Disease  may  be  permitted  to  show  God’s  power  to  heal  (John 
9:3).  (6)  Disease  may  be  permitted  to  show  God’s  power  to  sustain  the 
sufferer  even  if  the  disease  is  not  healed.  While  there  is  textual  evidence  to 
support  these  theodicies  in  the  New  Testament,  there  are  deeper  issues 
involved  that  are  important  in  understanding  the  revolutionary  significance  of 
Jesus’  healing  ministry. 

In  the  field  of  medical  anthropology  crucial  distinctions  are  made  between 
disease,  illness,  and  sickness.  One  of  the  most  influential  writers  in  the  field 
describes  them  in  the  following  manner.  “DISEASE  refers  to  abnormalities 
in  the  structure  and/or  function  of  organs  and  organ  systems;  pathological 
states  whether  or  not  they  are  culturally  recognized.  . . . ILLNESS  refers  to  a 
person’s  perceptions  and  experiences  of  certain  socially  disvalued  states 
including,  but  not  limited  to,  disease.  SICKNESS  is  a blanket  term  to  label 
events  involving  disease  and/or  illness.”32  The  key  to  these  definitions  is  that 
disease  refers  to  some  inherent  abnormality  in  the  person.  Both  illness  and 
sickness  include  a focus  on  the  subjectivity  of  the  sufferer.  Most  definitions  of 
disease,  illness,  and  sickness  in  the  field  of  medical  anthropology  share  the 
emphasis  on  disease  as  a thing  that  overshadows  or  renders  meaningless  the 
subjectivity  of  the  sufferer.  Illness  and  sickness  are  determined  by  asking  the 
patient  how  he  or  she  feels  in  anticipation  of  treatment.  Disease  is  associated 
with  some  external  and  observable  feature  of  the  person.  Here  the  subjectivity 
of  the  sufferer  is  obscured,  and  quarantine  is  prescribed.  This  explains  the 
tendency  of  some  New  Testament  scholars  to  discount  the  significance  of  the 
category  of  disease  and  to  emphasize  illness  as  the  most  appropriate  concept 


31  Robert  M.  Price,  “Illness  Theodicies  in  the  New  Testament,”  Journal  of  Religion  and 
Health  25  (Winter  1986):  309-15. 

32  Allan  Young,  “The  Anthropologies  of  Illness  and  Sickness,”  Annual  Review  of  Anthro- 
pology 11  (1982):  264. 


342 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


to  relate  to  healing  and  health. 33  It  is  my  contention,  however,  that  it  is 
disease,  with  all  of  its  connotations,  that  Jesus  addresses  in  his  ministry  of 
healing.  The  function  of  disease  is  that  it  removes  the  person  from  the 
community.  It  prevents  wholeness  and  solidarity  among  people.  It  overshad- 
ows the  personhood  of  the  sufferer.  It  consigns  the  sufferer  to  an  existence 
within  the  company  of  the  afflicted.  This  is  why  Jesus  never  looked  down  on 
or  shunned  the  sufferers  of  disease.  In  many  of  his  healing  miracles  he  brought 
the  sufferer  of  disease  into  community.  Those  who  are  ill  or  sick  elicit 
compassion  because  they  are  recognized  as  human  beings  by  others  in  the 
community.  Thus,  one  way  to  understand  the  healing  ministry  of  Jesus  is  that 
he  takes  disease  and  removes  the  stigma  associated  with  it,  so  that  the  person 
is  seen  as  one  who  is  ill  or  sick.  The  oppressive  nature  of  the  physical 
condition  of  the  sufferer  is  alleviated,  and  true  healing  can  begin  to  take  place. 

The  most  explicit  example  of  disease  in  the  New  Testament  is  leprosy. 
Jesus’  willingness  to  approach  those  suffering  from  this  dreaded  disease  is 
especially  significant  in  light  of  the  stigma  involved.  Most  biblical  scholars 
agree  that  what  is  called  leprosy  was  not  one  thing  but  a variety  of  symptom- 
atic conditions  associated  with  the  skin.  This  points  to  the  function  of  disease 
in  any  culture.  It  does  not  invite  close  investigation.  It  is  a marker  for  that 
which  we  fear.  (Some  scholars  have  observed  that  AIDS  is  the  name  for  a 
variety  of  symptoms  that  are  observable.)  This  is  the  reason  that  black  people 
have  been  associated  with  dreaded  diseases  since  at  least  the  sixth  century. 
What  African  Americans  find  in  the  miraculous  healing  ministry  of  Jesus  is  a 
way  out  of  the  company  of  the  afflicted  and  into  the  community  of  the 
redeemed. 

The  Bible  provides  resources  for  the  deconstruction  of  the  rhetoric  of 
disease  that  often  attended  the  experience  of  people  of  African  descent.  The 
Bible  does  not  give  a definitive  answer  to  the  question  of  why  disease  afflicts 
some  and  not  others.  Even  Jesus  does  not  attempt  to  explain  the  presence  of 
disease.  He  simply  affirms  that  as  creatures  of  God,  the  sufferers  of  disease  are 
promised  wholeness  and  salvation.  Jesus  brought  hope,  dignity,  and  liberation 
to  the  sick  and  afflicted.  His  ministry  of  healing  is  central  to  a revision  of  our 
understanding  of  the  meaning  of  salvation.  This  brings  us  to  the  final  task  of 
this  lecture,  that  is,  the  articulation  of  a proposal  for  revising  our  theological 
understanding  of  salvation. 


33  John  J.  Pilch  argues  that  the  concept  of  disease  was  foreign  to  the  world  of  Luke-Acts 
and  that  illness  is  a more  appropriate  category  to  juxtapose  to  health  and  wholeness 
(“Sickness  and  Healing  in  Luke-Acts,”  in  The  Social  World  of  Luke-Acts,  ed.  Jerome  H. 
Neyrey  [Peabody:  Hendrickson,  1991],  191). 


HEALTH,  DISEASE,  AND  SALVATION 
V.  Is  There  a Balm  in  Gilead? 


343 


African  American  Christians  have  creatively  used  the  resources  at  hand  to 
articulate  an  understanding  of  salvation  suited  to  their  own  circumstances. 
Those  resources  include  traditional  Western  notions  of  salvation  and  notions 
of  healing  in  African  traditional  religions  and  African  Christianity.  The  blend 
of  these  elements  in  the  unique  context  of  the  experience  of  black  people  in 
the  New  World  has  yielded  new  insights  into  the  nature  of  health  and 
salvation. 

One  of  the  more  perplexing  questions  in  the  history  of  Western  Christian 
thought  concerns  the  rationale  for  the  salvation  of  humanity.  Since  at  least  the 
time  of  Athanasius,  soteriology  has  been  intimately  connected  with  Christol- 
ogy  in  Christian  thought.  That  is,  questions  about  the  salvation  of  humanity7 
are  wound  up  in  questions  about  the  identity  of  Jesus  Christ.  The  various 
older  theories  of  salvation  involved  a commerce  between  Jesus  Christ  and 
God.  It  is  the  mystery  of  this  interaction  that  gives  rise  to,  and  ultimately 
supersedes,  each  theory.  The  ransom  theory,  associated  with  Origen  and 
Gregory  of  Nyssa,  held  that  humanity  had  wandered  away  from  God  and  had 
fallen  into  the  hands  of  the  devil,  who  demanded  a price  for  the  release  of 
humankind.  The  price  demanded  was  the  blood  of  Christ.  The  satisfaction 
theory,  associated  primarily  with  Anselm,  proposed  that  by  sinning,  humanity 
had  dishonored  God.  Only  the  life  of  Jesus  Christ  could  restore  that  honor. 
The  moral  or  exemplarist  theory,  generally  associated  with  Abelard,  held  that 
the  purpose  of  the  life  and  death  of  Christ  was  to  model  the  righteousness  and 
love  inherent  in  humanity.  The  penal  or  judicial  theory,  which  emerged  in  the 
Reformation  period  and  is  associated  with  John  Calvin  and  Hugo  Grotius, 
proposed  that  human  sin  was  a crime  for  which  the  justice  of  God  demanded 
punishment.  In  this  theory,  Christ  accepted  the  guilty  verdict  for  us.  The 
sacrificial  theory,  which  is  consistently  present  in  Western  Christian  thought 
from  the  time  of  Augustine  through  the  Middle  Ages  to  the  Enlightenment, 
asserted  that  the  forgiveness  of  human  sin  required  a blood  sacrifice.  Jesus 
Christ,  the  lamb  without  spot,  was  therefore  slain  for  our  transgressions.  The 
goal  of  the  salvific  act  has  been  described  in  numerous  ways,  as  the  deification 
of  humanity,  the  imputation  of  righteousness  before  God,  union  with  Christ, 
moral  perfection,  authentic  humanity,  and  political  liberation,  among  others. 
They  all  point  to  the  removal  of  the  barriers  between  God  and  humanity  as 
requisite  for  human  wholeness  and  well-being.  Most  modern  notions  of 
salvation  also  point  in  this  direction.  Barth’s  reconciliation,  Bultmann’s 
authentic  existence,  Reinhold  Niebuhr’s  restoration  of  original  justice, 
Tillich’s  participation  in  New  Being,  Rahner’s  self-offering  of  God  to  the 


344 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


world,  Gutierrez’s  liberation  from  class  oppression,  and  Ruether’s  original 
wholeness  of  humanity  as  found  in  Mary  all  imply  the  reconnection  of 
humanity  with  God.  All  of  these  theories  of  salvation,  both  ancient  and 
modern,  focus  on  the  effects  of  sin  upon  the  sinners.  This  is  an  element  of  the 
doctrine  of  salvation  that  has  found  a home  in  African  American  Christian 
thought.  African  American  Christians,  however,  have  asked  more  of  soteriol- 
ogy.  What  does  salvation  mean  to  the  victims  of  sin? 

In  African  traditional  and  African  Christian  thought,  health  is  understood 
as  harmony  and  disease  as  disharmony.  One  African  writer  notes  that  in 
African  traditional  thought,  “Any  sickness  [is]  viewed  not  only  as  a threat  to 
one’s  existence  but  also  as  a destabilisation  of  cosmic  harmony,  as  there  was  no 
real  distinction  made  between  the  natural  and  the  supernatural.”^  In  African 
traditional  as  well  as  African  Christian  thought,  health  and  disease  are 
intimately  associated  with  matters  of  the  spirit.  There  is  an  overriding  belief 
in  the  spiritual  causation  of  illness,  even  while  the  efficacy  of  Western  medical 
innovations  and  practices  is  acknowledged.  The  spirit  is  not  only  involved  in 
the  causation  of  disease,  but,  in  African  Christian  thought,  it  is  also  involved  in 
healing.  The  role  of  the  Holy  Spirit  has  been  central  to  the  self-understanding 
of  many  indigenous  African  churches.  Among  African  Pentecostal  churches 
the  power  of  the  Holy  Spirit  effects  healing  by  defeating  the  spiritual  causes  of 
illness.  This  healing  includes  “not  just  bodily  recuperation,  but  finding 
remedies  for  unemployment,  family  disputes,  racism,  marital  discord,  and 
controversies  between  factions  in  a tribe  or  village. ”35  In  African  traditional 
thought  the  sick  person  is  not  simply  a subdued  recipient  of  medical 
treatment.  In  this  view  “the  sick  person  is  seen  not  as  a passive  ‘patient,’  the 
suffering  object  of  the  active  therapist  or  as  the  determined  occupant  of  a ‘sick 
role,’  but  as  an  agent,  a subject  seeking  health,  engaged  ...  in  a ‘quest  for 
therapy,’  in  problem  solving,  and  manipulating  the  resources  available  in  the 
environment— and,  if  need  be,  changing  that  environment.”^6  On  this  quest 
for  therapy,  the  patient  might  seek  a number  of  treatments,  including  the  use 
of  herbs,  ritual  cleansing,  and  incantations  or  prayers.  In  African  traditional 
thought,  the  concept  of  salvation  as  healing  focuses  on  the  plight  of  the  victim 
of  disease  and  on  the  alleviation  of  the  suffering  that  accompanies  it.  This  is 

34  Andrew  Olu  Igenoza,  “Medicine  and  Healing  in  African  Christianity:  A Biblical 
Critique,”  AFER  30,  no.  1 (February  1988):  15.  It  is  interesting  to  note  how  often  this 
notion  of  health  as  harmony  appears  in  the  medical  lore  of  people  outside  the  Greco- 
Roman  world.  It  suggests  that  the  idea  has  its  roots  deep  within  human  consciousness. 

35  Harvey  Cox,  “I  Iealers  and  Ecologists:  Pentecostalism  in  Africa,”  The  Christian  Century 
hi  (November 9,  1994):  1044. 

36  Peter  Worsley,  “Non-Western  Medical  Systems,”  Annual  Review  of  Anthropology  1 1 
(1982):  325. 


HEALTH , DISEASE,  AND  SALVATION 


345 


often  done  by  attempting  to  placate  the  offended  spirits.  African  American 
Christians,  however,  have  asked  more  of  the  notion  of  healing.  In  what  way 
does  human  healing  reflect  God’s  providential  care,  through  the  power  of  the 
Holy  Spirit,  of  the  entire  created  order? 

James  Lapsley  and  Donald  Bloesch,  among  others,  have  argued,  convinc- 
ingly, that  health  and  salvation,  or  health  and  forgiveness,  are  not  synony- 
mous.3?  Not  everyone  who  enjoys  health  will  be  saved.  Not  everyone  who  is 
saved  will  enjoy  physical  health.  Health  and  salvation  are,  however,  related 
terms.  Within  the  context  of  a rhetoric  of  disease  as  blackness,  both  ideas  need 
to  be  revised. 

Health,  as  symbolized  by  access  to  quality  health  care,  has  become  in  our 
time  a privatized  commodity.  It  has  lost  its  social,  communal,  and  convenantal 
character.  “This  loss  of  shared  public  understandings  of  health  contributes  to 
an  unhealthy  national  and  international  situation  in  which  consumer  expecta- 
tions converge  and  contend  over  costly  resources. ”^8  The  pursuit  of  perfect 
health  has  raised  the  volume  of  discussions  of  health  care  but  has  also  skewed 
its  role  and  importance  in  human  existence.  The  fact  that  health  is  not 
synonymous  with  salvation  or  forgiveness  suggests  that  health,  like  salvation, 
is  a gift.  Health  is  a relative  term;  it  is  not  to  be  thought  of  as  some  ideal 
human  condition.  Health,  while  important,  is  only  one  aspect  of  a life  worth 
living.  A spiritually  balanced  life  seeks  harmony.  A measure  of  good  health  is 
valuable  to  the  degree  that  it  allows  one  to  give  glory  to  God.  This  is  why 
traditional  prayers  in  African  American  Christian  worship  will  often  begin  by 
thanking  God  “for  a reasonable  portion  of  health  and  strength.  Thank  you  for 
letting  me  awake  this  morning  clothed  in  my  right  mind,  with  the  blood 
running  warm  in  my  veins.”  Health  is  a penultimate  good.  Life  in  the 
presence  of  God  is  the  ultimate  good. 

Salvation,  like  health,  is  a gift  from  God.  Too  often,  salvation  becomes  a 
private  affair,  referring  to  the  redemption  of  the  individual  from  guilt,  despair, 
fear,  and  death.  Salvation,  however,  is  social  because  sin  is  social.  The  social 
character  of  sin  is  not  simply  its  manifestations  in  institutions.  Theologians 
like  Walter  Rauschenbusch  highlighted  this  aspect  of  sin  through  the  Social 
Gospel.  Sin  is  social  because  the  sin  of  an  individual  is  not  just  an  offense  to 
God;  it  injures  other  people.  The  social  character  of  salvation  is  not  merely  its 
focus  on  groups.  The  notion  of  salvation  in  the  Hebrew  Bible  emphasizes  this 

37  See  James  N.  Lapsley,  Salvation  and  Health:  The  Interlocking  Processes  of  Life  (Philadelpia: 
Westminster,  197 2),  31-45;  and  Donald  G.  Bloesch,  The  Christian  Life  and  Salvation  (Grand 
Rapids:  Eerdmans,  1967),  33-46. 

38  James  P.  Wind,  “Health,”  in  A New  Handbook  of  Christian  Theology,  ed.  Donald  W. 
Musser  and  Joseph  L.  Price  (Nashville:  Abingdon,  1992),  2 14. 


346 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


aspect  of  redemption.  Salvation  is  social  because  the  redemption  of  the 
victims  of  sin  can  be  the  avenue  through  which  those  whose  sinfulness  wreaks 
havoc  in  the  world  are  also  saved.  This  means  that  our  description  of  salvation 
must  include  those  who  are  wounded  by  sin.  In  African  American  experience, 
salvation  is  not  an  escape  from  the  challenges  of  creaturely  existence. 
Redemption  is  not  exemption.  In  African  American  experience,  racism  is 
recognized  as  a cultural  pathology.  In  spite  of  an  environment  created  by  the 
rhetoric  of  disease  as  blackness,  people  of  African  descent  have  always  known 
that  they  are  the  victims  of  the  pathology  of  racism  and  not  the  carriers  of 
social  disease.  This  knowledge  is  encoded  in  the  cultural  form  of  the  blues. 59 
In  the  blues  the  awareness  of  one’s  status  as  a victim  of  racism  is  the  first  step 
toward  transcending  that  status.  The  diagnosis  of  the  association  of  blackness 
and  disease  is  the  first  step  toward  the  therapeutic  affirmation  that  blackness  is 
healthy. 

Salvation  as  healing  is  a central  concern  in  African  American  Christianity. 
The  ways  in  which  this  salvation  is  experienced  draw  upon  traditions  of 
African  healing  and  Western  soteriology.  Salvation  occurs  through  the 
prayers  of  the  faithful.  It  recalls  the  incantations  used  in  African  healing  and 
the  salvific  power  of  the  Word  in  Reformation  theology.  Prayer  is  essential  to 
salvation  as  health,  because  it  overcomes  the  alienating  affects  of  disease  by 
bringing  the  victims  into  union  with  God.  Salvation  occurs  through  the 
gathered  community  of  faith.  It  recalls  the  ecstatic  presence  of  the  spirit 
experienced  by  the  collective  group  in  African  traditional  healing  rituals  and 
the  patristic  emphasis  on  the  church  as  the  means  of  salvation.  The 
worshiping  community  enables,  sustains,  confirms,  and  shares  in  the  healing 
of  its  members  and  thereby  becomes  the  means  of  salvation.  Salvation  occurs 
through  the  sacraments  or  ordinances  of  the  Lord’s  supper  and  baptism.  It 
recalls  the  ingestion  of  herbal  medicines  and  ritual  bathing  as  healing 
practices  in  African  traditional  religions  and  ancient  Christian  views  on  the 
efficacy  of  bread,  wine,  and  water.  These  ritual  practices  emphasize  the 
participation  of  each  member  of  the  community  in  the  salvific  presence  of 
Christ. 

Salvation  and  health  are  interrelated  in  human  experience.  This  is  because 

There  is  a striking  similarity  between  the  blues  in  African  American  experience,  and 
ban  in  the  experience  of  Koreans.  This  similarity  has  led  to  a view  of  the  nature  of  salvation 
that  is  quite  compatible  with  that  described  here.  Andrew  Sung  Park  observes  that  “in  the 
efforts  to  heal  the  victims  of  their  sins  or  the  sins  of  others,  sinners  can  experience 
salvation.  . . . The  idea  that  sinners  can  achieve  salvation  by  confessing  their  own  sin 
regardless  of  the  welfare  of  their  victims  is  a narcissistic  illusion”  ( The  Wounded  Heart  of  God: 
The  Asian  Concept  of  Han  and  the  Christian  Doctrine  of  Sin  [Nashville:  Abingdon,  1993], 
102-3). 


HEALTH , DISEASE,  AND  SALVATION 


347 


the  notion  of  disease  continues  to  function  as  a symbol  for  that  which  we  do 
not  understand.  The  limits  of  Western  medicine  are  evident  in  “the 
appearance  of  new  strains  of  disease  and  of  disease  carriers  ...  of  diseases 
generated  by  alterations  in  the  environment . . . and  the  inability  of  doctors  to 
deal  with  the  social  sources  of  illness  . . . [and]  the  appearance  even  of  new 
‘diseases  of  affluence.’  ”4°  Healing  will  continue  to  occupy  the  imagination  of 
the  Christian  community  for  reasons  other  than  the  failures  of  modern 
medicine.  Healing  brings  to  the  fore  the  power  of  the  salvation  of  God  and 
serves  evangelistic  purposes.  F.  D.  Bruner  states  that  “nothing  attracts  men 
and  attests  the  Gospel . . . quite  like  the  healing  of  infirmities.  Indeed  healing 
fills  out  the  full  gospel  of  a full  salvation.”41 

In  African  American  worship  references  to  Jesus  as  the  restorer  of  health 
and  wholeness  are  numerous.  “Jesus  is  a doctor  who  has  never  lost  a patient.” 
“Jesus  is  the  one  who  gives  me  all  my  medicine.”  “Jesus  is  the  balm  in  Gilead 
to  heal  the  sin-sick  soul.”  In  a society  where  the  means  to  health  have  become 
a commodity  ruled  by  the  marketplace  and  where  people  of  African  descent 
have  too  often  found  themselves  circumscribed  by  the  rhetoric  of  disease, 
salvation  must  mean  more  than  the  escape  from  the  natural  processes  of  living 
and  dying.  Salvation  must  give  ultimate  meaning  to  life  itself. 


40  Worsley,  “Non-Western  Medical  Systems,”  322. 

4‘  Cited  in  Igenoza,  “Medicine  and  Healing  in  African  Christianity,”  23. 


David  Weadon: 

A Tribute 

(Aug.  8,  1956-Dec.  30,  199 5) 
by  Katharine  Doob  Sakenfeld 


Katharine  Doob  Sakenfeld  is  the  W.  A. 
Eisenberger  Professor  of  Old  Testament 
Literature  and  Exegesis  and  Director  of 
Ph.D.  Studies  at  Princeton  Theological 
Seminary.  She  gave  this  tribute  at  two 
memorial  services  for  David  A.  Weadon, 
the  C.  F.  Seabrook  Director  of  Music  and 
Lecturer  in  Church  Music  at  Princeton 
Seminary.  The  first  service  was  held  in 
Miller  Chapel  on  January  51,  1996 ; the 
second  was  held  in  Princeton  University 
Chapel  on  February  10,  1996. 


IT  IS  an  honor  to  be  able  to  speak  a few  words  of  remembrance  of  my  friend 
and  esteemed  colleague  David  Weadon.  As  I prepared  these  reflections  and 
spoke  with  others  about  David,  I was  struck  afresh  by  the  limited  angle  of 
vision,  the  tininess  of  the  window  that  each  one  of  us  has  into  the  life  of 
another.  I realized,  for  instance,  that  I knew  very,  very  little  about  David’s 
professional  life  beyond  Princeton  Seminary.  Yes,  I knew  of  his  choir  work  in 
New  York,  but  then  there  were  his  benefit  concerts,  his  workshops  for  church 
musicians  all  across  the  country,  his  efforts  to  build  new  bridges  between 
Westminster  Choir  College  and  the  Seminary.  Most  of  us  at  this  service 
probably  knew  David  primarily  through  his  Seminary  work,  but  even  there, 
each  of  us  knows  only  a little  of  the  marvelous  whole  that  was  David.  So  I 
encourage  each  of  you  to  honor  and  cherish  your  own  memories,  beyond  the 
words  spoken  in  this  service. 

For  more  than  a decade,  the  Seminary  chapel  staff  has  known  me  as  a 
faculty  member  who  would  agree  to  lead  chapel  only  if  it  included  the 
opportunity  to  work  with  David  on  a music-centered  service.  Such  services 
gave  me  an  excuse  to  learn  about  some  new  music,  to  debate  the  theology  of 
hymn  texts,  and  to  spend  official  time  with  David.  Always  he  was  forthright 
with  me  the  amateur— improving  and  shaping  ideas,  willing  to  experiment, 
yet  insistent  on  a musically  polished  and  theologically  sound  service.  Last 
summer,  as  I prepared  to  preach  for  the  opening  communion  service,  our 
vacation  schedules  precluded  our  regular  give-and-take  about  the  hymns.  So  I 
chose  them,  only  to  find  on  my  return  that  David  had  changed  them  and  the 
bulletin  was  already  in  press.  I was  steamed,  at  first— my  choices  had  been  so 
right,  but  true  to  form,  David’s  were  better.  He’d  understood  what  was 
needed  better  than  I had  myself. 

A great  musician  like  David  doesn’t  need  a Ph.D.  But  David  set  himself  to 
achieve  that  goal  anyway— to  deepen  his  knowledge  of  the  intersection 


DAVID  WE  A DON 


349 


between  theology  and  sacred  music  in  the  history  of  the  church.  Those  of  you 
who  know  about  Ph.D.  demands,  just  imagine  deciding  to  take  on  such  a 
program  when  you  already  have  more  than  a full-time  professional  job.  My 
responsibilities  for  Ph.D.  studies  here  made  me  one  of  David’s  sounding 
boards  for  survival  during  his  studies  at  Drew.  Oh,  how  he  agonized  over 
those  French  and  German  requirements.  Oh,  how  he  quaked  over  comprehen- 
sive exams.  Oh,  how  he  held  his  breath  to  hear  what  revisions  might  be 
required  on  his  dissertation.  And  oh,  what  parties  there  were  to  celebrate  the 
completion  of  his  degree! 

And  David  did  love  to  give  a good  party.  Labor  Day  picnics,  Christmas 
open  house  in  Freehold  — dozens  of  people  from  all  walks  of  life— very  special 
times. 

David  came  to  Princeton  Seminary  as  a very  young  professional  (only 
twenty-six  years  old)— younger  than  any  faculty,  younger  than  most  any 
administrator  or  staff  support  person,  younger  than  most  of  the  students  at 
that  time.  Right  from  the  start,  his  lively  humor  and  southern  drawl  captured 
my  affection  as  much  as  his  great  musical  talent.  Under  his  inspired  and 
inspiring  leadership  the  choir  program  grew  from  a handful  of  students  to  the 
multiple  choirs  that  now  grace  our  community  and  share  their  gifts  with 
churches  throughout  the  area  and  across  the  world.  He  “grew”  our  music 
program  at  PTS  the  way  the  best  of  our  seminary  graduates  grow  a congrega- 
tion: growing  our  choirs  not  only  in  numbers  but  in  commitment  to  the  task, 
commitment  to  deeper  understanding,  commitment  to  excellence,  commit- 
ment to  sharing  the  good  news  with  others,  commitment  to  Jesus  Christ. 

Yet  as  I think  back,  David  and  I talked  very  little  about  his  magnificent  work 
here.  Our  occasional  conversations  tended  to  be  brief,  but  they  touched  on 
the  deeper  things,  hidden  things,  illness  of  our  relatives,  grieving  over  deaths 
of  our  parents.  Both  sides  of  David’s  usual  exterior  presence,  the  happy-go- 
lucky  and  the  perfection-demanding,  would  suddenly  be  set  aside  as  we 
struggled  to  understand  the  mystery  of  God’s  way  with  the  world. 

In  the  last  months,  as  that  mystery  encompassed  his  own  life  so  directly, 
David  chose  not  to  include  most  of  us.  He  did  not  choose  the  way  many  of  us 
would  have  wanted  him  to  choose.  And  his  choice  in  itself  is  part  of  the 
continuing  mystery  for  us,  as  we  see  through  a glass,  darkly.  But  David  has 
crossed  over  Jordan  and  now  sees  face  to  face  the  God  who  carried  him  from 
the  womb  even  until  the  end.  As  David  has  laid  down  his  burden  and  joined 
the  celestial  musicians— Bach  and  Brahms  and  Clarence  Dickinson  (the 
subject  of  David’s  dissertation  research)  and  Eric  Routley  (David’s  teacher  at 
Westminster  Choir  College),  and  even  my  father,  a part-time  amateur 


35° 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


organist  to  whom  David  was  very  kind  — so  let  us  here  on  earth  lay  down  our 
burden  of  frustration  over  being  separated  from  David  even  before  his  death. 
Let  us  be  grateful  for  the  love  and  care  extended  to  David  on  our  behalf  by  the 
chapel  staff,  namely,  Michael  Livingston  and  Carol  Belles.  Most  especially,  let 
us  be  thankful  for  the  care  and  steadfast  love  shown  to  David  by  his  beloved 
companion,  David  MacPeek. 

We  cannot  by  an  act  of  will  turn  off  our  pain  and  sorrow.  Nonetheless,  let 
us  do  what  David  Weadon,  a man  of  great  faith,  would  wish  us  to  do:  Let  us 
join  our  earthly  voices  with  those  heavenly  voices,  celebrating  David’s  pres- 
ence among  them  as  we  sing  praise  to  God,  who  promises  resurrection  to 
eternal  life  through  our  Savior  Jesus  Christ. 


Remembering  David 

by  Michael  E.  Livingston 


Michael  E.  Livingston,  Campus  Pastor 
and  Director  of  the  Chapel  at  Princeton 
Theological  Seminary,  offered  these  re- 
marks at  the  Seminary's  memorial  service 
for  David  A.  Weadon  on  January  31, 
1996. 


DAVID  AND  I interviewed  Carol  Belles  separately  before  she  was  hired  as 
Chapel  Secretary.  At  the  end  of  her  interview  with  David,  he  asked  if  she 
had  any  questions  of  him.  “If  you  hire  me  and  I accept,  what  is  it  that  I might 
do  that  would  drive  you  over  the  edge?”  He  thought  about  it  and  then  said, 
“What  you  need  to  know  about  me  is  that  I am  a church  musician.  Tempera- 
mental, sensitive,  a prima  donna.”  Only  one  of  those  things  was  true.  David 
Weadon  was  a church  musician.  He  wasn’t  simply  a gifted  organist  who  found 
employment  in  about  the  only  setting  an  organist  can  play  any  more,  the 
church;  he  wasn’t  a church  musician  because  he  was  not  skilled  enough  for  a 
teaching  post  in  a secular  academic  setting.  David  wasn’t  a choral  director 
who  settled  for  church  work  because  the  hormones  in  a junior  high  school 
choir  would  have  driven  him  batty. 

David  was  a believer,  a Christian  of  deep  commitment  who  would  have 
claimed  a pew  in  the  church  even  if  he  could  not  have  told  the  difference 
between  a Bach  Cantata  and  a Sandy  Patty  gospel  song.  David  found  a 
profound  joy  in  the  just  and  saving  message  of  the  gospel.  God  gave  David  the 
gift  of  faith  and  called  him  to  that  organ  bench,  to  a ministry  of  music. 

This  could  get  too  clinical  and  professional  — “church  and  seminary  com- 
munity loses  gifted  church  music  professional”;  as  true  as  that  may  be,  it  is 
partial.  Daniel  Beckwith,  a conductor  at  the  Metropolitan  Opera  in  New 
York,  told  me  that  David  could  “pick  up  a stone  and  teach  it  to  sing  a 
descant.”  That’s  the  man  we  are  celebrating! 

David  was  a great  guy;  a bright,  gifted,  funny,  lovely  person.  For  all  his 
Manhattan  sophistication,  he  was  refreshingly  down  to  earth.  Sure,  he  would 
treat  his  student  assistants  to  lunch  at  the  Peacock  Inn,  but  if  you  wanted  to 
find  David  during  the  lunch  hour  on  most  days  you  had  to  go  to  Harry’s 
Luncheonette  on  Witherspoon  Street,  where  he’d  be  devouring  a greasy 
cheeseburger.  Do  you  know,  as  I do,  what  a delicious  pleasure  it  was  to  be  in 
his  good  company? 

“Michael  honey,  that’s  enough.”  We  were  in  his  hospital  room  and  I was 
trying,  too  diligently,  to  get  him  to  finish  a cup  of  water.  Enough,  “that’s 
enough.”  David  had  had  enough  of  the  fight,  the  struggle  he  waged  for  life. 
He  fought  longer  than  any  of  us  knew,  and  he  fought  on  his  terms.  Much  to 


352 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


our  regret,  our  sorrow,  perhaps  even  our  anger,  he  chose  to  struggle  without 
inviting  our  love  and  support  in  the  ways  we  would  have  wished  to  give  it. 

Had  we  known,  we  would  have  called  to  talk  with  him,  prayed  with  him, 
visited  with  him— we  would  have  lovingly  invaded  his  life  for  his  sake  and  for 
ours.  He  did  not  ask  this  of  us.  Instead,  he  asked  us,  begged  us,  to  let  him 
work;  to  let  him  play  and  conduct.  David  had  a desire  for  normalcy,  which  was 
disconcerting,  unfathomable  to  us  — but  there  was  no  denial,  rather  an 
urgency  wed  to  a commitment  to  task.  I asked  him  once,  in  the  hospital,  why 
he  insisted  on  continuing  when  it  was  so  clear  he  was  seriously  ill.  “I  had  to  get 
the  work  done,  I had  too  much  to  do,”  he  said. 

David  came  to  the  Seminary  chapel  day  after  day,  of  course,  with  less 
frequency  toward  the  end.  He  kept  teaching  his  courses  and  rehearsing  the 
choirs  and  traveling  with  the  touring  choir.  He  kept  this  up  for  longer  than  he 
was  able  to  be  effective.  Left  alone,  David  would  never  have  stopped;  he 
would  have  died  sitting  on  the  organ  bench  or  traveling  with  the  touring 
choir. 

When  we  insisted  that  he  rest,  finally,  he  did  just  that.  In  the  company  and 
care  of  his  dear  companion,  David  MacPeek,  he  laid  down  until  he  died. 

Many  of  the  tensions,  paradoxes,  pathologies  in  our  church  and  society 
were  enmeshed  in  the  tortured  silence,  the  whispered  painful  conversations, 
the  fear  and  grief— present  and  anticipated  — that  were  part  of  our  experience 
with  David  these  last  months.  He  would  have  abhored  being  made  an  object 
lesson,  and  that  is  not  my  intent,  but  God  help  us  if  we  do  not  mine  what 
treasures  of  truth  and  grace,  justice  and  love  are  buried  in  our  hearts  by  his 
graceful  presence  and  his  grand  work  in  our  community. 

I will  miss  watching  him  direct  the  choir.  For  our  annual  Service  of  Lessons 
and  Carols  at  the  Seminary,  I sat  at  the  lectern  and  watched  from  the  side,  just 
a few  feet  away,  as  he  passionately  led  our  gifted  singers  through  hauntingly 
beautiful  music.  His  face,  hands,  arms  were  alive  with  speech  as  he  talked  with 
the  choir  by  baton,  facial  nuance,  subtle  gesture.  With  his  direction  the  choir 
could  shake  the  chandeliers  or  sing  in  sustained  whispers  of  thrilling  intensity. 

With  his  death  we  must  be  content  with  our  memories  of  him.  We  must 
find  some  comfort  in  his  release  from  the  agony  of  awful  disease. 

David  died  too  young  and  too  soon.  I pray  you  share  my  confidence  in  the 
new  life  David  has  found  in  the  promises  of  God.  And  I pray  you  trust  that  the 
God  who  welcomes  David  will  not  leave  us  alone.  May  God’s  grace  and  peace 
surround  us  all. 


BOOK  REVIEWS 


Seow,  Choon-Leong,  ed.  Homosexuality  and  Christian  Community.  Louisville: 
Westminster  John  Knox  Press,  1996.  Pp.  xiii  + 159.  $14.99. 

As  Nancy  J.  Duff  writes  near  the  conclusion  of  her  contribution  to 
Homosexuality  and  Christian  Community , “the  real  dilemma  resides  in  the 
question  of  whether  we  can  live  together  as  members  of  the  one  Body  of  Christ 
even  when  divided  by  an  issue  on  which  both  sides  know  with  such  certainty 
that  they  are  right.”  While  not  resolving  the  dilemma,  Homosexuality  and 
Christian  Community  certainly  addresses  this  challenge  and  provides  resources 
for  those  willing  to  struggle  with  it  for  the  sake  of  Christian  community. 

Choon-Leong  Seow,  editor  and  contributor,  has  done  an  excellent  job  of 
bringing  together  thirteen  quite  varied  essays,  written  by  his  faculty  col- 
leagues at  Princeton  Theological  Seminary.  Seow  provides  a helpful  introduc- 
tion, setting  the  context  for  the  essays  and  summarizing  each.  Vigorous 
discussion  has  gone  on  at  Princeton  during  the  three-year  period  mandated 
by  the  1993  General  Assembly  of  the  Presbyterian  Church  (U.S.A.)  for  a 
study  of  homosexuality.  Seow  and  his  colleagues  offer  the  wider  church  the 
opportunity  to  reflect  with  them  on  the  multitude  of  concerns  involved  in 
consideration  of  this  issue  and  its  impact  on  Christian  community. 

Besides  the  two  contributors  already  mentioned,  Nancy  J.  Duff,  theological 
ethics,  and  Choon-Leong  Seow,  Old  Testament,  the  other  eleven  participants 
in  the  project  include:  A.K.M.  Adam,  New  Testament;  Charles  L.  Bartow, 
communication;  Brian  K.  Blount,  New  Testament;  Thomas  W.  Gillespie, 
New  Testament;  James  F.  Kay,  homiletics;  Thomas  G.  Long,  homiletics; 
Mark  McClain-Taylor,  theology  and  culture;  Ulrich  W.  Mauser,  biblical 
theology;  Patrick  D.  Miller,  Old  Testament;  Max  L.  Stackhouse,  ethics;  and 
Richard  E.  Whitaker,  Old  Testament.  All  write  clearly,  having  in  mind  a 
broad  audience  of  church  members,  students,  and  pastors,  as  well  as  special- 
ists. 

Among  the  contributors  there  is  a great  variety  of  positions.  They  are 
arranged  into  three  sections:  part  1:  “What  Do  the  Scriptures  Say?”  part  2: 
“How  Do  the  Scriptures  Inform  Our  Theological  Reflection?”  and  part  3: 
“How  Do  We  Live  Faithfully?”  Some  are  certain  the  Bible  and  confessional 
tradition  call  the  church  to  acceptance  of  homosexuals  into  every  phase  of 
institutional  church  life.  Others  are  equally  convinced  that  the  tradition 
precludes  such  participation  on  the  part  of  gays  and  lesbians.  Whether 
same-sex  relationships  should  be  recognized  and  blessed  is  likewise  debated. 


354 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


Biblical  texts,  confessional  statements,  pastoral  issues,  and  personal  experi- 
ences are  examined.  Some  may  say  that  there  are  no  new  arguments  presented 
in  these  essays,  but  there  is  a clarity,  freshness,  and  conciseness  that  many  will 
find  most  helpful. 

Furthermore,  there  is  a “tone,”  a “quality,  a “spirit”  about  these  essays  that 
is  refreshing  and  instructive.  While  the  writers  know  they  differ  (dramatically 
at  times)  with  each  other  in  their  conclusions  and  suggestions,  they  also 
recognize  they  belong  to  a larger  company.  There  is  conviction  and  humility, 
critical  argument  and  a recognition  of  remaining  unanswered  (unanswer- 
able?) questions.  An  example  is  offered  of  how  to  struggle  with  one  another 
around  a difficult  issue  where  agreement  is  unlikely  if  not  impossible.  All  who 
read  this  volume  will  gain  from  the  respectful,  clear,  passionate  arguments 
presented  with  the  aim  of  strengthening,  not  destroying,  the  church.  It  is 
possible  for  sincere,  faithful  Christians  to  disagree  and  yet  continue  to  love 
one  another  and  work  for  the  common  good. 

Near  the  conclusion  of  the  introduction,  Seow  summarizes  the  character  of 
the  volume  well  and  underscores  its  importance  for  those  concerned  with  life 
in  the  church.  He  writes:  “Clearly,  the  contributors  to  this  volume  are  not  of 
one  mind  on  the  issue  of  homosexuality.  Like  our  forebears  in  biblical  times, 
we  find  ourselves  in  substantial  disagreement.  At  stake  for  us  all  is  the  gospel: 
How  are  we  to  understand  our  obligation  as  a people  of  faith?  We  struggle  to 
balance  two  biblical  portrayals  of  God:  a God  whose  name  is  Jealous  and  a 
God  whose  name  is  Compassionate.  There  are  risks  that  we  may  err  by 
overemphasizing  one  or  the  other  divine  reality.  Yet  it  is  imperative  that  the 
church  live  with  this  risk  and  decide  what  it  means  to  be  faithful  to  the  gospel 
in  our  day  and  age.” 

W.  Eugene  March 
Louisville  Presbyterian  Theological  Seminary 


McCormack,  Bruce  L.  Karl  Barth's  Critically  Realistic  Dialectical  Theology:  Its 
Genesis  and  Development,  1909-1936.  Oxford:  Clarendon  Press,  1995.  Pp.  xx  + 
499.  $65.00. 

In  this  expanded  version  of  his  Princeton  Seminary  dissertation  (1989), 
McCormack,  now  a member  of  the  Seminary’s  faculty,  has  surely  provided  a 
benchmark  for  any  future  discussion  of  Barth’s  theological  development. 
Making  good  use  of  materials  newly  available  in  the  Gesamtausgabe,  and  in 
continuous  dialogue  with  other  Barth  specialists  in  Germany  and  America,  he 
has  challenged  the  dominant  view  that  Barth’s  progress  was  marked  by  two 


BOOK  REVIEWS 


355 


decisive  turning  points:  from  Protestant  liberalism  to  dialectical  theology  and 
from  dialectic  to  analogy.  Against  this  reading  of  the  story,  associated  with  the 
name  of  Hans  Urs  von  Balthasar,  McCormack  states  his  thesis:  “Subsequent 
to  his  break  with  ‘liberalism’  in  1915,  Barth  became  what  we  shall  call  a 
critically  realistic  dialectical  theologian  — and  that  is  what  he  remained  through- 
out his  life”  (p.  vii).  No  second  turning  point  ever  happened. 

The  importance  of  this  formidable,  richly  documented  study  goes  far 
beyond  the  cogency  of  the  thesis,  which  I must  leave  for  the  Barth  experts  to 
assess.  (The  firmness  with  which  McCormack  puts  down  their  mistakes 
guarantees  that  some  of  them  will  respond  energetically  on  other  disputed 
questions  as  well.)  I have  been  asked  to  comment  on  the  author’s  placement  of 
Barth  in  the  history  of  Protestant  theology,  especially  in  view  of  his  insistence 
that  however  critical  Barth  may  have  been  of  modern  theology,  his  own 
dialectical  theology  was  a “thoroughly  modeni  option”  (p.  466).  I have  space 
only  to  raise  three  questions. 

First,  would  not  a thoroughly  modem  “theological  epistemology”  (as  McCor- 
mack calls  it)  use  Kant  to  challenge  revelation  claims  rather  than  to  insulate 
them  against  philosophical  criticism?  Barth  cheerfully  appropriated  Kant’s 
critical  philosophy  insofar  as  it  blocked  the  old  theistic  arguments  from  the 
empirical  world  to  its  putative  source  or  ground  in  a first  principle  (God).  But 
to  move  from  there  to  the  announcement  that  God  has  revealed  Godself  does 
not  look  like  progress  in  the  project  of  modernity.  It  is  a bit  Pickwickian  even 
to  speak  of  a “theological  epistemology”  here  at  all.  The  move  is  reminiscent 
rather  of  the  misuse  of  Kant  by  his  contemporary  Gottlob  Christian  Storr, 
who  appealed  to  Kant  only  to  clear  the  way  for  some  very  old-fashioned 
revelation  claims  of  the  sort  Kant  judged  even  more  suspect  than  metaphysical 
arguments  for  God.  Right  or  wrong,  Barth’s  project,  like  Storr’s,  was  at  most 
only  half  modem. 

From  the  perspective  of  Barth’s  place  in  modem  theology,  one  of  the  most 
valuable  features  of  McCormack’s  study  is  the  care  with  which  he  portrays 
Barth’s  relation  to  his  teacher  Wilhelm  Herrmann.  Barth  carried  some  things 
over  from  this  “great  nineteenth-century  liberal  theologian,”  and  yet  it  was 
Herrmann’s  variety  of  liberalism  that  he  rebelled  against.  But— my  second 
question  — is  not  the  price  paid  for  this  important  contribution  a surprising 
curtailment  of  the  much  more  urgent  question  of  Barth’s  relation  to  Schleier- 
macher?  When  it  comes  right  down  to  it,  it  is  as  unhelpful  to  call  Schleierma- 
cher  “liberal”  as  to  call  Barth  “neoorthodox.”  And  it  was,  after  all,  on 
Schleiermacher  that  Barth  trained  the  muzzle  of  his  gun  (as  he  put  it)  in  1921. 
If  there  was  in  truth  only  one  break  in  Barth’s  theological  progress,  the  “break 


356 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


with  liberalism,”  then  it  becomes  all  the  more  critical  to  determine  its  precise 
nature.  McCormack  would  agree,  I think,  that  this  calls  for  more  detailed 
tracking  of  Barth’s  thoughts  on  Schleiermacher  than  could  be  offered  even  in 
this  marvelously  rich  volume.  And  if  the  question  is  about  Barth’s  place  in  the 
history  of  theology,  not  simply  his  own  development  as  he  himself  saw  it,  then 
the  truth  or  falsity  of  his  interpretations  of  Schleiermacher  must  also  be  held 
up  for  scrutiny. 

Finally,  the  question  of  Barth’s  place  in  the  theology  of  the  last  two 
hundred  years  is  not  unrelated  to  the  continuing  debate  about  the  legacy  of 
the  Reformation.  By  1922,  Barth  was  claiming  an  affinity  between  his 
theology  and  Luther’s  theologia  cruris,  and  he  traced  an  ancestral  line  that  ran 
back  through  Kierkegaard  and  the  Protestant  Reformers  (but  not  through 
Schleiermacher!)  to  Paul  and  Jeremiah.  But  he  later  testified  that  the  Luther 
renaissance  associated  with  Karl  Holl  did  not  impress  him  favorably,  and  that 
in  1919-20  the  Reformers  still  did  not  evoke  much  of  a response  from  him. 
The  truth  appears  to  be,  as  Barth  himself  said,  that  a new  interest  in  the 
Reformation  was  not  the  source,  but  a consequence,  of  his  efforts.  Still,  the 
question  of  material  continuity  remains— all  the  more  so  because  Barth  knew 
perfectly  well  what  some  of  us  seem  to  have  forgotten:  that  the  liberals,  too, 
claimed  to  be  Luther’s  offspring.  Barth  took  their  claim  seriously  enough  to 
warn  that  anyone  who  aimed  a blow  at  Bultmann,  for  instance,  should  take 
care  not  to  hit  Luther;  and  he  conceded  that  Herrmann  represented  an 
authentic,  if  narrow,  continuation  of  the  Lutheran  tradition.  It  is  by  no  means 
self-evident  who  the  legitimate  heirs  of  the  Reformation  are  — the  liberals  or 
the  critically  realistic  dialectical  theologians.  My  third  question,  then,  quite 
simply,  is  whether  McCormack  should  tell  us  more  than  he  does  about  Barth’s 
ancestral  line  through  the  Reformers.  Perhaps  he  will,  when  he  turns  to  the 
second  part  of  his  project:  a study  of  Barth’s  Gottingen  lectures  on  dogmatics 
(1924-25).  I,  for  one,  look  forward  to  its  completion.  It  will  no  doubt  be  as 
learned,  instructive,  and  provocative  as  part  one. 

B.  A.  Gerrish 

Union  Theological  Seminary  in  Virginia 


Olson,  Dennis  T.  Numbers.  Louisville:  John  Knox  Press,  1996.  Pp.  196. 
$22.00. 

In  his  doctoral  dissertation  written  for  Brevard  Childs  at  Yale  University, 
Dennis  Olson  proposed  that  Numbers  was  structured  around  two  census  lists 


BOOK  REVIEWS 


357 


in  Numbers  i and  26.  Numbers  1 is  a census  of  the  first  generation  of 
Israelites  to  leave  Egypt.  They  die  in  the  wilderness  as  a result  of  their  fear  to 
follow  God  into  the  promised  land  of  Canaan.  Numbers  26  is  a census  of  the 
second  generation,  who  survive  the  wilderness  march  and  are  on  the  verge  of 
claiming  the  promised  land  of  Canaan.  The  thematic  development  of  this 
repetition  was  captured  in  the  title  of  Olson’s  published  dissertation,  The 
Death  of  the  Old  and  the  Birth  of  the  New:  The  Framework  of  the  Book  of  Numbers 
and  the  Pentateuch  (1985).  Other  commentators  also  saw  this  repetition,  but 
they  tended  to  structure  Numbers  around  Israel’s  journey  toward  Canaan 
rather  than  the  transition  between  generations.  Dennis  Olson’s  contribution 
was  to  focus  firmly  on  character  development  (the  two  generations)  as 
opposed  to  setting  (the  journey  through  the  wilderness)  in  determining  the 
central  theme  of  Numbers. 

This  commentary  provides  Olson  the  opportunity  for  a more  thorough 
interpretation  of  character  development  in  Numbers  between  the  first  and 
second  generation  of  Israelites  who  left  Egypt.  And,  indeed,  this  is  the 
strength  of  the  commentary.  A primary  goal  of  the  commentary  is  to  explore 
how  faith  is  transferred  from  one  generation  to  another.  The  census  of  the 
first  generation  introduces  a story  of  rebellion  and  death  in  Numbers  1-25. 
The  census  of  the  second  generation,  by  contrast,  introduces  a story  of  hope 
and  life  in  Numbers  26-36.  Within  this  framework,  Olson  looks  for  other 
repetitions  that  serve  as  points  of  comparison.  Examples  include  the  census  of 
Levites  (Numbers  3 and  26),  laws  involving  women  (Numbers  5 and  27),  as 
well  as  narratives  like  the  spy  story  (Numbers  13-14  and  32:6-15).  Olson  uses 
these  repetitions  to  explore  character  development  between  the  two  genera- 
tions. Thus,  for  example,  the  rebellion  of  the  first  generation  in  refusing  to 
enter  Canaan  (Numbers  13-14)  contrasts  with  the  negotiated  settlement  of 
Reuben  and  Gad,  who  also  initially  refuse  to  enter  Canaan  (Numbers  32). 
Differences  within  the  repetition  contain  a message:  “The  final  lesson  in 
[Numbers  32]  is  not  judgment  but  promise  and  encouragement.  Rather  than 
rebel  against  Moses  and  the  old  tradition,  Reuben  and  Gad  take  Moses’  words 
to  heart  and  propose  a compromise”  (p.  182). 

In  addition  to  the  emphasis  on  character  development,  Olson  keeps  his  eye 
on  larger  structural  developments  in  the  Pentateuch  that  influence  interpreta- 
tion of  Numbers.  Parallels  to  the  exodus  in  the  wilderness  stories  of  Numbers 
11-20  and  in  the  quotation  of  confessional  material  like  Numbers  14:18  are 
two  examples  of  how  earlier  passages  in  the  Pentateuch  inform  one’s  interpre- 
tation of  Numbers.  Olson  also  explains  literature  that  has  become  obscure  to 


358 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


modern  readers.  Much  of  Numbers  is  written  by  priestly  theologians,  who 
construct  their  theology  around  the  purity  laws  issuing  from  the  presence  of  a 
holy  God  in  the  midst  of  Israel.  Such  purity  laws  are  essential  for  understand- 
ing Christian  sacramental  theology,  yet  they  are  all  too  often  neglected  in  the 
contemporary  church.  Olson  provides  a helpful  introduction  to  “Purity  in  the 
Bible”  and  illustrates  how  purity  law  provides  an  important  hermeneutic  for 
interpreting  priestly  tradition. 

No  commentary  can  explore  all  the  dimensions  of  a rich  biblical  book  like 
Numbers.  With  that  in  mind,  two  reservations  linger  after  reading  through 
this  commentary.  The  first  is  that  the  contrast  of  rebellion  and  obedience  or 
death  and  life  between  the  two  generations  is  too  rigid.  Certainly,  this 
contrast  is  firmly  anchored  in  Numbers,  but  there  is  far  more  to  Numbers 
1-25  than  illustrations  of  rebellion.  These  chapters  are  replete  with  positive 
stories  of  healthy  community  organized  around  a holy  God  (chapters  1-10) 
and  ideal  models  of  leadership  in  the  wilderness  march  of  the  first  generation 
(chapters  1 1-25).  Many  of  these  stories  have  no  parallel  in  literature  surround- 
ing the  second  generation  of  Israel  (chapters  26-36). 

The  second  reservation  is  that  the  focus  on  two  generations  as  the  organiz- 
ing device  for  Numbers  is  too  narrow.  It  gives  the  impression  that  salvation  is 
only  about  character  or  community  development  rather  than  God’s  quest  to 
reclaim  creation  itself.  Character  development  between  the  generations  is 
important  to  the  book  of  Numbers.  In  fact,  the  birth  of  the  second  generation 
in  the  wilderness  carries  forward  one  of  the  central  organizing  themes  in  the 
Pentateuch,  namely  the  promise  of  descendants  to  the  ancestors  (see  Gen. 
12:1-4).  But  the  Pentateuch  is  also  organized  around  the  theme  of  land, 
beginning  with  the  divine  promise  to  the  ancestors  in  Genesis  12:7.  And  the 
theme  of  land  anchors  Numbers  more  broadly  in  a theology  of  creation, 
which  is  also  essential  to  the  Pentateuch.  Numbers  is  about  both  community 
and  creation.  In  fact,  by  incorporating  more  clearly  the  promise  of  land,  it 
may  be  possible  to  avoid  a too  rigid  contrast  between  the  first  and  second 
generation  in  Numbers,  since  neither  generation  actually  inherits  the  land. 

There  is  much  in  Numbers  that  can  speak  to  contemporary  Christians.  As 
Olson  notes  in  his  introduction,  the  wilderness  has  reemerged  as  a powerful 
symbol  of  contemporary  religious  experience.  His  commentary  provides  an 
excellent  map  for  preaching,  teaching,  and  studying  Numbers. 

Thomas  B.  Dozeman 
United  Theological  Seminary 


BOOK  REVIEWS 


359 


Adam,  A.  K.  M.  Making  Sense  of  New  Testament  Theology:  “ Modern ” Problems 
and  Prospects.  Macon:  Mercer  University  Press,  1995.  Pp.  x + 238.  $18.00. 

A.  K.  M.  Adam,  Assistant  Professor  of  New  Testament  at  Princeton 
Theological  Seminary,  propounds  in  this  book  a simple  but  provocative 
thesis:  since  the  operating  principles  that  govern  the  production  of  New 
Testament  theologies  are  neither  transcendent  nor  necessary,  the  way  is  open 
for  the  formulation  of  nonmodern  New  Testament  theologies. 

These  operating  principles  are  familiar  to  those  of  us  trained  in  the 
historical-critical  approach  to  the  biblical  text  whether  in  seminary  or  else- 
where, even  if  we’ve  never  thought  about  them.  They  are:  the  Renaissance 
humanists’  claim  to  stand  over  against  the  Classical  tradition;  the  compulsory 
power  that  time  exercises  over  modern  consciousness;  the  pivotal  importance 
of  disciplinary  autonomy  and  specialization;  and  the  distinction  in  kind 
between  an  expert’s  knowledge  of  a subject  and  a commoner’s  knowledge. 
Their  perceived  hegemony  derives  not  from  insights  into  the  nature  of 
interpretation  but  from  the  cultural  situation  of  modernity.  This  condition 
Adam  proceeds  to  analyze  in  detail  in  the  opening  chapters  of  the  book. 

After  a composite  sketch  of  modernity,  the  work  of  three  influential  New 
Testament  scholars,  Johann  Philipp  Gabler,  William  Wrede,  and  Krister 
Stendahl,  is  shown  to  presuppose  modernity.  Adam  thus  constructs  the 
IVredestrasse,  the  path  of  modern  New  Testament  theology.  He  then  chal- 
lenges the  exclusive  legitimacy  of  this  highway.  Other  criteria  for  evaluating 
New  Testament  theology  than  the  strictly  historical  exist.  Theological, 
ecclesial,  aesthetic,  and  ethical  gauges,  in  addition  to  local  criteria  such  as 
defending  biblical  inerrancy  or  the  liberation  of  women  from  structures  of 
oppression,  are  some  of  them. 

The  last  chapter,  “Prospects  for  Nonmodern  New  Testament  Theology,” 
examines  whether  any  other  sort  of  New  Testament  theology  is  legitimate. 
The  answer  is  “Yes,  for  those  interpreters  who  do  not  grant  primary  alle- 
giance to  the  imperatives  of  modernity.”  If,  for  example,  Elisabeth  Schiissler 
Fiorenza  is  certain  that  gender  equality  is  the  basis  of  any  sound  relation 
between  Christians  and  their  Bible,  then  she  may  rightly  reject  modern 
readings  that  limit  the  theme  of  sexual  equality  to  the  margins  of  the  Bible. 
Charges  of  anachronistic  tendentiousness  do  not  show  the  necessity  of 
modern  New  Testament  theology  since  there  are  no  transcendent  criteria  for 
interpretation  but  only  local  customs  and  guild  rules.  Such  charges  merely 
demonstrate  imperialistic  xenophobia. 


360 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


Thus,  historical  gauges  provide  only  one  among  many  approaches  to 
judging  a New  Testament  theology.  However,  Adam  does  not  propose  to 
jettison  historical  judgment  but  merely  to  describe  its  contingencies.  His  book 
paves  the  way  for  recognizing  and  legitimizing  alternatives.  If  he  spends  more 
time  in  creating  a clearing  within  the  forest  than  actually  exploring  the  paths 
that  already  exist  alongside  the  Wredestrasse,  that  is  perhaps  the  consequence 
of  where  he  himself  stands  today.  For  some  of  us,  this  book  may  be  a very 
helpful  exercise  in  epistemology.  For  others,  it  may  serve  as  a reminder  of  how 
far  we  have  come. 

Deirdre  Good 
General  Theological  Seminary 


Plantinga,  Cornelius,  Jr.  Not  the  Way  It's  Supposed  to  Be:  A Breviary  of  Sin. 
Grand  Rapids:  Wm.  B.  Eerdmans  Publishing  Co.;  Leicester,  England:  Apol- 
los,  1995.  Pp.  xiv  + 202.  $19.99. 

“Theologically  astute”  and  “entertaining”  are  adjectives  not  usually  con- 
joined. But  Cornelius  Plantinga’s  treatment  of  the  nature  and  dynamics  of  sin 
summons  both.  Combining  his  gifts  as  a professor  of  systematic  theology  (at 
Calvin  Theological  Seminary),  Reformed  minister,  and  discerning  observer 
of  contemporary  culture,  Plantinga  brings  to  life  this  neglected,  suppressed, 
unstylish  doctrine. 

Plantinga  initially  defines  human  sin  in  relationship  to  God:  God’s  shalom 
is  the  blessed  harmony  and  flourishing  intended  for  creation;  sin  is  “blamable 
human  vandalism  of  these  great  realities  and  therefore  an  affront  to  their 
architect  and  builder”  (p.  16).  With  captivating  illustrations  throughout,  he 
sharpens  this  definition  by  comparing  sin  with  its  relatives  (crime,  immorality, 
disease,  error)  and  by  making  distinctions  within  the  conception  of  sin 
(objective  and  subjective,  “wrongness”  and  “badness,”  voluntary  and  involun- 
tary). Engaging  the  reader  with  examples  from  literature  and  life,  Plantinga 
unfolds  sin’s  corruption  of  goodness,  the  spread  of  that  corruption,  and  the 
“spiritual  hygiene”  that  opposes  its  “perversion,  pollution,  and  disintegra- 
tion.” In  his  consideration  of  the  parasitic  and  deceptive  natures  of  sin, 
Plantinga  gives  full  voice  to  the  complex  intertwining  of  good  and  evil,  to  the 
ambiguities,  hybrids,  and  tragic  ironies  of  sin.  With  creative  precision, 
Plantinga  portrays  sin’s  affinity  with  folly  and  opposition  to  wisdom.  The 
chapter  on  the  relationship  of  sin  and  addiction  uncovers  complex  interac- 
tions, though  the  ways  in  which  addiction  is  distinct  from  or  similar  to  other 


BOOK  REVIEWS 


361 


encounters  with  sin  is  not  always  clear.  The  book  concludes  with  two 
characteristic  “postures”  or  movements  of  sin:  attack  and  flight.  The  epilogue 
reminds  us  that  sin  is  part  of  a larger  story,  defining  and  being  defined  by 
God’s  grace. 

Plantinga’s  goal  is  not  to  break  new  ground;  someone  desiring  theological 
reflections  on  genetic  discoveries  or  the  latest  sociological/psychological 
theories  and  their  relationships  with  traditional  doctrines  of  sin  must  look 
elsewhere.  Nor  is  Plantinga  proposing  solutions  for  the  social  and  intellectual 
forces  that  have  challenged  the  centrality  of  sin.  Rather,  Plantinga’s  work  is  a 
powerful  restatement  of  this  Christian  doctrine,  persuasive  in  his  vibrant 
illustrations  and  penetrating  analyses.  The  result  is  a coherent,  substantive 
theological  treatise  with  a wealth  of  homiletical  insights  and  real-life  connec- 
tions. 

Acknowledging  the  limited  purposes  of  his  exposition,  the  reader  may  still 
desire  elaboration  of  certain  positions.  What  is  the  relationship  between 
corporate  and  individual  sin?  Plantinga  elucidates  a personal,  individualistic 
understanding  of  sin.  Although  sin  is  related  to  wider  social-cultural  realities 
in  its  transmission  and  its  effects  and  in  discussions  of  culpability,  it  is  not  at  all 
clear  that  one  can  speak  of  sin  itself  as  a social  reality.  Plantinga’s  brief 
references  to  original  sin  come  closest  to  exploring  this  corporate  dimension, 
but  it  is  not  clear  how  the  elaboration  of  a corporate  nature  of  sin  would 
cohere  with  his  individualistic  framework.  This  is  particularly  pertinent  given 
Plantinga’s  apt  conjunction  of  sin  and  redemption.  Does  corporate  sin 
correspond  with  corporate  atonement? 

Such  questions  internal  to  Christianity  raise  a further  issue  concerning 
Plantinga’s  intended  audience.  Plantinga  rightly  acknowledges  the  way  in 
which  his  presentation  of  sin  is  shaped  by  a Christian  framework,  yet  he 
nevertheless  hopes  to  address  adherents  of  other  religions  and  secularists,  as 
well  as  Christians.  Yet  it  is  not  at  all  certain  that  those  rejecting  his  Christian 
context  and  presuppositions  will  find  central  affirmations  of  the  book  entirely 
comprehensible.  Our  pluralistic  world  is  able  to  offer  alternative  conceptions 
of  “the  way  things  ought  to  be,”  the  nature  of  the  present  disparity,  and  the 
proposed  remedy.  I will  leave  this  question  to  secularists  and  members  of 
other  religions;  this  book  clearly  deserves  their  attention.  As  a Christian,  I 
highly  recommend  it  to  pastors  and  laity  alike. 

Stephen  L.  Stell 
Austin  College 


3<52 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


Lehmann,  Paul  L.  The  Decalogue  and  a Human  Future : The  Meaning  of  the 
Commandments  for  Making  and  Keeping  Human  Life  Human.  Grand  Rapids: 
Wm.  B.  Eerdmans  Publishing  Co.,  1995.  Pp.  232.  $17.99. 

With  the  posthumous  publication  of  this  book,  Paul  Lehmann  fulfills  a 
promise  he  made  over  thirty  years  ago  to  produce  a volume  on  the  role  the 
commandments  properly  play  in  Christian  life.  To  this  end  he  creatively 
brings  together  catechetical  insights  from  Martin  Luther;  doctrinal  guidance 
from  John  Calvin,  Karl  Barth,  and  Dietrich  Bonhoeffer;  the  sociological 
categories  of  Louis  Dumont  and  Peter  Blau;  the  feminist  critiques  of  Phyllis 
Trible,  Carol  Christ,  and  Elisabeth  Schiissler  Fiorenza;  and  the  artistic 
sensibilities  of  Auden,  Milton,  Shakespeare,  and  Yeats. 

In  the  first  of  the  book’s  two  sections,  entitled  “Disregard,  Disarray,  and 
Discovery,”  Lehmann  sets  forth  the  methodological  framework  that  shapes 
his  contextual  approach  to  the  decalogue.  In  the  first  chapter  he  rejects  a 
prescriptive  reading  of  the  decalogue  that  emphasizes  “a  calculus  of  permis- 
sions and  prohibitions,”  arguing  instead  that  the  commandments  are  descrip- 
tive statements  that  enable  humans  to  discern  the  pathways  and  patterns 
marking  the  way  toward  the  future  that  God  is  making  fit  for  human  life.  In 
chapters  2 and  3 Lehmann  brings  catechetical  insights  and  sociological 
analyses  to  bear  on  the  question  of  what  constitutes  the  contours  and 
boundaries  of  human  relations,  concluding  that  patterns  of  reciprocal  respon- 
sibility form  a tertium  quid  beyond  the  inadequacies  of  hierarchical  and 
egalitarian  social  structures. 

In  the  second  part,  “Pathways  and  Patterns  of  Reciprocal  Responsibility,” 
Lehmann  examines  what  he  considers  to  be  pressing  moral  implications  of 
each  commandment.  He  covers  a broad  range  of  topics,  for  example,  the 
patriarchal  co-optation  of  God’s  name,  the  family  caught  between  the  expan- 
sion of  rights  and  the  abrogation  of  responsibilities,  abortion,  homosexuality, 
and  the  humanizing  relationship  that  properly  exists  between  the  possession 
and  use  of  property.  With  each  new  commandment  Lehmann  gives  the  reader 
a compelling  argument,  inviting  us  to  take  up  and  take  seriously  the  matters 
under  consideration  and  to  probe  even  further  into  the  questions  and  oppor- 
tunities that  make  up  the  moral  fabric  of  human  life. 

There  are,  nonetheless,  questions  in  the  book  that  need  to  be  addressed. 
Most  pressing  is  the  need  to  elaborate  more  precisely  the  redemptive  nature 
of  the  connection  that  Lehmann  identifies  between  the  behavioral  thrust  of 
the  decalogue’s  “structural  realism”  and  the  sociological  categories  supplied 
by  Dumont  and  Blau.  He  states,  for  example,  that  the  decalogue  is  the  sum  of 
what  the  gospel  affirms  about  life  in  this  world,  and  he  alludes  often  to  the 


BOOK  REVIEWS 


363 


covenantal-messianic  story,  yet  he  rarely  takes  time  to  show  us  how  a 
descriptive  reading  of  the  commandments  is  decisively  shaped  and  directed  by 
the  face-to-face  encounters  that  comprise  the  story  of  Messiah  Jesus’  life, 
death,  and  resurrection. 

In  like  fashion,  insufficient  attention  is  paid  to  the  church  as  an  eschatologi- 
cal gathering  or  koinonia.  As  Nancy  Duff  points  out  in  her  excellent  introduc- 
tion to  the  book,  ecclesiology  is  crucial  to  Lehmann’s  theology.  The  point 
here  is  not  that  the  church  is  a perfect  company  of  the  sinless,  in  possession  of 
concise  moral  formulas  into  which  one  only  need  plug  in  the  variables  to 
know  exactly  what  to  do.  Rather,  as  Lehmann  puts  it  in  his  best  known  work, 
Ethics  in  a Christian  Context , the  continuing  life  of  the  koinonia  is  the  context 
within  which  the  discernible  difference  that  the  triune  activity  of  God  makes 
in  the  world  comes  into  view. 

All  things  considered,  however,  The  Decalogue  and  a Human  Future  repre- 
sents a fitting  conclusion  to  a distinguished  career  that  spanned  seven  decades, 
leaving  to  future  generations  a legacy  of  artistry  and  erudition  that  will  inspire 
and  instruct  for  years  to  come. 

Barry  Harvey 
Baylor  University 


Wolterstorff,  Nicholas.  Divine  Discourse:  Philosophical  Reflections  on  the  Claim 
That  God  Speaks.  Cambridge:  Cambridge  University  Press,  1995.  Pp.  x + 326. 

$59.95/$i8.95. 

This  book,  based  on  the  Wilde  Lectures  at  Oxford  in  1993,  is  probably  the 
most  extensive  and  penetrating  philosophical  discussion  of  the  idea  of  divine 
speaking  ever  undertaken.  In  part,  it  is  an  essay  in  conceptual  analysis, 
attempting  to  clarify  the  concept  of  a divine  speech  and  to  distinguish  it  from 
revelation  and  other  related  notions.  It  explores  the  possibility  of  such  speech, 
and  the  possible  modes  in  which  it  might  be  actualized.  And  it  includes  an 
extensive  discussion  of  what  Wolterstorff  takes  to  be  the  appropriate  proce- 
dure for  biblical  interpretation  as  a way  of  hearing  that  speech. 

When  Wolterstorff  writes  about  the  divine  speaking,  he  intends  “speech” 
in  much  the  same  sense  as  that  in  which  we  say  that  humans  speak.  So  he 
explores  the  various  ways  in  which  we  can  say  speakers  make  statements,  ask 
questions,  etc.  He  then  explores  the  analogous  possibilities  for  the  divine 
speaker. 

Wolterstorff  construes  speech  as  essentially  a method  of  altering  the 
normative  landscape.  When  I speak,  according  to  him,  I acquire  new  rights 


364 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


and  duties,  and  I confer  new  rights  and  duties  on  others.  The  same  goes  for 
God.  The  divine  speaker  enters  into  a normative  interchange  with  us  and  thus 
generates,  and  accepts,  a new  normative  configuration. 

It  is  important  to  WolterstorfPs  argument  to  observe  that  there  are  many 
modes  of  human  speech  — it  is  not  limited  to  making  vocal  sounds  or  marking 
paper  with  one’s  own  hand.  Wolterstorff  is  especially  interested  in  two  modes 
of  “mediated”  speech.  There  is  “authorized”  speech,  in  which  one  agent 
authorizes  another  to  speak  for  him  or  her.  When  the  second  agent  speaks  (in 
the  specified  circumstances),  that  counts  as  a speech  by  the  authorizing  agent. 
He  or  she  thereby  acquires  the  corresponding  normative  status.  Wolterstorff 
cites  examples  like  that  of  the  ambassador  who  is  authorized  to  speak  for  the 
president,  and  the  secretary  who  is  authorized  to  write  letters  and  sign  them 
on  behalf  of  the  boss. 

Another  form  of  mediated  speech  consists  of  one  agent’s  “appropriating” 
something  said  by  someone  else  and  making  it  his  or  her  own.  So,  in  a public 
meeting,  someone  may  hear  a speech  and  follow  it  up  by  saying,  “That 
expresses  my  sentiments,  too.”  Or,  in  writing  an  article,  one  may  quote 
another  author  “approvingly.”  And  Wolterstorff  takes  both  authorization  and 
appropriation  to  be  among  the  most  important  modalities  for  the  divine 
speaking. 

Two  areas  invite  further  exploration.  Wolterstorff  seems  to  construe 
authorization  as  essentially  a two-agent  relation.  President  Truman  autho- 
rizes Kennan  to  speak  for  him  in  the  Kremlin,  the  boss  authorizes  the 
secretary  to  sign  letters,  and  God  authorizes  a prophet  to  speak  in  God’s 
name.  But  this  seems  to  leave  out  an  important  element.  The  fact  is  that 
nothing  that  transpires  between  Truman  and  Kennan  can  make  Kennan’s 
words,  spoken  in  Moscow,  count  as  Truman’s  message  to  Stalin.  Kennan’s 
authorization  cannot  be  a private  affair  between  him  and  the  president.  It 
must  be  “public”  in  a sense.  Kennan  needs  credentials,  and  credentials  of  a 
sort  that  can  be  recognized  in  Moscow.  (I  suppose  there  are  standard  forms 
for  diplomatic  credentials.)  Without  such  credentials,  nothing  that  Kennan 
says  in  the  Kremlin  will  confer  the  desired  normative  status  on  Truman  in  the 
White  House.  To  whatever  extent  the  divine  speech  to  us  is  construed 
according  to  this  model,  must  there  not  be  some  element  that  is  analogous  to 
the  ambassador’s  credentials?  How,  when,  where,  and  to  whom  are  these 
credentials  presented? 

The  second  problem  involves  one  of  Wolterstorff  s principles  of  biblical 
interpretation.  More  than  once,  he  says  that  our  interpretations  must  never 
attribute  a falsehood  to  God.  But  he  gives  no  reason,  I think,  to  support  this 


BOOK  REVIEWS 


365 


rule.  One  might,  however,  think  that  a speaker  utters  a falsehood  either  as  a 
result  of  some  ignorance  or  mistake,  or  else  as  a deliberate  attempt  to  deceive. 
In  the  one  case  it  stems  from  a cognitive  defect,  in  the  other  from  a moral 
defect.  But  God  has  neither  of  these  defects.  So  God  says  nothing  false. 

The  possibility  of  mediated  speech,  however,  undercuts  this  argument,  for 
it  suggests  a way  in  which  God  may  come  to  assert  falsehoods  without  either 
of  these  defects.  If  I authorize  someone  to  speak  for  me,  then  I accept  the 
responsibility  for  what  she  says,  even  if  I would  not  have  said  that  thing  with 
my  own  mouth.  If  the  governors  of  Baring’s  Bank  authorize  an  agent  in 
Singapore  to  trade  on  the  Tokyo  stock  exchange  with  bank  money,  then 
Baring’s  Bank  sustains  the  losses,  even  if  none  of  the  governors  would 
themselves  have  made  those  trades.  But  according  to  Wolterstorff  s analysis, 
acquiring  the  normative  status  associated  with  the  assertion  of  a certain 
proposition  is  essentially  what  saying  that  proposition  amounts  to.  Perhaps  we 
should  explore  the  possibility  that  God  authorizes  someone  to  speak  for  him, 
and  thus  (willingly)  accepts  the  responsibility  for  what  is  said,  including  the 
falsehood  that  is  said,  even  if  God  would  not  have  said  those  things  in  an 
unmediated  way. 

George  I.  Mavrodes 
University  of  Michigan 


Albertz,  Rainer.  A History  of  Israelite  Religion  in  the  Old  Testament  Period.  2 vols. 
Louisville:  Westminster  John  Knox  Press,  1994.  Pp.  740.  $32.00;  $32.00. 

Rainer  Albertz,  Professor  of  Biblical  Exegesis  and  Biblical  Theology  at  the 
University  of  $iegen,  Germany,  first  came  to  prominence  in  1978  with  the 
publication  of  Personliche  Fronmiigkeit  und  offizielle  Religion:  Religionsinterner 
Pluralismus  in  Israel  und  Babylon , a comparative  study  of  the  contrast  between 
personal  piety  and  official  religion  in  Israel  and  Babylon.  The  present 
two-volume  work,  originally  published  in  German  in  1992,  represents  a 
continuation  and  broadening  of  the  research  interests  found  in  that  earlier 
work. 

Albertz  wants  to  rehabilitate  a history-of-religions  approach  to  the  study  of 
the  Old  Testament  in  contrast  to  the  biblical-theology  approach  that  he 
thinks  currently  dominates  the  field.  He  has  also  made  a serious  attempt  to 
incorporate  the  results  of  recent  sociological  study  of  the  Old  Testament.  Yet 
the  structure  of  his  treatment  is  strikingly  similar  to  historically  arranged 
theologies  of  the  Old  Testament,  such  as  that  of  Gerhard  von  Rad.  History  or 
the  history  of  religious  traditions  is  actually  more  important  in  Albertz’s  work 


366 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


than  the  nuts  and  bolts  of  religion.  This  is  not  the  work  to  consult  to  learn 
about  the  actual  cultic  practices  in  ancient  Israel.  In  contrast  to  such  a work  as 
Mark  S.  Smith’s  The  Early  History  of  God:  Yahweh  and  the  Other  Deities  in 
Ancient  Israel  (1987),  which  has  detailed  discussions  of  the  various  symbols, 
sites,  and  practices  of  the  Israelite  cult,  Albertz’s  discussion  of  such  phenom- 
ena as  the  cultic  stela,  the  ashera,  the  high  place,  sacrifice,  etc.,  tends  to  be 
cursory,  scattered,  and  episodic.  One  never  gets  much  sense  how  the  various 
elements  of  the  cult  cohere  in  any  kind  of  system  at  any  particular  period. 

Moreover,  Albertz’s  reconstruction  of  the  historical  development  of  Israel’s 
religious  traditions  depends  on  a number  of  problematic  literary  judgments. 
He  assigns  a very  late  date  to  the  whole  process  of  Pentateuchal  composition, 
rejecting  the  traditional  preexilic  sources  J and  E.  He  also  assigns  the  Book  of 
the  Covenant  (Exodus  2 1-23),  traditionally  dated  to  the  early  monarchical  or 
even  premonarchical  period,  a date  in  the  reign  of  Hezekiah  in  the  late  eighth 
century  B.C.  Further,  while  offering  no  explanation  for  Deuteronomy’s 
obvious  northern  elements,  Albertz  turns  it  into  a purely  southern  work 
whose  composition  could  not  have  begun  before  631  B.C.  There  was  no 
preexilic  edition  of  the  deuteronomic  history;  according  to  Albertz  it  took 
shape  only  gradually  after  561  B.C.,  developing  out  of  the  work  of  theological 
discussion  groups.  Neither  Albertz’s  late  datings  nor  the  prominence  he  gives 
to  composition  by  committee  provide  adequate  explanations  for  the  literary 
character  of  these  works.  If  his  literary  judgments  were  correct,  one  would  be 
able  to  say  very  little  about  the  nature  of  Israelite  religion  prior  to  the  very  end 
of  the  eighth  century,  and  even  what  one  could  say  about  the  eighth  and 
seventh  centuries  would  be  suspect  as  revisionist  deuteronomistic  ideology. 
Albertz  wants  to  say  a great  deal  about  the  earlier  periods,  but  his  treatment  of 
the  sources  has  provided  no  convincing  rationale  for  why  one  should  trust  any 
reconstruction  of  Israelite  religion  for  the  periods  prior  to  the  eighth  century 
B.C. 

Despite  his  failure  to  isolate  early  sources,  however,  Albertz’s  reconstruc- 
tion of  the  royal  theology  of  the  Davidic-Solomonic  period  is  probably  the 
strongest  part  of  his  work.  His  recognition  of  the  strong  Egyptian  influence 
on  the  Israelite  coronation  ritual  and  his  refusal  to  allow  apologetic  concerns 
to  undercut  that  observation  is  a case  in  point.  Yet  methodological  weaknesses 
still  undermine  confidence  in  details  of  his  sketch  of  the  historical  develop- 
ment of  the  monarchy.  He  tries  to  draw  a very  sharp  distinction  between  the 
tribal  chieftainship  of  Saul  and  the  full-fledged  monarchy  of  David,  but  when 
he  begins  describing  the  taxation  necessary  to  support  the  changes  under 
David  and  Solomon,  he  actually  cites  texts  purporting  to  deal  with  the 


BOOK  REVIEWS  367 

situation  under  Saul.  If  taken  seriously,  these  texts  suggest  a significant 
development  of  the  monarchy  already  under  Saul. 

Albertz  makes  a great  deal  of  the  supposed  contrast  in  the  early  period 
between  the  personal  piety  of  Israelites,  directed  toward  many  gods,  and  the 
state  religion,  directed  toward  the  national  deity,  Yahweh.  His  evidence  for 
this  is  primarily  based  on  Israelite  personal  names,  many  of  which,  on  his 
source  analysis,  cannot  be  assigned  an  early  date,  and  his  results  are  contra- 
dicted by  Jeffrey  Tigay’s  more  thorough  and  judicious  study  of  the  biblical 
and  inscriptional  material  ( You  Shall  Have  No  Other  Gods:  Israelite  Religion  in 
the  Light  of  Hebrew  Inscriptions  [1986]).  But  if  the  supposed  contrast  between 
personal  piety  and  state  religion  is  hard  to  demonstrate  for  the  earlier  period, 
one  must  be  very  dubious  of  Albertz’s  claims  that  a change  in  personal  and 
family  piety  in  the  later  period  played  a major  role  in  the  transformation  and 
preservation  of  Yahwism  at  the  time  of  the  exile.  His  dating  of  the  idea  of  the 
covenant  between  Yahweh  and  Israel  to  the  late  seventh  century  B.C.  is  also 
problematic.  It  must  cavalierly  delete  the  contrary  evidence  in  the  eighth- 
century  prophet  Hosea  and  ignore  obvious  contrasts  in  important  structural 
elements  between  the  Israelite  covenant  and  Assyrian  covenants  of  the  first 
millennium.  Oddly,  Albertz  also  follows  the  apologists  in  dismissing  the 
evidence  for  child  sacrifice  in  Israel.  The  attempt  to  turn  the  burning  of  the 
child  on  the  tophet  into  a harmless  dedication  ritual  analogous  to  infant 
baptism  will  not  wash.  Such  allusions  to  the  practice  as  that  found  in  Isaiah 
30:33  clearly  imply  the  fiery  death  of  the  human  sacrifice. 

These  critical  comments  should  not  be  misconstrued  as  a totally  negative 
judgment  on  the  books.  Albertz  offers  many  acute  observations,  and  his 
construals  of  Israelite  religion,  even  when  one  remains  unconvinced  of  his 
historical  schema,  are  often  suggestive  and  productive  of  new  lines  of  thought. 
It  is  a work  worth  reading  both  for  its  ideas  and  for  its  marvelous  bibliographi- 
cal resources.  But  it  has  not  adequately  met  the  need  for  a reliable  reference 
work  on  the  history  of  Israelite  religion  in  the  Old  Testament  period.  Such  a 
work  remains  to  be  written. 


J.  J.  M.  Roberts 
Princeton  Theological  Seminary 


White,  L.  Michael,  and  O.  Larry  Yarbrough,  eds.  The  Social  World  of  the  First 
Christians:  Essays  in  Honor  of  Wayne  A.  Meeks.  Minneapolis:  Fortress  Press, 
1995.  Pp.  xxix  + 418.  $54.00. 

Social  World  is  a fitting  tribute  to  the  legacy  of  social  analysis  that  Wayne  A. 
Meeks  leaves  for  future  biblical  interpreters.  The  book  is  divided  neatly  into 


368 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


four  parts.  Nine  essays  in  part  1 deal  with  Paul  and  his  communities.  The  first 
five  “treat  patterns  of  argument  in  Paul’s  letters  as  they  relate  to  the  social  and 
interpretive  context  of  his  communities.”  The  last  four  examine  Paul’s 
method  of  organizing  and  exhorting  his  communities;  in  the  process  they  help 
to  demonstrate  how  social  conventions  of  the  time  influenced  both  the 
content  and  manner  of  the  Apostle’s  activities.  In  part  2,  themes  that  highlight 
writings  from  other  Christian  communities,  those  represented  in  Matthew, 
Luke-Acts,  John,  and  James,  are  considered  in  light  of  their  social  contexts. 
Part  3 extends  the  study  away  from  a direct  consideration  of  Christian  issues 
into  the  broader  social  environments  of  magic,  pagan  Greek  religious  sacri- 
fice, and  gnosticism.  Finally,  the  brief  concluding  section  looks  at  the  impact 
of  Pauline  traditions  in  shaping  later  Christian  life  and  thought,  especially  as 
it  develops  through  an  Augustinian  lens. 

I find  parts  1 and  2 extremely  exciting.  Direct  links  are  established  between 
the  social  context  in  which  the  biblical  materials  were  written  and  the  manner 
in  which  conclusions  about  the  meaning  of  those  materials  are  acquired.  Each 
of  the  authors  helps  us  to  see  how  the  material  would  most  likely  have  been 
understood  given  the  sociohistorical  filters  of  the  period.  Often  implied  is  the 
suggestion  (and  I believe  it  appropriate)  that  Paul  and  his  audience,  because  of 
their  shared  social  circumstance,  assumed  a common  meaning  for  many  of  the 
rhetorical  terms  and  devices  that  now  seem  puzzling  to  contemporary  readers 
and  interpreters. 

Ronald  F.  Flock’s  article,  “A  Support  for  His  Old  Age:  Paul’s  Plea  on 
Behalf  of  Onesimus,”  is  a case  in  point.  Paul  does  not  spend  time  explaining 
terminology  like  upeCTPirrqs  (old  man  or  ambassador)  in  Philemon  9 because 
he  knows  his  readers  understand  him.  We,  however,  do  not.  We  know  that 
Paul  wanted  Philemon  to  allow  his  slave,  Onesimus,  to  return  to  Paul’s  side. 
We  are  not  certain,  however,  whether  the  Apostle  based  his  appeal  on  the 
authoritative  self-designation  “ambassador”  or  on  the  self-effacing  qualifier 
“old  man.”  We  must,  therefore,  reconstruct  the  rhetorical  relationship  that 
existed  between  Paul  and  his  intended  audience  in  Philemon’s  household. 
Hock  does  this  through  the  use  of  Greco-Roman  literary  and  social  parallels. 
The  comparisons  prompt  the  conclusion  that  Paul  referred  to  himself  as  an 
old  man;  in  so  doing,  he  represented  Onesimus  as  a son  whose  proper  place  is 
at  the  side  of  his  aging  spiritual  father,  Paul.  Common  social  convention 
demanded  compliance.  Paul,  then,  like  Greco-Roman  literary  figures  of  the 
time,  personalized  his  relationship  with  both  the  slave  Onesimus  and  his 
owner,  Philemon,  in  order  to  make  his  point  and  obtain  his  desire. 


BOOK  REVIEWS  369 

This  work  is  a substantial  one  that  has  much  to  contribute  to  the  field  of 
New  Testament  research  and  professional  biblical  interpretation.  I do  have 
two  concerns.  My  first  has  to  do  with  the  final  two  sections  of  the  book.  While 
I find  the  material  illuminating  and  often  provocative,  especially  Segal’s 
discussion  of  magic,  the  material  in  the  end  seems  less  “useful”  for  illuminat- 
ing issues  of  interpreting  the  New  Testament.  Certainly  this  is  not  the  case 
with  Stowers’  study  on  Greeks  who  sacrifice  and  those  who  don’t.  Indeed,  his 
work  gives  the  reader  a clearer  understanding  of  the  importance  of  sacrifice  in 
the  ancient  world  and,  therefore,  the  precarious  position  into  which  a 
Christian  who  refused  to  sacrifice  would  place  him-  or  herself.  For  the  most 
part,  however,  these  latter  materials  serve  their  own  historical  purposes  of 
social  evaluation  and  investigation;  the  reader  is  left  to  connect  the  conclu- 
sions drawn  from  the  studies  of  the  social  world  of  the  first  Christians  to  the 
interpretation  of  the  literature  those  Christians  produced. 

My  second  concern  stems  from  the  apparent  unwillingness  to  make  the 
move  from  considering  the  first-century  context  of  interpretation  to  examin- 
ing the  contemporary  context.  Certainly,  this  concern  is  often  implied  and/or 
stated;  rarely,  however,  is  the  investigative  skill,  patience,  and  resolve  that 
went  into  these  articles  directed  toward  contemporary  social-analytical  issues 
and  how  they  affect  not  only  how  we  reconstruct  the  first-century  social  world 
but  also  how  we  interpret  the  biblical  materials  that  developed  in  it. 

Brian  K.  Blount 
Princeton  Theological  Seminary 


Betz,  Hans  Dieter.  The  Sermon  on  the  Mount:  A Commentary  on  the  Sermon  on 
the  Mount,  including  the  Sermon  on  the  Plain  (Matthew  5:5-7:27  and  Luke 
6:20-49).  Minneapolis:  Fortress  Press,  1995.  Pp.  xxxvii  -I-  695.  $72.00. 

With  this  addition  to  the  Hermeneia  commentary  series,  Hans  Dieter  Betz 
brings  to  a magisterial  culmination  his  exegetical  labors  on  the  Sermon  on  the 
Mount.  This  massive  examination  of  the  Sermon  draws  on  Betz’s  intimate 
familiarity  with  Hellenistic  rhetorical  culture,  on  his  thorough  acquaintance 
with  the  history  of  interpretation  of  the  Sermon,  and  on  his  immersion  in  the 
exegetical  tradition  of  source  and  redaction  criticism.  With  these  tools,  he 
constructs  a powerful  argument  that  the  Sermon  as  it  appears  in  the  Gospels 
of  Matthew  and  Luke  represents  independent,  pre-Gospel  redactions  of  a 
shared  collection  of  sayings;  the  compilers  of  these  collections  have  shaped 
the  two  “sermons”  into  epitomai,  compendia  of  Jesus’  teachings,  for  catecheti- 
cal purposes. 


370 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


The  introductory  section  rehearses  the  history  of  the  interpretation  of  the 
Sermon,  from  the  earliest  Christian  writings  to  the  present.  Betz  then 
considers  the  structure,  the  genre,  and  the  function  of  the  Sermon(s), 
concluding  that  these  categories  all  support  his  hypothesis  that  these  texts 
represent  divergent  complementary  representations  of  the  Jesus  movement’s 
central  doctrines— the  Sermon  on  the  Mount  compiled  by  Jews  for  their 
mission  to  other  Jews,  and  the  Sermon  on  the  Plain  compiled  by  Jews  for  the 
mission  to  Gentiles.  He  supports  his  introductory  explanations  with  detailed 
rhetorical  outlines  of  the  two  Sermons. 

The  remainder  of  the  volume  undertakes  a detailed  analysis  of  the  two  texts 
(first  the  Matthean  Sermon,  then  the  Lukan).  Betz  devotes  almost  a hundred 
pages  to  the  beatitudes  (Matt.  5:3-12;  Luke  6:2ob-26),  more  than  a hundred 
pages  to  the  antitheses  (Matt.  5:21-48),  and  copious  attention  to  virtually 
every  aspect  of  this  crucial  text.  He  calls  constant  attention  to  illuminating 
material  from  the  Greek  primary  sources,  though  he  alludes  to  rabbinic 
sources  principally  through  secondary  reference  works.  The  commentary 
follows  the  Hermeneia  pattern  of  translation,  general  analysis,  and  detailed 
verse-by-verse  examination  (with  copious  footnotes)  into  which  Betz  incorpo- 
rates significant  excursuses  on  “Jerusalem,”  Socrates’  defiance  of  the  law, 
oaths,  and  ancient  theories  of  vision,  to  name  but  a few.  A select  bibliography 
concludes  the  volume  (Betz  allows  works  of  limited  importance  simply  to 
remain  in  the  footnotes  to  the  passages  they  illuminate). 

This  commentary  is  a treasure  of  insights  from  ancient  parallels,  from  the 
history  of  interpretation,  and  from  the  author’s  encyclopedic  familiarity  with 
the  best  of  contemporary  scholarship.  Even  if  one  is  not  convinced  by  Betz’s 
suggestion  that  the  Sermon(s)  reflect  separately  redacted  presynoptic  versions 
of  a common  stock  of  material,  the  notes  and  analysis  are  quite  valuable 
(Betz’s  familiarity  with  the  Greek  literature  is  evident  on  every  page).  It  is 
regrettable,  though,  that  he  devotes  less  attention  to  specifically  Jewish 
traditions,  especially  since  much  of  the  Sermon(s)  involves  legal/ethical 
reasoning  (and  since  his  thesis  proposes  the  Jewish  origin  of  both  Sermons 
and  the  Jewish  destination  of  the  Matthean  Sermon).  While  there  is  much 
that  is  precious  in  this  volume,  the  high  cost  and  the  attention  to  minutiae 
mean  that  many  pastors  would  find  this  monumental  reference  volume  an 
expense  disproportionate  to  its  usefulness. 

A.  K.  M.  Adam 
Princeton  Theological  Seminary 


BOOK  REVIEWS 


371 

Gold,  Victor  Roland,  et  al.,  eds.  The  New  Testament  and  Psalms:  An  Inclusive 
Version.  New  York:  Oxford  University  Press,  1995.  Pp.  xxii  + 535.  $14.95. 

Any  translation  of  the  New  Testament  described  as  “an  inclusive  version” 
is  likely  to  have  an  immediate  appeal  for  many  readers.  But  it  is  no  use  having 
politically  correct  language  if  the  meaning  of  the  original  text  is  not  conveyed. 
Unfortunately,  in  spite  of  its  extravagant  claims,  this  version  fails  to  live  up  to 
its  promise  to  present  the  true  meaning  of  the  text. 

In  the  preface,  the  editors  set  out  the  reasons  for  “another  version.” 
Changes  in  the  English  langage  and  developments  in  our  understanding  of 
Greek  and  Hebrew  have  necessitated  new  translations,  and  the  New  Revised 
Standard  Version  and  Revised  English  Bible  are  excellent  examples  of  such 
translations.  In  fact,  however,  the  only  differences  between  this  present 
“translation”  and  the  NRSV,  on  which  it  is  based,  are  concerned  with  issues 
of  “inclusive  language.”  It  is  these  changes  that  “justify”  the  present  version. 

The  NRSV  itself  had  already  made  numerous  changes  to  the  RSV  in  the 
interest  of  using  inclusive  language.  Many  of  the  changes  were  simple  and 
necessary:  There  can,  for  example,  be  no  justification  for  modern  translators 
using  the  word  “man”  in  any  passage  in  which  there  is  no  reference  to  a man 
in  Greek.  The  changes  made  in  this  version,  however,  go  far  beyond  this.  The 
editors  attempt  to  remove  “all  gender-specific  language  not  referring  to 
particular  historical  individuals,  all  pejorative  references  to  race,  color,  or 
religion,  and  all  identifications  of  persons  by  their  physical  disability  alone.” 
In  doing  so,  they  claim  that  they  have  brought  out  “the  underlying  meaning 
of  the  text  more  explicitly  than  ever  before.”  In  fact,  they  have  done  the  very 
reverse:  by  attempting  to  make  the  text  “relevant,”  they  have  succeeded  in 
hiding  its  original  meaning.  At  the  same  time,  a few  passages  remain,  still 
expressed  in  politically  “incorrect”  langage,  to  show  how  impossible  it  is  to 
conceal  the  Bible’s  cultural  relativity. 

The  New  Testament  was  written  in  a male-dominated  society.  One  should 
not  try  to  disguise  this.  Paradoxically,  in  their  attempts  to  do  so,  our  editors 
lose  one  of  the  points  they  are  trying  to  emphasize  — the  universality  of  the 
gospel.  One  of  the  remarkable  things  about  the  New  Testament  is  how  often, 
in  a male-dominated  world,  women  were  being  treated  as  equals.  By  removing 
references  to  “Son”  and  “sons”  in  Galatians  3-4,  for  example,  we  lose  sight  of 
Paul’s  remarkable  claim  that  women  were  now  being  treated  as  “sons  of 
God”— sons  of  God  and  therefore  (like  men)  inheritors  of  God’s  promises.  Of 
course  the  language  of  sonship  jars  us— and  so  it  should,  but  at  the  time  it 
must  have  jarred  ancient  readers  far  more,  because  the  very  idea  it  expressed 


372 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


was  so  shocking!  Ancient  readers  must  have  been  shocked,  too,  by  the 
references  to  the  three  women  who  are  specifically  named  by  Matthew  in  his 
version  of  Jesus’  genealogy.  All  three  are  gentiles  and  outsiders.  Why  does 
Matthew  mention  them,  and  what  is  he  hinting  about  the  gospel?  These 
gentile  women  (doubly  second-class!)  had  fulfilled  an  important  role  in  God’s 
plan.  But  our  editors  miss  the  point  entirely,  by  inserting  the  names  of  other 
(perfectly  “acceptable”)  women  into  the  list! 

So,  too,  with  the  references  to  people  with  disabilities.  The  editors  have 
rejected  the  normal  translations  such  as  “the  blind,”  “the  lame,”  or  “lepers,” 
in  favor  of  phrases  such  as  “people  who  are  blind,”  “those  who  are  lame,”  and 
“persons  with  leprosy,”  on  the  basis  that  “they  are  people  first  and  they  have 
disabilities  second.”  But  the  point  of  the  gospel  story  is  that  in  the  biblical 
world  these  people  were  not  regarded  as  “people  first”:  they  were  regarded  as 
maimed,  imperfect,  unclean,  outsiders.  And  Jesus  healed  even  them!  Not  only 
that,  he  made  them  members  of  the  community.  Women,  gentiles,  the  sick, 
and  the  unclean  were  all  members  of  God’s  people. 

It  is  a strange  phenomenon  that  the  attempt  to  achieve  “greater  specificity” 
in  language  in  fact  often  succeeds  in  making  it  more  remote:  there  is  nothing 
more  impersonal  than  the  word  “person”!  Take,  for  example,  the  story  in 
Mark  1:40-45.  Gone  is  “the  leper”;  instead  we  have  “a  person  with  leprosy.” 
Instead  of  touching  “him,”  we  have  “Jesus  . . . touched  the  person.”  When  we 
come  to  Mark  14,  however,  we  find  that  the  woman  who  anoints  Jesus  is  still 
“a  woman”!  There  is  surely  sexist  bias  here:  the  women  remain  real  people, 
but  the  men  are  reduced  to  being  “persons”  and  lose  their  personality. 

This  version  will,  of  course,  have  nothing  to  do  with  masculine  terms  for 
God.  “Father”  has  become  “Father-Mother.”  This  can  hardly  be  said  to 
convey  the  meaning  of  the  original!  Certainly  it  avoids  the  danger  that  it 
might  be  taken  literally.  But  does  it  function  successfully  as  a metaphor?  It  jars 
because  it  is  so  obviously  artificial  and  conveys  nothing  of  the  sense  of  a loving 
relationship.  Again,  the  editors  have  dropped  “Lord”  as  a designation  for 
Christ,  but  in  doing  so  they  obliterate  very  interesting  and  significant 
evidence  regarding  the  development  of  Christology.  The  one  change  that 
could  perhaps  be  regarded  as  an  improvement  is  the  use  of  “dominion”  for 
“kingdom”  — not  because  it  avoids  the  “sexist”  term  “king”  but  because  it 
arguably  conveys  the  idea  of  rule  as  well  as  realm.  Here,  at  last,  we  have  a 
change  that  does  convey  the  underlying  meaning  of  the  text  better! 

Verbs,  as  well  as  nouns,  convey  the  mores  of  another  era.  Take  the 
admonition  to  women  to  obey  their  husbands  in  Ephesians  5:22.  The  revisers 
have  changed  this  to  “Be  committed  to  your  husbands.”  But  this  is  not  what 


BOOK  REVIEWS 


373 


the  verb  hypotasso  means;  it  means  “to  be  subject  to”  or  “to  obey.”  And  if 
women  in  the  ancient  world  were  expected  to  obey  their  husbands,  children 
were  also  expected  to  obey  their  parents  (Eph.  6: i),  not  to  “heed”  them.  In 
this  version,  parents  are  no  longer  said  to  “discipline”  their  children  in 
Hebrews  12:7  but  to  “guide”  them,  for  fear  that  the  passage  might  be  used  to 
justify  child  abuse  (p.  xx)!  But  Romans  13,  used  by  some  Christians  in  Nazi 
Germany  to  justify  their  failure  to  withstand  Hitler,  remains  unchanged,  to 
remind  us  that  the  New  Testament  was  in  fact  written  in  a very  different 
world. 

The  Bible  was  written  in  another  age  and  another  culture,  and  it  is  foolish 
to  try  to  disguise  this  fact  by  tinkering  with  the  language.  In  attempting  to  do 
so,  the  editors  of  this  version  have  in  fact  obscured  the  radical  nature  of  the 
gospel.  We  shall  never  understand  the  Bible  if  we  treat  it  in  this  way.  We  may 
not  like  what  it  says,  but  we  are  not  being  true  to  its  underlying  meaning  if  we 
change  the  bits  that  do  not  fit  with  our  modern  perceptions. 

Morna  D.  Hooker 
University  of  Cambridge 


Charlesworth,  James  H.,  and  Walter  P.  Weaver,  eds.  Earthing  Christologies: 
From  Jesus'  Parables  to  Jesus  the  Parable.  Valley  Forge:  Trinity  Press  Interna- 
tional, 1 995 . Pp.  xiv  + 1 1 1 . $ 1 3 .00. 

This  is  a revised  and  updated  edition  of  a collection  of  essays  first  published 
by  Exodus  Press,  Nashville,  in  1989.  The  essays  constitute  a fresh  attempt  to 
assert  the  significance  of  the  historical  Jesus  in  the  light  of  and  in  response  to 
the  issues  still  raised  particularly  by  Rudolf  Bultmann. 

Walter  Weaver  of  Florida  Southern  College  begins  the  sequence  by 
relating  his  own  personal  odyssey  on  the  importance  of  the  historical  Jesus 
(through  Bultmann,  the  New  Hermeneutic,  and  so  on)  and  drawing  out 
conclusions  that  are  in  effect  those  of  the  so-called  New  Quest  before 
outlining  the  model  that  has  proved  fruitful  for  him,  namely,  Jesus  as  Parable. 
This  model  has  four  characteristic  elements:  “identity  with  the  dispossessed,” 
“true  life  as  cruciform,”  “God  as  parabolic,”  and  “eschatological  hope.” 

James  H.  Charlesworth  of  Princeton  offers  an  interesting  comparison 
between  the  Teacher  of  Righteousness  and  Jesus.  Assuming  that  iQH  8:4-1 1 
is  a psalm  composed  by  the  Teacher,  we  have  an  insight  into  his  self- 
understanding. The  position  is  somewhat  similar  with  regard  to  Jesus  in  Mark 
12:1-9.  Despite  these  similarities,  the  endings  of  the  story  are  rather  different, 


374 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


which  raises  the  question:  Is  there  a clue  to  the  diversity  of  these  outcomes  in 
the  different  albeit  similar  self-understandings? 

Leander  Keck  of  Yale  provides  a finely  nuanced  treatment  of  Jesus  and 
Judaism  in  the  New  Testament.  Jesus  in  Judaism  is  no  answer  to  the  question 
Who  is  Jesus?  To  answer  that  question  adequately  an  “interpretive  frame- 
work” is  required;  otherwise,  “Jesus  in  Judaism  is  just  another  interesting 
first-century  Palestinian  teacher.”  Keck  proceeds  to  set  the  answer  within  the 
frameworks  of  Matthew,  John,  and  Paul.  In  the  first  case,  it  becomes  clear  that 
Jesus  and  Judaism  cannot  simply  be  set  in  antithesis.  “Matthew’s  Jesus  stands 
over  against  Judaism  just  like  the  Old  Testament  prophets  stood  over  against 
the  religion  of  Israel.”  John  uses  his  material  to  force  his  readers  to  face  the 
same  decision  regarding  Jesus  as  had  the  Jews.  Paul  is  different  again.  Keck 
concludes  that  we  need  to  continue  speaking  of  the  historical  Jesus  in  Judaism 
“to  keep  us  honest,”  and  that  “the  formulation  ‘Jesus  AND  Judaism’  is 
essential  theologically  if  the  integrity  of  Christianity  is  to  be  preserved,”  but 
that  they  are  not  the  same. 

Hugh  Anderson  of  Edinburgh  winds  up  with  a somewhat  wandering  piece 
perhaps  appropriately  entitled  “Christology:  Unfinished  Business.”  It  in- 
cludes a rather  stringent  critique  of  C.  F.  D.  Moule  that  seems  to  have  been 
somewhat  misdirected.  The  real  thrust  of  the  essay  is  its  poignant  attempt  to 
speak  realistically  of  the  resurrection  of  Christ  in  a world  where  death  still 
seems  unfettered.  Anderson  can  achieve  no  confidence  regarding  Jesus’ 
resurrection,  but  his  challenge  is  effective  in  its  own  way:  “Where  Christian 
believers  have  opportunity  to  improve  the  human  condition,  and  yet  death  is 
somehow  permitted  to  stalk  all  around  them  in  life,  by  oppression,  injustice, 
falsehood,  and  lovelessness,  then  we  can  say  that  Jesus  is  not  risen.”  In  his 
conclusion  to  the  whole,  Weaver  notes  that  the  point  of  Anderson’s  essay  was 
well  summarized  by  Keck:  “The  real  test  of  the  validity  of  the  Christ  idea  is 
not  in  its  theoretical  appeal  to  reason  or  logic,  but  how  the  divine-human 
Christ  is  experienced  by  men  and  women  and  the  effect  that  has  on  their 
lives.” 

The  collection  is  something  of  a mixed  bag,  but  in  the  honesty  of  Weaver’s 
and  Anderson’s  testimonies,  in  the  fresh  insights  afforded  by  Charlesworth’s 
comparison,  and  in  the  sharpness  of  Keck’s  theological  observations  and 
analysis,  there  is  a goodly  amount  of  grain  to  be  gleaned. 

James  D.  G.  Dunn 
University  of  Durham 


BOOK  REVIEWS 


375 


Butin,  Philip  Walker.  Revelation,  Redemption,  and  Response:  Calvin's  Trinitarian 
Understanding  of  the  Divine-Human  Relationship.  New  York:  Oxford  University 
Press,  1995.  Pp.  xiii  + 232.  $39.95. 

Revelation , Redemption  and  Response  is  a splendid  study  of  Calvin’s  understand- 
ing of  the  divine-human  relationship  (“the  knowledge  of  God  and  ourselves”) 
expounded,  as  Calvin  does,  in  terms  of  the  doctrine  of  the  Trinity.  This 
trinitarian  reading  of  Calvin’s  theology— from  which  his  anthropology  can- 
not be  separated  — is  not  only  a major  contribution  to  Calvin  studies  but— one 
would  hope  — to  twentieth-century  dogmatics  as  well. 

Concerning  the  first  contribution,  modern  Calvin  studies  (and  debates) 
between  and  among  Brunner  and  Barth,  Dowey  and  Parker  on  God  the 
Creator  and  Redeemer,  Willis  on  Christology,  and  Krusche  on  pneumatology 
prepared  and  produced  the  need  for  this  synoptic  trinitarian  reflection.  To 
the  studies  of  what  God  has  done  for  us,  and  in  us,  this  one  focuses  on  what 
God  does  with  us.  Additionally,  using  the  doctrine  of  the  divine  triunity  as 
integrating  paradigm  advances  the  continuing  discussion  concerning  whether 
Calvin  thinks  from  a single,  central  dogma  or  from  an  interlocking  set  of 
essential  doctrines.  The  doctrine  of  the  Trinity  offers  a synthesis  (perichore- 
sis)  to  the  discussion  of  Calvin’s  starting  point— or  points  — and  one  based  on 
the  theological  dialectic  of  revelation  rather  than  on  a philosophical  dialectic 
of  reasoned  opposites.  As  an  interpretation  of  Calvin’s  theology  it  has  the 
immensely  persuasive  advantage  of  being  obviously  read  directly  off  the  form 
and  content  of  the  Institutes. 

Concerning  the  second  contribution,  Calvin’s  trinitarian  understanding  of 
anthropology— based  on  confidence  in  divine  revelation  rather  than  appeal  to 
human  reason  — is  a denial  of,  and  perhaps  a recoverable  alternative  to,  the 
pervasive  Cartesian  model  of  the  self  in  essential  separation  from  God,  whose 
very  existence  is  a secondary  and  logically  derived  inference  from  the  undoubt- 
able  certainty  of  human  existence.  According  to  Calvin,  human  being  is 
properly  understood  from  the  revealed  being  of  God  as  Father,  Son,  and 
Spirit.  Butin  underlines  the  essential  fact  that  Calvin,  unlike  Thomas,  does 
not  develop  a doctrine  of  God  in  general  and  then  proceed  to  the  Trinity  in 
particular. 

The  discussion  in  part  1 (chapters  1-3)  includes  the  importance  of  the 
academic  approach  to  Calvin  as  an  historical  figure  while  correctly  insisting 
that  judicious  and  careful  study  does  not  exclude  Calvin  from  being  seen  as  a 
continuing  resource  for  the  church’s  theology.  The  central  section  (chapters 
4-6)  focuses  on  the  revelation  of  God  and  what  we  can  learn  about  ourselves 


376 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


in  reflecting  on  the  divine  perichoretic  reality.  Chapter  4 considers  the 
revealed  basis  of  the  authentic  knowledge  of  God  the  Father  who  is  both  the 
source  and  “subject”  of  revelation.  Chapter  5 expounds  the  redemptive 
pattern  as  demonstrated  in  God  the  Son.  Chapter  6 considers  the  dynamic 
response  as  enabled  by  the  work  of  God  the  Holy  Spirit.  Part  3 (chapters  7-9) 
carries  the  trinitarian  thesis  through  the  doctrine  of  the  church  (and  election), 
with  special  focus  on  the  sacraments. 

The  “central  problem”  of  the  study  is  defined  as  “How  can  what  God  does 
in  us  also  and  simultaneously  be  authentically  human  response?”  (pp.  92-93). 
Butin  grants  that  book  3 of  the  Institutes , with  its  “apparently  Christological 
title”  (p.  80)  and  its  “absence  of  a discrete  discussion  of  the  deity  of  the  Spirit” 
focuses  not  on  the  person  but  “on  the  specific  work  of  the  Spirit  in  the 
divine-human  relationship”  (p.  81),  thereby  appearing  “to  shift  attention  to 
the  human  side  of  the  divine-human  relationship”  (p.  76). 

Butin’s  carefully  nuanced  conclusion  is  that  while  “faith  and  the  Holy  Spirit 
sometimes  appear  in  Calvin’s  thought  to  represent  two  complementary  levels 
of  explanation  for  the  same  phenomenon”  (p.  86),  “there  is  no  intrinsic 
incompatibility  between  attributing  the  same  human  actions  primarily  and 
fundamentally  to  God’s  grace,  and  yet  concurrently  (in  a second  and  wholly 
derivative  sense)  to  human  beings”  (p.  78).  According  to  Butin,  the  divinely 
enabled  human  response  means  that  believers,  as  members  of  Christ’s  body, 
are  included  in  the  divine  perichoresis  (p.  43). 

Butin  helpfully  reviews  and  evaluates  the  state  of  Calvin  studies  in  general 
and  specifically  in  regard  to  the  doctrine  of  the  Trinity.  Ministers  will  read 
this  study  with  intellectual  joy  and  spiritual  profit. 

Charles  Partee 
Pittsburgh  Theological  Seminary 


Puckett,  David  L.  John  Calvin's  Exegesis  of  the  Old  Testament.  Louisville: 
Westminster  John  Knox  Press,  1995.  Pp.  ix  + 179.  $17.00. 

Rather  than  being  a general  study,  as  the  title  might  imply,  David  L. 
Puckett’s  John  Calvin's  Exegesis  of  the  Old  Testament  is  built  around  a focused 
question.  The  question  grows  from  a late-sixteenth-century  polemical  accusa- 
tion: The  Lutheran  theologian  Aegidius  Hunnius  charged  Calvin  with  being 
too  “Jewish”  in  his  interpretation  of  the  Old  Testament.  In  Reformation 
polemics  every  Christian  faction  accused  its  opponents  of  being  “Judaizers” 
on  all  manner  of  issues,  and  biblical  interpretation  was  no  exception.  The 
contemporary  methods  of  interpretation  of  the  Old  Testament  ranged  from 


BOOK  REVIEWS 


377 


traditional  Christian  attempts  to  find  Jesus  Christ  on  every  possible  page  to 
Jewish  commentators  who,  not  surprisingly,  found  no  such  references.  Puck- 
ett sorts  out  the  reality  behind  the  polemics,  and  he  finds  Calvin  exemplifying 
a middle  way  that  critiques  both  extremes. 

After  laying  out  this  scenario  in  the  first  chapter,  Puckett  examines  the 
question  piece  by  piece.  The  second  chapter  lays  out  two  of  Calvin’s  primary 
presuppositions  about  the  Bible:  First,  the  scriptures  are  of  both  divine  and 
human  authorship,  so  the  exegete’s  task  is  to  discern  the  very  thoughts  and 
intentions  of  these  two  sources.  Second,  there  is  a deep  unity  throughout  the 
Bible  between  the  Testaments  and  within  the  Old  Testament.  Both  Testa- 
ments proclaim  salvation  through  a mediator,  promised  in  the  Old  and 
present  in  the  New.  Within  the  Old  Testament,  the  prophets  are  interpreters 
of  the  law. 

The  third  and  fourth  chapters  comprise  the  core  of  Puckett’s  argument, 
respectively  discussing  aspects  of  Calvin’s  exegesis  that  seem  “Jewish”  and 
“Christian.”  He  is  taken  as  Jewish  for  reading  the  text  in  light  of  its  human 
author’s  historical  context.  Calvin  was  critical  of  traditional  Christian  interpre- 
tations of  Old  Testament  texts  that  supported  Christian  doctrine  by  ignoring 
the  original  meaning.  Hunnius  thought  Calvin  was  supporting  Jewish  posi- 
tions and  undercutting  Christian  ones  even  though  Calvin  did  not  critique  the 
doctrines  themselves  but  only  the  faulty  interpretations  used  to  support  them. 
Calvin  also  risked  appearing  a Judaizer  for  his  careful  attention  to  the  proper 
understanding  of  the  Hebrew  language.  He  attempted  to  determine  the 
meaning  of  words  and  passages  based  on  their  usage  throughout  the  Hebrew 
scriptures  and  on  the  literary  and  historical  contexts  of  passages  being 
interpreted.  He  even  gave  favorable  judgments  on  conclusions  of  rabbinic 
commentators  regarding  the  definitions  of  words. 

The  more  traditionally  Christian  aspects  include  Calvin’s  critique  of  the 
conclusions  of  Jewish  interpreters  and  his  use  of  the  New  Testament  as  a 
guide  to  his  interpretation  of  the  Old.  Calvin  strained  to  affirm  the  New 
Testament’s  use  of  Old  Testament  texts,  and  he  used  Jesus  and  Paul  as 
authoritative  guides  to  understanding  the  Old  Testament.  Anti-Semitism  is 
not  among  the  most  prominent  features  of  Calvin’s  theology  or  his  exegesis. 
However,  Puckett  shows  that  Calvin  held  the  negative  assumptions  typical  of 
his  age.  Calvin  portrayed  Jews  as  blind  to  the  christological  meaning  of 
scripture  because  they  lacked  piety,  and  he  accused  them  of  twisting  the 
scriptures  away  from  true  meanings  willfully  and  even  diabolically. 

In  the  fifth  chapter  Puckett  illustrates  Calvin’s  middle  way  by  examining 
the  troublesome  issues  of  allegory,  typology,  and  prophecy.  In  each  of  these 


378 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


Calvin  approves  less  than  some  Christians,  who  deny  the  historical  reference 
of  the  text,  but  more  than  Jews,  who  deny  its  christological  reference.  In  each 
area  the  question  of  literal  fulfillment  weighs  heavily:  Old  Testament  passages 
that  were  not  fulfilled  literally  or  fully  before  Christ  are  more  open  to 
christological  interpretations.  Some  allegory  is  approved  when  the  literary 
characteristics  of  the  text  require  it.  A great  deal  of  typology  and  predictive 
prophecy  can  be  related  to  Christ  and  his  reign,  though  usually  the  text  must 
be  allowed  to  have  at  least  partial  reference  to  its  own  time. 

Puckett’s  study  is  useful  for  those  interested  in  Calvin’s  biblical  interpreta- 
tion and  how  it  fits  within  the  polemics  of  his  age.  We  see  Calvin  standing 
confidently  in  the  middle  with  his  intellectual  and  spiritual  integrity  intact.  It 
also  provides  a good  window  into  the  sources  of  Reformed  theology.  Puckett 
shows  Calvin’s  priority  on  honest,  open-minded  study  of  scripture,  and  his 
trust  that,  when  studied  rather  than  twisted,  scripture  will  provide  the 
resources  for  the  church’s  doctrinal  reflection. 

Gary  Neal  Hansen 
Princeton  Theological  Seminary 


Morimoto,  Anri  .Jonathan  Edwards  and  the  Catholic  Vision  of  Salvation.  Univer- 
sity Park:  Pennsylvania  State  University  Press,  1995.  Pp.  vii  + 178.  $33.50. 

Anri  Morimoto,  currently  teaching  theology  and  ethics  and  University 
Minister  at  International  Christian  University  in  Tokyo,  is  the  author  of  this 
accessible  and  well-written  study  of  Jonathan  Edwards’  understanding  of 
justification  and  sanctification.  Morimoto  shows  how  Edwards  tried  to  do 
justice  to  the  Pauline  affirmations  that  “we  are  justified  by  faith”  and  that  “in 
Christ  we  are  a new  creation.”  His  thesis  is  that  Edwards  combined  the 
Protestant  concern  that  justification  is  the  work  of  God  with  the  Roman 
Catholic  emphasis  that  God’s  saving  action  produces  an  abiding  change  in  the 
believer,  thus  providing  a unique,  ecumenical  understanding  of  justification 
and  sanctification. 

Morimoto  argues  that  Edwards’  view  is  able  to  preserve  the  meaningfulness 
of  the  Christian  message  while  including  nonbelievers  and  members  of  other 
religions  in  a Christian  understanding  of  the  economy  of  salvation.  The  key  to 
this  lies  in  Edwards’  conception  of  justification  and  sanctification  in  terms  of 
his  dispositional  ontology.  All  this  is  argued  through  a careful  study  of 
Edwards’  understanding  of  conversion,  justification,  and  sanctification,  which 
compares  Edwards  to  classical  and  contemporary  Roman  Catholic  and  Prot- 
estant positions  along  the  way.  The  result  is  a very  readable  and  thought- 


BOOK  REVIEWS 


379 


provoking  study  introducing  one  aspect  of  Edwards’  thought  and  showing  its 
relevance  for  the  present.  Those  used  to  understanding  justification  as  God’s 
paradoxical  acceptance  of  a sinner  will  find  a very  different  view  here. 
Justification  according  to  Edwards  follows  upon  conversion,  in  which  the 
Holy  Spirit  establishes  in  the  person  a new  saving  disposition  of  love  for  God. 
In  justification,  this  new  saving  disposition,  “though  not  counted  as  the 
qualification  for  justification,  is  given  due  recognition.”  For  Edwards  justifica- 
tion is  not  so  much  the  acceptance  of  the  ungodly,  though  it  is  that,  as  God 
crowning  God’s  own  previously  given  gift  of  faith. 

While  he  admirably  shows  how  Edwards  holds  together  many  traditional 
concerns  of  Protestant  and  Roman  Catholic  theology,  Morimoto  does  not 
suggest  how  Edwards’  position  could  be  expressed  today.  How  are  we  to 
understand  the  change  wrought  in  the  believer  in  conversion  by  the  Holy 
Spirit?  If  grace  is  infused  into  the  believer  as  a new  disposition,  where  does  it 
lodge?  Edwards  attempted  to  answer  this  question  in  a realistic  way  with  his 
notion  of  the  new  spiritual  sense,  pointing  to  the  imagination  as  the  place 
where  the  change  of  sanctification  occurs.  Gregory  Baum  and  Garrett  Green 
have  recently  developed  similar  positions,  though  without  reference  to  Ed- 
wards. The  believer  becomes  a new  creation  as  the  symbols  of  the  faith  come 
to  structure  the  imagination,  thus  shaping  the  perception,  judgments,  and 
actions  in  the  world.  It  would  be  worthwhile  to  bring  Edwards  into  this 
contemporary  discussion.  But  even  without  this,  Morimoto  has  succeeded  in 
showing  the  ecumenical  relevance  of  Edwards’  understanding  of  how  God’s 
grace  takes  effect  in  people’s  lives.  Through  this  he  has  contributed  to  the 
understanding  of  Edwards  and  the  Christian  faith. 

Don  Schweitzer 
Wesley  United  Church 
Prince  Albert,  SK 


Gaustad,  Edwin  S.  Sworn  on  the  Altar  of  God:  A Religious  Biography  ofTho??ras 
Jefferson.  Grand  Rapids:  Win.  B.  Eerdmans  Publishing  Co.,  1996.  Pp.  xiv  + 
246.  $15.00. 

Once  again  Edwin  S.  Gaustad  has  demonstrated  that  first-rate  scholarship 
and  sparkling  prose  can  live  together  happily  in  the  same  book.  One  of  the 
premier  historians  of  American  religion  and  a former  guest  professor  at 
Princeton  Seminary,  Gaustad  turns  his  skills  in  Sworn  on  the  Altar  of  God  to 
depicting  the  religion  of  America’s  third  president.  Conventional  wisdom 
often  defines  Jefferson’s  religious  views  in  terms  of  what  he  opposed.  For 


380 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


example,  he  stood  against  efforts  to  breach  what  he  called  “a  wall  of  separation 
between  Church  and  State,”  denied  that  the  doctrines  peculiar  to  individual 
denominations  had  moral  significance  for  the  welfare  of  society  at  large,  and 
railed  privately  against  the  corruptions  with  which  he  believed  Christians  had 
overlaid  the  teachings  of  their  founder.  While  recognizing  and  brilliantly 
illuminating  these  aspects  of  Jefferson’s  thought,  Gaustad  shows  that  there 
was  much  more  to  Jefferson’s  religion  than  negations. 

Shaped  by  the  Enlightenment,  Jefferson’s  faith  centered  on  nature  and 
reason.  Nature,  though  a concept  filled  with  shifting  and  sometimes  contra- 
dictory meanings,  signified  for  Jefferson  primarily  an  orderly,  benevolent 
universe  sustained  by  the  God  who  created  it.  Through  patient  observation, 
reason  discerned  the  laws  of  nature  (thus  of  God,  too),  disclosed  the  path  of 
virtue,  and  permitted  humankind  to  cooperate  with  these  laws  to  build  a 
better  world.  To  realize  the  promise  of  reason,  one  needed  only  to  leave  the 
mind  free  to  investigate,  for  in  Jefferson’s  matchless  phrase,  “truth  is  great 
and  will  prevail  if  left  to  herself.”  The  quest  for  truth  moved  away  from  the 
local  or  provincial  to  the  universal  and  cosmopolitan.  Jefferson  ardently 
believed  that  all  religions,  however  perverted  and  encrusted  with  error,  had  a 
common  essence.  All  alike  taught  the  existence  of  a moral  God,  the  necessity 
of  virtuous  living  in  accord  with  laws  applicable  to  every  place  or  time,  and  a 
future  life  in  which  cosmic  justice  would  reward  people  according  to  their 
moral  desserts.  Jefferson  believed  that  this  simplified  creed  would  serve  as  the 
basis  for  a reformed  Christianity,  and  he  looked  for  the  triumph  of  Unitarian- 
ism.  Although  we  might  style  him  a deist,  Jefferson  considered  himself  a 
Christian,  at  least  according  to  his  understanding  of  Jesus.  He  spent  evenings 
in  the  Executive  Mansion  cutting  and  pasting  portions  of  the  Gospels  to 
create  a condensed  Bible  embodying  what  he  deemed  the  genuine  sayings  of 
Jesus.  It  was  a text  shorn  of  the  miraculous  and  the  mysterious,  a text 
presenting  Jesus  as  a teacher  of  simple  moral  truths  rather  than  as  the  divine 
Son  of  God. 

Jefferson  often  avowed  that  individual  religious  belief  was  of  no  concern  in 
the  public  domain.  “It  does  me  no  injury,”  he  declared,  “for  my  neighbour  to 
say  there  are  twenty  gods,  or  no  god.  It  neither  picks  my  pocket  nor  breaks  my 
leg.”  Yet  as  Gaustad  ably  illustrates,  this  was  not  Jefferson’s  last  word  on  the 
subject.  Although  he  wished  to  exclude  sectarian  dogmas  from  the  civic  realm, 
the  president’s  belief  in  the  self-evidence  of  the  laws  of  nature  and  nature’s 
God  pushed  him  toward  a public  theology  of  sorts.  The  universal  moral  laws 
visible  to  reason’s  eye  provided  the  moral  commitments  that  sustained  shared 
discourse  and  civility  within  society.  Of  all  his  ventures,  his  labors  on  behalf  of 


BOOK  REVIEWS  381 

education  most  clearly  testified  to  his  belief  that  religion,  rightly  understood, 
played  an  essential  role  in  public  life.  Believing  that  an  educated  populace  was 
essential  for  the  success  of  democracy,  he  strove  to  create  in  Virginia  a 
comprehensive  system  of  schooling  from  grammar  schools  to  a university.  All 
sectarian  religion  was,  of  course,  to  be  excluded  from  this  instruction  or  at 
least  relegated  to  its  margins;  but  the  moral  precepts  allegedly  taught  by 
nature  and  reason  were  to  be  an  essential  component  of  a system  designed  to 
produce  virtuous  republicans. 

In  assessing  the  abiding  significance  of  Jefferson’s  legacy,  Gaustad  suggests 
that  the  third  president  has  much  to  teach  us  about  civility  and  the  common 
moral  good  in  an  era  when  “racial,  ethnic,  and  gender  tribalisms”  may  cause 
us  to  wonder  if  the  nation  is  tied  together  “by  something  more  than  a network 
of  interstate  highways.”  Gaustad  also  offers  the  provocative  suggestion  that 
evangelical  Christians  ought  to  take  another  look  at  Jefferson,  for  he  and  their 
spiritual  forebears  may  have  had  more  in  common  than  is  commonly  sup- 
posed. Jefferson  and  many  nineeteenth-century  evangelicals  shared  a passion 
for  republican  values,  an  emphasis  upon  private  and  public  morality,  a 
“spirited  optimism,”  and  a similarly  primitivist  desire  (albeit  differently 
interpreted)  to  repristinate  the  earliest  forms  of  the  Christian  faith. 

In  several  places,  Gaustad  notes  the  inconsistencies  between  Jefferson’s 
soaring  affirmations  and  his  attitudes  toward  slavery.  One  might  wish  that  the 
author  had  explored  this  issue  a bit  further.  But  this  minor  reservation  aside, 
Gaustad  has  produced  in  Sworn  on  the  Altar  of  God  one  of  those  gems 
increasingly  rare  in  scholarly  publishing:  a volume  equally  valuable  to  special- 
ists and  to  beginning  students  of  American  religion  alike. 

James  H.  Moorhead 
Princeton  Theological  Seminary 


Erskine,  Noel  Leo.  King  among  the  Theologians.  Cleveland:  Pilgrim  Press, 
1994.  Pp.  xv  + 208.  $13.95. 

Claiming  that  very  little  attention  has  been  given  to  Martin  Luther  King, 
Jr.  as  a theologian,  the  author  of  this  book  aims  at  providing  a corrective  to 
that  neglect.  His  laudable  endeavour  will  certainly  give  readers  many  impor- 
tant insights  into  the  theological  thought  of  America’s  foremost  twentieth- 
century  theologian. 

In  order  to  demonstrate  the  truth  implied  by  the  title  of  the  book,  King 
among  the  Theologians , Noel  Erskine,  himself  a theologian,  decides  to  place 
King  in  conversation  with  a few  of  the  most  representative  theologians  of  our 


382 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


time.  Thus,  the  first  two  chapters  focus  on  the  two  most  renowned  theolo- 
gians of  King’s  day,  namely,  Paul  Tillich  and  Karl  Barth.  Similarly,  the  third 
chapter  centers  on  James  H.  Cone,  the  most  important  African  American 
theologian  since  King’s  assasination  and  the  progenitor  of  the  Black  Theol- 
ogy Movement.  After  a splendid  constructive  chapter  on  King’s  theology, 
Erskine  discusses  in  an  all  too  brief  chapter  King’s  relation  to  womanist 
theology. 

Although  this  reader  was  a bit  frustrated  in  his  discovery  that  Erskine 
devotes  more  than  half  of  the  book  to  the  perspectives  of  the  above-named 
theologians,  Erskine’s  wisdom  in  doing  so  becomes  clear  in  chapter  5,  where 
he  gives  a splendid,  comprehensive  analysis  of  King’s  theological  perspective. 
Here  we  can  see  the  author’s  methodological  wisdom.  The  analytical  work  of 
the  first  three  chapters  enables  him  to  demonstrate  the  ways  in  which  King 
could  affirm  and  reject  varying  aspects  of  the  theologies  discussed.  Most 
important,  the  reader  is  given  an  excellent,  constructive  analysis  of  King’s  own 
theology,  the  most  distinguishing  characteristics  of  which  are  the  concepts 
love  and  reconciliation.  More  specifically,  Erskine  argues  that  King’s  theology  is 
praxiological.  In  other  words,  King  works  from  within  the  struggles  of 
oppressed  peoples  to  relate  the  Christian  faith  to  their  struggles  for  freedom. 
Thus,  the  claims  of  social  justice  assume  a central  place  in  King’s  theology, 
and  liberation  and  reconciliation,  rather  than  being  contraries,  are  viewed  by 
him  as  necessary  dimensions  of  the  same  process. 

Thus,  King  rightly  places  his  argument  for  nonviolent  resistance  in  that 
context.  The  doctrine  of  reconciliation  designates  God’s  convenantal  relation- 
ship with  the  world,  and  that  covenant  requires  that  the  means  to  liberation  be 
commensurate  with  its  end,  namely,  the  restoration  of  God’s  sovereign  rule 
over  the  world.  Hence,  instruments  of  hate  and  violence  can  never  serve  the 
goal  of  restoring  God’s  covenant  of  love,  justice,  and  peace. 

It  would  seem  that  Erskine’s  argument  is  complete  at  the  end  of  chapter  5. 
Yet  the  author  does  not  end  there.  Rather,  he  introduces  an  abbreviated  sixth 
chapter  on  “King  and  Womanist  Theology.”  Despite  the  accuracy  of  his 
analyses  of  womanist  theologians  Jacqueline  Grant  and  Katie  Cannon,  the 
chapter  has  all  the  marks  of  being  an  addendum  and  does  not  fit  well  into  the 
overall  argument.  Further,  given  the  title  of  the  book,  King  among  the 
Theologians,  does  the  author  really  wish  to  imply  that  King  is  king  among 
womanist  theologians  as  well?  If  he  does,  then  much  more  needs  to  be  said 
about  King’s  contribution  to  womanist  theology  in  order  for  such  a claim  to 
become  palatable. 


BOOK  REVIEWS 


383 


Finally,  both  the  subject  matter  of  the  book  and  Erskine’s  constructive 
argument  concerning  King’s  theology  merit  a more  substantive  conclusion 
than  the  one  he  provides.  Nevertheless,  in  spite  of  these  minor  shortcomings, 
the  book  is  a notable  contribution  to  the  corpus  of  King  scholarship,  and 
theological  scholars  especially  will  be  greatly  helped  by  it. 

Peter  J.  Paris 
Princeton  Theological  Seminary 


Raboteau,  Albert  J.  A Fire  in  the  Bones:  Reflections  on  African-American  Religions 
History.  Boston:  Beacon  Press,  1995.  Pp.  xi  + 224.  $23.00. 

In  this  long-awaited  volume  Albert  J.  Raboteau,  the  Henry  W.  Putnam 
Professor  of  Religion  at  Princeton  University  and  a former  dean  of  Prince- 
ton’s graduate  school,  offers  eleven  insightful  essays  focusing  on  the  religious 
history  of  African  American  peoples.  Seven  of  the  eleven  essays  have  been 
published  previously.  Collectively  these  essays  document  the  persistent  and 
dynamic  faith  that  has  helped  to  shape  African  American  lives,  religious 
institutions,  and  social  ethics.  In  addition,  these  essays  cogently  demonstrate 
how  this  same  faith  gave  African  Americans  the  courage  to  fight  injustice  and 
continue  the  struggle  for  civil  rights  in  the  United  States.  A common  theme 
throughout  is  the  abiding  belief  that  God  is  an  actor  in  all  of  African  American 
history. 

Raboteau  touches  on  a wide  variety  of  African,  European,  and  African 
American  religious  traditions,  topics,  and  concerns.  The  volume  includes 
lucid  and  illuminating  discussions  of  Richard  Allen  and  the  origins  of  the 
African  Methodist  Episcopal  Church  (chapter  4),  black  Catholics  in  the 
United  States  (chapter  6),  the  chanted  sermon  (chapter  7),  and  the  conversion 
experience  itself  (chapter  8),  as  well  as  useful  data  on  Pentecostals,  Baptists, 
Methodists,  and  Orisha- based  religions  in  the  New  World  such  as  Haitian 
Voodoo,  Brazilian  Candomble,  and  Cuban  Santeria.  An  epilogue  presents  an 
elegant  and  heart-felt  testimony  of  the  author’s  own  life  and  spiritual  journey 
as  a black  Catholic. 

Chapter  9 is  a sensitive  and  insightful  comparison  of  the  spiritual  lives  of 
Thomas  Merton  and  Martin  Luther  King,  Jr.  Raboteau  points  out  that  at  the 
time  of  his  assassination  King  had  planned  a retreat  with  Merton  at  Our  Lady 
of  Gethsemani  Abbey.  He  underscores  commonalities  that  would  have  brought 
the  two  men  together.  Both  men’s  lives,  he  contends,  were  changed  by 
unexpected  events;  both  men  converged  on  the  issue  of  civil  rights;  and  both 
men  became  committed  to  nonviolence.  Merton’s  path  and  King’s  path,  the 


384  THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 

author  concludes,  “met  at  the  symbol  of  reconciliation  and  compassion  — the 
cross.” 

Raboteau  argues  forcefully  that  the  history  of  African  American  religions  is 
a history  that  has  value  for  all  Americans.  He  asserts  that  the  “inclusion  of 
African-Americans  and  other  previously  invisible  groups  in  the  history  books 
is  an  extremely  important  development  not  just  for  academic  study  but  for  our 
understanding  of  American  society  and  ultimately  our  understanding  of 
ourselves,  for  history  functions  as  a form  of  self-definition.  In  its  pages  we 
read  ourselves”  (p.  5). 

A Fire  in  the  Bones  is  an  outstanding  contribution  to  African  American 
religious  history.  It  possesses  a unity  of  vision  often  missing  from  volumes  of 
collected  essays  written  over  a period  of  years.  The  essays  are  of  uniform 
quality,  and  the  author  provides  a balanced  treatment  of  his  subject  matter. 
Despite  Raboteau’s  low-key  presentation  and  his  commitment  to  scholarly 
detachment,  these  essays  are  engagingly  written  and  highly  accessible.  His 
prose  is  moving,  especially  as  he  attempts  to  come  to  grips  with  his  own  faith, 
the  faith  of  his  ancestors,  and  the  place  of  Catholicism  within  his  life  and 
scholarship. 

Stephen  D.  Glazier 
University  of  Nebraska 


Isichei,  Elizabeth.  A History  of  Christianity  in  Afi-ica:  From  Antiquity  to  the 
Present.  Grand  Rapids:  Wm.  B.  Eerdmans  Publishing  Co.;  Lawrenceville,  NJ: 
Africa  World  Press,  1995.  Pp.  xi  + 420.  $19.99. 

In  353  pages  of  text  and  fifty-nine  pages  of  notes,  Isichei  succeeds  in  giving 
us  a panoramic  view  of  Christianity  in  Africa,  well  written,  insightful,  and  with 
striking  departures  from  current  historiography  of  the  African  past.  The 
author  provides  a balanced  survey  of  the  three  families  of  Christianity  extant 
in  Africa  touching  even  the  most  recent  versions  often  referred  to  as  “New 
Religious  Movements.”  This  review  will  highlight  what  in  my  judgment  are 
the  elements  often  excluded  or  not  given  enough  space  in  writings  on 
Christianity  in  Africa  currently  available  to  readers  in  Africa. 

The  shift  from  church  history  to  the  history  of  Christianity  allows  many 
actors  hitherto  undocumented  or  used  only  as  foils  and  antagonists  to  play 
more  direct  roles  in  projecting  the  course  of  Africa’s  history.  African  religion 
(traditional)  and  Islam  are  shown  as  forces  that,  together  with  Christianity, 
are  at  work  in  the  lives  of  Africans.  Africa’s  full  size  and  complexity  are 


BOOK  REVIEWS  385 

constantly  kept  in  view  through  the  maps  Isichei  provides  at  crucial  stages  of 
the  survey. 

The  section  of  church  history  usually  designated  “early  church  history” 
and  often  described  as  if  it  were  solely  European  history  is  nuanced  so  that  the 
relevant  sections  that  are  African  are  more  accurately  named  as  such.  This  is 
very  important  because  many  tend  to  forget  that  Christianity  in  Africa 
belongs  to  the  genesis  of  that  religion,  and  others  would  prefer  not  to 
recognize  Christianity  as  an  integral  part  of  Africa’s  history.  The  first  chapter, 
“North  African  Christianity  in  Antiquity,”  speaks  of  St.  Mark  in  Alexandria 
(Egypt)  and  St.  Augustine  in  Hippo  (Tunisia)  and  thus  reminds  us  that 
Africans  and  their  continent  have  known  Christianity  since  its  inception.  We 
are  also  reminded  that  the  Sahara  was  a highway  linking  Mediterranean  Africa 
with  the  rest  of  the  continent,  while  the  Mediterranean  Sea  linked  Africa  with 
Europe,  making  Africa  part  of  the  arena  of  Christian  antiquity.  By  calling 
attention  to  the  vitality  of  monasticism  and  to  the  theological  debates  that 
took  place  in  Africa  during  this  early  period,  Isichei  reinstates  the  factor  of 
religion  in  history,  making  God  the  active  core  of  Africa’s  history. 

The  middle  years  (1500-1800),  often  passed  over  in  studies  of  this  kind,  are 
not  only  germane  but  crucial  to  the  understanding  of  Nilotic  Christianity, 
especially  of  the  ancient  Churches  of  Egypt,  Ethiopia,  and  Nubia  (Sudan), 
which  belong  to  the  Orthodox  family  of  churches.  Here,  as  in  Mediterranean 
Africa,  we  meet  Christianity  and  Islam  vying  for  converts  from  each  other  and 
from  African  religion.  We  see  how  division  in  the  Coptic  Church  in  Egypt 
made  it  easy  for  Islam  to  succeed.  We  come  across  cathedrals  that  were  once 
traditional  African  shrines  and  mosques  that  were  once  cathedrals.  We  are 
reminded  of  “the  fruitless  attempts  of  Western  Christians  to  convert  Mus- 
lims.” Often  ignored  is  the  Latin  (Catholic)  presence  in  the  middle  years, 
which  produced  African  Christian  bishops  and  scholars.  Isichei  has  sketched 
profiles  of  these  pioneer  African  Christians,  some  of  whom  were  said  to  have 
been  missionaries  to  places  beyond  Africa.  She  puts  on  record  African 
churches  that  contributed  to  the  relief  of  people  outside  Africa.  We  are  led 
into  the  experience  of  “ambiguity  and  marginality”  of  converts  to  a faith 
whose  adherents  and  propagators  traded  in  human  beings. 

An  important  contribution  to  the  study  of  Christianity  in  Africa  is  the 
profile  of  African  evangelists.  It  is  a great  service  that  Isichei  lifts  up  the 
agency  of  Africans  in  the  Christianizing  of  Africa,  but  most  significant  is  her 
naming  of  women  and  their  acts.  She  does  not  simply  give  women  a section; 
she  integrates  them  fully.  Eschewing  the  “unconscious  sexism”  that  makes  us 
talk  about  “Church  Fathers,”  she  recalls  that  Carthage  was  founded  by  a 


386 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


woman,  that  Ethiopia’s  identity  is  grounded  in  the  Queen  of  Sheba,  and  that 
thirty-year  old  Hypatia,  the  Neoplatonist  philosopher  and  mathematician, 
was  murdered  by  a Christian  mob.  These  women  come  alive  as  one  reads 
Isichei.  They  are  bound  to  inspire  more  studies  of  women  in  Africa  and 
especially  of  the  contemporary  African  women’s  movements,  which  are  often 
treated  as  if  they  have  no  roots  in  Africa’s  history. 

Another  ground-breaking  vista  opened  in  this  work  is  the  emphasis  given  to 
the  social  location  of  missionaries  to  Africa,  which  is  often  omitted  from  the 
hagiographies  that  pass  for  chronicles  of  achievements  of  Western  missionar- 
ies. There  were  some  saints,  but  there  were  villains  too.  Isichei  does  not  gloss 
over  uncomfortable  facts  like  racism  in  the  church,  rivalry  between  Africans 
and  Euro-American  leaders,  “the  chronic  lack  of  personnel,”  and  the  insecu- 
rity of  Euro-American  career  missionaries. 

A departure  from  current  historiography  of  Africa  that  makes  this  book 
unique  is  the  intentional  citing  of  parallel  phenomena  that  appear  outside 
Africa.  The  author  locates  African  Christianity  in  the  development  of  world 
Christianity.  Packed  congregations,  belief  in  witchcraft  and  magic,  and 
“animistic  worship  of  trees  and  stones”  with  Christianity  as  a veneer  were 
features  common  to  medieval  and  seventeenth-century  Christianity  in  both 
Europe  and  Africa.  Further,  Isichei  illustrates  how  classical  issues  such  as 
religion  and  politics,  church  and  state,  were  manifested  in  Africa,  and  she 
examines  the  role  of  economics,  politics,  and  militarism  in  the  Christianiza- 
tion process.  Descriptions  of  the  relationships  between  colonists,  settlers,  and 
missionaries,  along  with  some  crisp  studies  of  contemporary  African  politi- 
cians, give  the  reader  several  points  with  which  to  connect. 

Isichei  has  demonstrated  a depth  of  understanding  of  Africa  and  African 
history  that  is  remarkable.  Reading  this  book  was  both  elucidating  and 
enjoyable. 

Mercy  Amba  Oduyoye 
Emmanuel  College 
Victoria  Chhversity 


Oduyoye,  Mercy  Amba.  Daughters  of  Anowa:  Afi'ican  Women  and  Patriarchy. 
Maryknoll:  Orbis  Books,  1995.  Pp.  229.  $18.00. 

Critically  plumbing  the  depths  of  the  Akan  and  Yoruba  cultures  and 
histories,  as  well  as  Christian  traditions,  Mercy  Amba  Oduyoye  wends  her 
way  through  the  morass  of  patriarchal  structures  and  customs  — both  native 
and  imported  to  Africa  — and  births  visions  of  new  ways  of  being  for  African 


BOOK  REVIEWS 


387 


women  and  men.  Writing  on  the  basis  of  her  Christian  conviction  that  the 
Christ  event  served  as  a commissioning  of  Jesus’  followers  completely  to 
uproot  “all  limitations  to  the  fullness  of  life,”  Oduyoye  argues  that  it  is 
African  women’s  voices— not  African  men’s— that  must  both  articulate  the 
current  status  of  African  women  and  name  their  vision  of  their  response  to 
God’s  gift  of  fullness  for  their  future.  In  Daughters  of  Anowa,  Oduyoye  lends 
her  voice  to  this  corporate  task. 

To  decipher  the  nature  of  “woman”  in  the  psyche  and  culture  of  Akan  and 
Yoruba  peoples,  Oduyoye  carefully  examines  roles  and  representations  of 
women,  and  manifestations  of  patriarchy,  in  three  “cycles.”  The  first  cycle,  on 
language,  inspects  teachings  about  the  value  and  roles  of  women  as  found  in 
mythical  images,  folktales,  and  proverbs.  Next,  the  relationship  of  Akan  and 
Yoruba  women  to  their  cultures;  to  Western  feminism;  to  familial,  economic, 
political  and  military  power  and  authority;  and  to  religion  are  all  investigated 
in  the  cycle  on  culture.  Particular  attention  is  paid  to  marriage,  procreation, 
and  religion,  as  well  as  to  issues  of  women’s  autonomy.  The  final  cycle, 
“Dreams,”  is  the  point  of  synthesis  where  Oduyoye  draws  on  the  strengths  of 
the  Akan  and  Yoruba  heritages  and  the  normative  core  of  the  Christian  faith 
to  sketch  a vision  of  wholistic  social  human  being  for  African  women. 

While  Oduyoye  is  critical  of  the  oppressive  dimensions  and  interpretations 
of  Christian  traditions  and  the  Akan  and  Yoruba  cultures,  there  is  no  tossing 
out  of  the  baby  with  the  bathwater  here.  Oduyoye’s  study  is  highly  nuanced 
and  finely  balanced;  her  critiques  are  incisive  and  precise.  This  incisive 
precision  enables  her  to  pinpoint  cultural  and  religious  phenomena  that  are 
unjust  while— virtually  simultaneously— locating  alternative,  liberative  phe- 
nomena from  within  the  same  pools  of  religious  and  folk  resources. 

Oduyoye’s  penchant  for  accuracy  is  evident  in  her  refusal  to  make  blithe 
generalizations  about  “Africans”  or  “African  women,”  a practice  not  infre- 
quently indulged  in  by  Western  writers,  as  well  as  some  African  scholars.  She 
is  consistently  careful  to  make  her  claims  with  specific  reference  to  the  two 
ethnic  groups  with  whom  she  is  most  familiar:  the  matrilinial  Akan,  to  which 
she  was  born,  and  the  patriarchal  Yoruba,  into  whose  group  she  married. 
When  Oduyoye  does  suggest  the  generalizability  of  one  of  her  observations, 
she  takes  care  to  justify  the  grounds  on  which  she  does  so.  The  result  is 
prescriptive  analysis  that  is  rooted  in  specificity,  with  sociopolitical  and 
religio-hermeneutical  implications  that  follow  fluidly  from  the  analysis. 

“Anowa”  is  “the  mythical  woman,  prophet,  and  priest  whose  life  of  daring, 
suffering,  and  determination  is  reflected  in  the  continent  of  Africa.”  As  such, 
Oduyoye  considers  Anowa  to  be  Africa’s  ancestress.  Oduyoye’s  vision  for  the 


388 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


daughters  of  Anowa  is  a life  free  of  patriarchy,  wherein  women  will  be  able  to 
fulfill  their  God-given  potential  in  just  religious  and  sociopolitical  community 
with  men.  This  will  involve  not  only  the  replacement  or  revision  of  some 
social  and  political  structures  but  also  the  reinterpretation  or  abandonment  of 
many  folk  proverbs,  tales,  and  myths  that  shape  and  saturate  the  consciousness 
of  so  many  of  Anowa’s  children.  The  churches,  too,  bear  grave  responsibility, 
to  organize  ecclesial  structures  and  engage  in  biblical-interpretive  practices 
that  embody  the  central  Christian  affirmation  of  the  equality  of  all  human 
beings.  On  the  basis  of  her  meticulous  examination  of  folklore,  history,  social 
structures,  and  church  practices,  Oduyoye  offers  some  praxiologically  mean- 
ingful suggestions  as  to  what  changes  are  called  for  and  how  they  can  be 
approached,  and  she  does  so  in  a manner  that  invites  and  welcomes  other 
African  women  to  engage  in  the  dialogue  and  the  work.  Oduyoye’s  is  a project 
done,  ultimately,  in  hope.  As  she  says  in  closing,  “Myth,  history,  and  faith 
agree:  people  can  change.” 

This  book  is  not  only  of  use  to  those  with  a specific  interest  in  Christianity 
in  Africa  or  in  women’s  issues.  Oduyoye’s  project  also  serves  as  a case  study, 
marvelously  illumining  some  of  the  interpenetrating  dynamics  among  reli- 
gion, culture,  and  society. 

Willette  A.  Burgie 
Princeton  Theological  Seminary 


Newbigin,  Lesslie.  Proper  Confidence:  Faith , Doubt , and  Certainty  in  Christian 
Discipleship.  Grand  Rapids:  Wm.  B.  Eerdmans  Publishing  Co.,  1995.  Pp.  105. 
$7.99. 

Seventy-five  years  ago  Karl  Barth  was  pleading  for  the  church  to  acknowl- 
edge the  God  who  is  truly  God,  not  a god  crafted  by  our  own  hands,  inspired 
by  our  own  desires,  molded  by  our  own  longings,  a production  of  our  own 
experience,  but  God  who  is  beyond  our  control,  whose  purpose  for  the  world 
and  for  our  lives  is  revealed  in  the  incarnation,  in  the  life,  passion,  death,  and 
resurrection  of  Jesus  Christ. 

Now,  Lesslie  Newbigen  summons  the  church  to  recover  the  biblical  story, 
to  be  grasped  by  the  truth  about  God  revealed  in  the  Word  made  flesh,  of 
whom  the  prophets  and  apostles  passionately  spoke,  not  the  god  of  the 
philosophers  or  the  mechanics  of  the  Enlightenment  but  the  God  of  Abra- 
ham, Isaac,  and  Jacob,  the  God  of  whom  the  women  testified  breathlessly  on 
Easter  morning,  the  God  who  shatters  all  our  preconceived  notions  of  how 


BOOK  REVIEWS  389 

God  should  be,  the  God  who  takes  a place  alongside  our  broken,  shattered, 
prejudiced,  violent,  fallen  world  and  makes  a home  here. 

This  book  offers  a concise  but  incisive  look  into  the  religion  shaped  since 
the  time  of  the  Enlightenment  by  the  human  mind;  a religion  of  the 
philosophers,  great  and  impressive  but  lacking  the  compelling  power  to 
require  the  radical  obedience  to  which  the  Gospels  summon  the  church  today, 
a religion  inspired  by  the  brilliance  of  Descartes,  marked  by  a polarization 
between  objective  truth  (science)  and  subjective  claims  to  knowledge  (art, 
poetry,  literature,  religion),  a religion  that  shifted  “the  location  of  reliable 
truth  from  the  story  told  in  the  Bible  to  the  eternal  truths  of  reason.” 
Newbigin  brilliantly  explores  how  the  Cartesian  program  has  come  crashing 
against  the  rocks  in  the  age  of  postmodernity,  in  which  there  is  a suspicion  of 
all  claims  to  universal  truth,  where  skepticism  rages  like  a howling  wind 
through  church  and  society,  and  where  the  truth  about  God  is  often  bent  out 
of  shape  in  the  vice  of  deconstruction. 

This  is  an  important  book  for  pastors  and  teachers  serving  in  church 
settings  where  the  temptation  to  soften  the  scandal  of  the  cross  is  present  or 
where  the  good  news,  for  all  its  outward  acceptance,  is  thought  (deep  down)  to 
be  a source  of  embarrassment.  It  is  a book  for  all  of  us  for  whom  a god  who  can 
appeal  to  the  many  religious  winds  that  blow,  a god  who  will  accommodate 
truth  to  the  longings  that  move  the  human  heart,  is  never  far  away.  It  is  a book 
that  takes  seriously  the  mighty  ideas  that  have  been  shaped  by  the  Enlighten- 
ment and  reveals  how  they  have  devastated  the  proclamation  of  the  church,  a 
book  that  beckons  us  to  recover  the  biblical  story,  apart  from  which  Christian 
discipleship  cannot  breathe. 

Lesslie  Newbigin  writes  for  those  who  are  called  to  preach  and  teach,  to 
administer  the  sacraments,  and  to  summon  the  community  of  faith  to  a joyous 
discipleship  that  is  passionate,  humble,  marked  by  hope,  and  vital  for  our 
times  amid  the  many  variations  on  the  theme  of  “God”  that  would  divert  our 
attention  and  devour  our  energies.  The  book  is  beautifully  written,  a powerful 
statement  of  faith  in  God,  whose  incarnation  has  changed  the  nature  of 
human  life  forever  and  whose  call  to  the  church  cannot  be  altered  by  the 
temptation  to  believe  that  the  human  being  is  the  center  of  the  universe. 

Newbigin  challenges  not  only  natural  religion  but  Christian  fundamental- 
ism and  liberalism.  Acknowledging  the  reality  of  doubt  and  the  frailty  of  our 
faith,  Newbigin  affirms  the  ultimate  mystery  and  wonder  of  human  existence. 
That  mystery  and  wonder  have  little  to  do  with  “the  infinity  of  space  and 
time”  and  everything  to  do  with  the  “mystery  of  the  incarnation  and  the  cross, 
of  the  holiness  that  can  embrace  the  sinner,  of  a Lord  who  is  servant,  and  of 


390 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


the  deathless  one  who  can  die.”  With  Augustine,  Newbigin  argues  that  a 
Christian  believes  in  order  to  understand.  Proper  theological  work  begins  with 
the  gospel.  The  gospel  is  the  lens  through  which  we  look  in  order  “to  begin  to 
truly  understand  our  experience  in  the  world.” 

Faith  and  doubt  exist.  They  are  companions.  But  faith,  Newbigin  insists,  is 
always  primary.  Doubt  is  secondary.  Borrowing  from  Bonhoeffer’s  Ethics , 
Newbigin  begins  this  book  with  the  stunning  confession  that  “Faith  alone  is 
certainty.  Everything  but  faith  is  subject  to  doubt.  Jesus  Christ  alone  is  the 
certainty  of  faith.”  To  look  elsewhere  for  certainty,  Newbigin  concludes,  “is 
to  head  for  the  wasteland.” 

Frederick  R.  Trost 
Wisconsin  Conference,  United  Church  of  Christ 


Colby,  Gerard,  with  Charlotte  Dennett.  Thy  Will  Be  Done:  The  Conquest  of  the 
Amazon : Nelson  Rockefeller  and  Evangelism  in  the  Age  of  Oil.  New  York: 
HarperCollins  Publishers,  1995.  Pp.  xvi  + 960.  $35.00. 

This  book,  say  the  authors,  took  eighteen  years  to  research  and  write. 
Readers  who  have  the  tenacity  to  read  the  entire  927  pages  of  text,  appendices, 
and  notes  will  see  why.  Colby  and  Dennett  simply  could  not  bring  themselves 
to  leave  out  anything.  They  first  went  to  the  Amazon  Valley  in  1976  to 
investigate  allegations  being  made  against  missionaries  of  the  Summer  Insti- 
tute of  Linguistics,  better  known  as  the  Wycliffe  Bible  Translators,  allega- 
tions that  they  were  aiding  U.S.  business  interests  in  ways  that  were  destruc- 
tive to  the  indigenous  peoples,  and  that  they  sometimes  acted  as  intelligence 
gatherers  for  the  CIA.  This  initial  probe  eventually  led  Colby  and  Dennett  far 
afield  — how  far  readers  will  quickly  discover— and  after  nearly  two  decades, 
resulted  in  this  massive  work  detailing  the  authors’  findings,  findings  that  will 
not  surprise  those  acquainted  with  some  of  the  questionable  and  sometimes 
seamy  aspects  of  U.S.  involvement  in  Latin  America.  Less  clear,  however,  is 
the  relationship  between  Nelson  Rockefeller  and  the  founder  of  the  Wycliffe 
Bible  Translators,  William  Cameron  Townsend. 

In  many  respects,  no  two  people  could  have  been  more  different.  Rock- 
efeller was  a child  of  privilege,  born  into  exorbitant  wealth,  who  throughout 
his  life  moved  in  the  highest  circles  of  political,  economic,  and  religious 
power.  Townsend,  on  the  other  hand,  came  from  a working-class  family  and 
was  a college  drop-out  who  served  briefly  as  a “faith”  missionary  in  Central 
America  before  deciding  that  his  calling  was  to  give  the  Bible  to  every  tribal 
group  in  the  world  in  their  own  language.  Through  faith,  dogged  determina- 


BOOK  REVIEWS 


391 


tion,  and  opportunism,  he  founded  in  1934  what  became  the  largest  indepen- 
dent missionary  agency  in  the  world. 

Colby  and  Dennett’s  conclusions,  though  unambiguous,  are  debatable. 
While  not  totally  negative  toward  the  missionaries,  the  authors  obviously 
believe  that  contacting,  evangelizing,  educating,  and  attempting  to  integrate 
isolated  tribal  peoples  into  their  national  societies  and  cultures  are  not  in  their 
best  interests.  Neither  is  providing  them  with  Bibles  in  their  own  languages, 
for  usually,  the  authors  assert,  this  is  followed  by  indoctrination  to  make  them 
submissive  to  governments,  even  governments  that  are  oppressive  or  geno- 
cidal.  Multinational  business  expansion  into  Latin  America  is  likewise  delete- 
rious because  it  destroys  indigenous  lives  and  cultures.  Finally,  since  World 
War  II,  a vast  strategy  has  been  in  place  to  bring  all  of  Latin  America,  along 
with  other  parts  of  the  world,  into  the  capitalist  orbit  regardless  of  the 
ecological  consequences  or  the  cost  in  human  life.  Nelson  Rockefeller  and 
William  Cameron  Townsend,  Colby  and  Dennett  maintain,  were  active 
promoters  of  this  strategy. 

Few  will  fault  the  benevolent  intention  of  the  authors  to  protect  indigenous 
peoples  from  exploitation  and  extermination.  Neither  should  readers  fail  to  be 
impressed  by  the  incredible  amount  of  research  Colby  and  Dennett  have 
done.  Their  case  has  merit  and  is  passionately  argued,  but  their  inferences  at 
points  are  forced  if  not  fabricated.  Moreover,  they  see  little  if  any  good  in 
what  Rockefeller  or  Townsend  accomplished.  In  terms  of  the  overall  record, 
other  than  mountains  of  detail,  the  book  discloses  little  new  about  Latin 
America,  Rockefeller,  or  Townsend. 

The  story  nonetheless  is  fascinating  and  engrossing,  albeit  entirely  too  long 
and  cluttered  with  minutiae.  The  authors  simply  try  to  cover  too  much 
territory  and  are  in  fact  all  over  the  map.  For  example,  no  scandal  in  U.S. 
politics  is  omitted.  Franklin  Roosevelt’s  infidelity,  Watergate,  and  Iran- 
Contra  are  all  dragged  into  the  story.  Likewise,  Rockefeller’s  and  Townsend’s 
actions  are  routinely  portrayed  as  crass  examples  of  self-interest,  calculation, 
or  intrigue,  whether  it  is  a program  of  dispensing  medicines  along  the 
Amazon  or  teaching  indigenous  people  to  read.  Furthermore,  Colby  and 
Dennett  see  conspiracies  everywhere,  from  the  establishment  of  the  Wycliffe 
JAARS  base  in  Waxhaw,  North  Carolina,  to  Rockefeller’s  agricultural  pro- 
grams in  Venezuela  and  Brazil.  Not  a little  distracting  are  the  mistakes  made 
in  names,  places,  and  events,  as  well  as  certain  inexplicable  oversights. 

Unquestionably,  the  book  merits  reading  by  anyone  seriously  interested  in 
the  history  of  Latin  America  during  the  last  fifty  years,  particularly  those 
concerned  with  the  role  of  Protestant  missionaries,  but  what  the  authors  say 


392 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


would  be  more  persuasive  — diough  not  necessarily  more  widely  read  — were 
the  text  less  an  expose  and  more  a focused  recounting  and  impartial  analysis  of 
that  history. 

Alan  Neely 
Princeton  Theological  Seminary 


Soards,  Marion  L.  Scripture  and  Homosexuality:  Biblical  Authority  and  the 
Church  Today.  Louisville:  Westminster  John  Knox  Press,  1995.  Pp.  x + 84. 
$9.99. 

Marion  L.  Soards,  Professor  of  New  Testament  Studies  at  Louisville 
Presbyterian  Theological  Seminary,  has  undertaken  in  this  book  to  argue  for 
an  ecclesiastical  judgment  on  the  place  of  homosexuality  in  the  church  based 
on  what  he  calls  a Reformed  understanding  of  scripture.  For  him  the 
cornerstone  is  the  authority  of  scripture,  as  defined  in  various  confessions 
(which  he  liberally  cites)  of  the  Reformed  Church.  The  author  knows,  of 
course  that  scripture  means  interpreted  scripture  and  that  interpretation 
requires  a basic  perspective,  which  he  calls  a “standard.”  For  him  the  basic 
standard  is  “Jesus  Christ  himself.”  What  that  can  mean  is  not  very  clearly 
stated,  but  Soards  will  return  to  that  standard  later  in  his  argument. 

The  author  discusses  succinctly  the  few  scriptural  passages  that  are  relevant 
for  the  issue  but  finally  leans  on  Romans  1:26-27  as  the  decisive  text.  His 
general  conclusion  is  sharply  stated:  “Homosexual  activity  is  not  consistent 
with  the  will  of  God  . . . and  there  is  no  way  to  read  the  Bible  as  condoning 
homosexual  acts”  (p.  24).  At  this  point  Soards  returns  to  his  “standard”  of 
interpretation,  “Jesus  Christ  himself,”  which  now  seems  to  mean  the  teaching 
of  the  historical  Jesus.  While  Jesus  made  no  judgment  on  homosexuality,  he 
does  express,  in  the  pericope  on  divorce  (Mark  10:2-9),  views  that  lead  the 
author  to  conclude  that,  from  Jesus’  perspective,  “Marital  heterosexual  unions 
and  abstinence  from  sexual  involvement  are  the  options  for  human  sexual 
behavior  that  accord  with  the  will  of  God”  (p.  29). 

The  author  boldly  takes  on  other  points  of  view  that  would  ameliorate  his 
single-minded  conclusion.  He  rejects  John  Boswell’s  reading  of  church 
history.  He  rejects  my  arguments  about  the  Greco-Roman  cultural  context. 
Similarly,  he  rejects  Victor  Paul  Furnish’s  suggestion  that,  had  Paul  known 
what  we  now  know,  the  Apostle  might  have  expressed  himself  differently.  The 
matter  is  ultimately  very  simple.  For  one  who  accepts  the  authority  of 
scripture,  the  univocal  (a  word  he  uses  several  times)  rejection  of  homosexual 


BOOK  REVIEWS 


393 


acts  is  enough  to  settle  the  issue.  Homosexuals  may  be  admitted  to  the  church 
(God  accepts  all  sinners),  but  practicing  homosexuals  should  not  be  ordained. 

I think  it  is  fair  to  the  author’s  intent  to  suggest  that  in  his  book  he 
summarizes  the  arguments,  as  he  sees  them,  from  the  Reformed  tradition. 
There  is  little  that  is  new  (what  can  one  do  in  eighty-four  pages?).  The  value  of 
the  monograph  lies  in  its  summary  character,  w ritten  from  the  standpoint  of  a 
professional  scholar.  It  will  be  read  with  joy  by  those  who  accept  his 
conclusions. 

For  those  wrho  disagree,  there  is,  again,  little  newr  that  can  be  brought  to 
bear.  Everything  has  been  said  over  and  over.  At  the  cost  of  repeating, 
however,  I point  out  to  the  reader  some  places  where  it  seems  there  are 
slippery  slopes. 

(1)  To  appeal  to  Jesus  Christ  as  the  perspective  from  which  scripture 
should  be  viewed  is  tricky,  since  it  is  only  through  scripture  that  Jesus  Christ  is 
known  (apart  from  claims  to  present  experience).  It  is,  in  fact,  a circular 
argument.  Furthermore,  to  read  out  of  the  pericope  on  divorce  (assuming  it  is 
authentic  Jesus  material)  the  sweeping  conclusions  Soards  does  is  not,  I think, 
very  careful  exegesis. 

(2)  I can  only  be  disappointed  by  the  superficial  manner  with  w'hich  the 
author  deals  with  my  discussions  about  the  model  of  pederasty.  It  is  not 
apparent  that  he  understands  the  significance  of  howr  models  function.  His 
attempted  counterexample  of  Julius  Caesar,  taken  from  Suetonius,  actually 
strengthens  rather  than  weakens  my  argument. 

(3)  Finally,  I return  to  a very  old  argument.  There  are  many  issues  about 
which  the  New  Testament  is  very  sure  and  univocal,  that  the  church  blithely 
(and  no  doubt  correctly)  ignores.  As  far  as  I know,  there  is  no  counterclaim  in 
the  New  Testament  to  Paul’s  contention  that  female  worship  leaders  should 
wear  something  on  their  heads.  That  is  univocal  New  Testament  witness. 
Granted,  that  is  a trivial  counterexample;  but  it  highlights  the  question  of  the 
logic  one  uses,  and  to  pay  attention  to  the  logic  of  arguments  is  not  trivial. 

Robin  Scroggs 
Union  Theological  Seminary 


Cooper- White,  Pamela.  The  Cry  of  Tamar:  Violence  against  Women  and  the 
Church's  Response.  Minneapolis:  Fortress  Press,  1995.  Pp.  xiv  + 334.  $19.00. 

Pamela  Cooper- White  offers  the  reader  a comprehensive  look  at  the  issue 
of  violence  against  women  in  contemporary  culture.  Her  aim  in  writing  this 
book  is  twofold:  to  educate  those  who  seek  to  learn  more  about  violence 


394 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


against  women,  and  to  advocate  for  institutional  and  pastoral  strategies  that 
utilize  both  theology  and  theory  to  evoke  change. 

In  the  first  section  Cooper- White  frames  the  issue  by  positing  a power 
model  of  male  domination  over  females  as  operative  in  this  culture,  a 
“power-over”  model  that  originates  from  loss  of  connection  with  the  world 
and  other  human  beings.  This  loss  of  relationality  lies  at  the  center  of  violence 
against  women.  In  the  second  section  Cooper- White  focuses  on  “one  central 
cluster  of  abuses”  traced  back  to  the  patriarchal  imbalance  of  power  that 
forces  women  into  positions  of  vulnerability.  She  describes  a spectrum  of 
violence,  beginning  with  an  exploration  of  the  connection  between  pornogra- 
phy and  violence  against  women,  proceeding  to  an  examination  of  sexual 
harassment,  rape,  battering,  clergy  sexual  abuse,  child  sexual  abuse,  and 
ending  with  an  assessment  of  ritualistic  abuse.  The  final  section  offers 
suggestions  to  pastors  and  churches  on  how  effectively  to  advocate  for  victims 
of  abuse,  as  well  as  how  best  to  minister  to  abusers  themselves. 

The  first  two  sections  offer  prolonged  and  sometimes  wandering  accounts 
of  theological,  psychological,  legal,  and  cultural  perspectives  on  the  position 
of  women  in  a misogynist  world.  Whiile  Cooper-  White’s  task  was  to  organize 
into  one  work  the  various  strands  of  the  violence-against-women  movements, 
the  text  often  becomes  weighed  down  with  extraneous  and  disparate  informa- 
tion. She  relies  on  standard  traditional  feminist  arguments  of  power  and 
female  positionality  while  omitting  more  recent  feminist  scholarship  on 
female  desire,  the  history  of  the  body,  psychoanalysis,  and  subjectivity. 
Cooper- White  operates  on  the  absolute  truth  of  the  assumption  that  the 
power  differential  between  men  and  women  is  a given,  always  fraught  with 
danger.  Relegated  to  a footnote  are  several  more  interesting  and  complex 
theories  of  power  through  which  Cooper-White  could  have  examined  male 
violence.  By  employing  the  “power-over”  model  she  leaves  her  position 
vulnerable  to  charges  of  oversimplification.  Also,  readers  may  wonder  at  her 
glossing  over  of  some  crucial  theological  issues  that  impact  women’s  lives  in 
churches  and  seminaries.  One  such  example  is  her  unwillingness  to  engage  the 
theory  that  suffering  can  be  redemptive.  Surely  this  issue  raises  crucial 
questions  around  the  importance  of  the  atonement  and  Christology.  Such 
powerful  images  deserve  more  space. 

In  spite  of  these  shortcomings,  the  first  two  sections  offer  help  for  those 
with  little  previous  knowledge  of  theological  or  secular  literature  on  violence 
against  women.  While  Cooper- White’s  arguments  may  often  be  too  simplis- 
tic, and  her  profiles  of  people  at  risk  as  abusers  or  abused  too  general,  she 


BOOK  REVIEWS 


395 


presents  enough  valid  information  for  readers  to  begin  effectively  to  analyze 
violence  and  its  patterns. 

It  is  in  the  third  section  that  the  book  takes  off  and  Cooper- White’s  own 
skills  as  a priest  and  pastoral  counselor  come  to  the  fore.  She  opens  with 
caveats  to  the  “wounded  healers”  who  seem  to  occupy  the  ministry  in  such 
high  percentages.  Her  advice  is  beautifully  simple,  a mixture  of  common 
sense,  astute  psychology,  sound  theology,  and  deep  spirituality.  “Know  your 
limits,”  she  warns— solid  advice  to  the  newcomer  as  well  as  to  the  old  pro.  She 
includes  immediate  crisis  response  to  sexual  assaults  and  suicides,  with 
guidelines  for  counseling  beyond  the  emergency.  These  guidelines  alone 
make  it  necessary  to  keep  this  book  within  reach  of  any  ministerial  hand.  She 
also  details  the  differences  between  pastoral  care  and  psychotherapy,  a must 
read  for  anyone  who  finds  her/himself  in  the  position  of  pastoral  counselor. 
Included  in  this  section  is  a concept  that  challenges  many  Christian  sensibili- 
ties. Here  Cooper-White  takes  the  reader  “beyond  an  ethic  of  instant 
forgiveness”  and  reconsiders  turning  the  other  cheek.  She  reminds  us  that 
forgiveness  is  a gift  of  grace.  Until  there  is  “reconciliation”  and  thorough 
change,  forgiveness  need  not  happen. 

Seminarians,  pastors,  pastoral  counselors,  and  facilitators  of  church  groups 
will  find  this  book  quite  useful.  Although  one  may  have  to  wade  through  long 
introductory  sections,  the  end  rewards  are  substantial. 

Maureen  A.  Wallin 
Drew  University 


Shupe,  Anson.  In  the  Name  of  All  That's  Holy:  A Theory  of  Clergy  Malfeasance. 
Westport:  Prager,  1995.  Pp.  xii  + 173.  $52.95. 

Anson  Shupe,  Professor  of  Sociology  at  the  joint  campus  of  Indiana  State 
University-Purdue  University  at  Fort  Wayne,  is  author  of  numerous  books 
and  articles  on  family  violence,  religious  movements,  and  criminology/ 
deviance  theory  as  applied  to  religion.  His  focus  in  this  book  is  clergy 
malfeasance,  and  his  method  is  application  of  deviance  theory  to  this  phenom- 
enon. By  “clergy  malfeasance”  he  means  “the  exploitation  and  abuse  of  a 
religious  group’s  believers  by  the  elites  of  that  religion  in  whom  the  former 
trust.”  The  types  of  malfeasance  that  most  interest  him  are  instances  where 
clergy  have  misused  funds  or  engaged  in  acts  of  sexual  exploitation.  As  a 
sociologist,  not  a psychologist  of  religion,  he  does  not  discuss  what  may 
predispose  individual  clergy  to  exploit  and  abuse  the  trust  vested  in  them. 


396 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


Instead,  his  interest  is  “structural”  issues,  the  institutional  aspects  of  clergy 
malfeasance. 

He  focuses  on  power  and  specifically  on  the  fact  that  power  is  unequally 
distributed  in  every  organization.  This  power  inequality  is  complicated  in  the 
case  of  religious  organizations  because  they  are  “trusted  hierarchies”  in  which 
“those  occupying  lower  statuses  . . . trust  and  believe  in  the  good  intentions, 
nonselfish  motives,  benevolence,  and  spiritual  insights/wisdom  of  those  in  the 
upper  echelons  (and  often  are  encouraged  or  admonished  to  do  so).”  Thus, 
paradoxically,  religious  organizations,  as  “trusted  hierarchies,”  offer  special 
“opportunity  structures”  for  potential  exploitation  and  abuse.  Rather  than 
attributing  clergy  malfeasance  to  the  fact  that  there  are  “a  few  bad  apples  in 
every  bushel,”  Shupe  argues  that  “the  nature  of  trusted  hierarchies  systemati- 
cally provides  opportunities  and  rationales  for  such  deviance  and,  indeed, 
makes  deviance  likely  to  occur.” 

He  distinguishes  two  types  of  religious  organizations,  hierarchical  (with 
episcopal  and  presbyterian  subtypes)  and  congregational.  Hierarchical  organi- 
zations have  relatively  more  levels  of  accountability  than  congregational 
organizations.  This  distinction  is  his  primary  unit  of  analysis  throughout  the 
book.  Thus,  in  discussing  the  problem  of  recidivism  he  offers  these  proposi- 
tions: (ia)  Hierarchical  groups  promote  more  long-term  recidivism  of  clergy 
malfeasance  than  do  congregational  groups,  but  (ib)  hierarchical  groups 
ultimately  do  better  in  discouraging  normalization  of  clergy  malfeasance  than 
do  congregational  groups. 

In  other  words,  the  offender  is  able  to  get  away  with  it  longer  in  a 
hierarchical  group,  but  the  hierarchical  group  is  less  disposed  to  view  these 
activities  as  acceptable  behavior.  For  example,  the  Roman  Catholic  Church 
(hierarchical)  has  systematically  protected  its  malfeasant  priests  but  has  not 
accepted  their  actions  as  “normal”  or  “acceptable.”  In  contrast,  the  elite  in 
pentecostal  groups,  new  religious  movements,  and  televangelism  (congrega- 
tional) are  more  vulnerable  to  sudden  disclosures  leading  to  mass  defections 
but  are  more  successful  in  persuading  their  members  or  supporters  that  what 
the  world  calls  “deviant  behavior”  is  a higher  form  of  spirituality. 

In  discussing  the  fact  that  religious  elites  try  to  “neutralize”  victims’ 
complaints,  Shupe  offers  these  propositions:  (2a)  Hierarchical  groups  pro- 
vide greater  opportunities  for  neutralization  of  clergy  malfeasance  than  do 
congregational  groups,  but  (2b)  hierarchical  groups  ultimately  are  more 
likely  to  develop  policies  addressing  clergy  malfeasance  than  are  congrega- 
tional groups.  In  other  words,  there  are  more  ways  in  which  cover-ups  may  be 
employed  in  hierarchical  groups,  but  in  the  end  hierarchical  groups  are  more 


BOOK  REVIEWS 


397 


likely  to  develop  policies  for  controlling  clergy  malfeasance.  Methods  of 
neutralization  (or  cover-up)  include  bureaucratic  inertia,  sentimentality,  “re- 
assurance and  reconciliation,”  bargaining,  and  intimidation. 

In  discussing  the  fact  that  organizational  polity  is  an  important  factor  in 
whether  victims  will  succeed  in  having  their  grievances  redressed,  Shupe 
offers  these  propositions:  (3a)  Victims  in  hierarchical  groups  tend  to  experi- 
ence more  ambivalence  and  reluctance  to  whistle-blow  about  their  abuse  than 
those  in  congregational  groups,  but  (3b)  victims  in  hierarchical  groups  are 
more  likely  to  become  empowered  to  focus  their  grievances  on  group-specific 
reforms  than  those  in  congregational  groups.  His  point  here  is  that  hierarchi- 
cal groups  are  less  permeable  to  grievances,  as  there  are  various  levels  of 
authority  that  a victim  needs  to  confront,  and  each  of  these  levels  is  strongly 
motivated  to  neutralize  the  complaint  (to  do  “damage  control”)  so  that  the 
complaint  does  not  reach  the  next  organizational  level.  On  the  other  hand, 
hierarchical  organizations  provide  “paradoxical”  advantages,  first  to  elites  but 
ultimately  to  their  victims,  as  victims  eventually  “obtain  a structural  focus  for 
redress  that  aids  their  mobilization  of  grievances.” 

Shupe  distinguishes  between  “primary  victimization,”  or  the  immediate 
realization  one  has  been  exploited  or  abused,  and  “secondary  victimization,” 
the  long-term  consequences  of  primary  victimization.  Common  to  the  former 
are  feelings  of  ambivalence,  fear,  guilt,  and  shame,  while  typical  of  the  latter  is 
the  suppression  (or  in  some  cases  repression)  of  emotional  pain.  Victim 
mobilization,  a third  response,  involves  redressing  injuries  and  wrongs  and  is 
more  common  among  hierarchical  than  congregational  groups.  One  reason 
for  this  is  that  hierarchical-group  members  are  more  likely  to  believe  that  the 
group  to  which  they  belong  is  their  only  choice,  so  they  choose  redress  rather 
than  defection.  The  episcopal  type  of  hierarchical  organization  is  more  likely 
to  retreat  to  formal  guidelines  or  procedure,  protocol,  and  legality,  whereas  in 
presbyterian  hierarchical  organizations  the  initial  neutralization  attempts  by 
elites  are  more  likely  to  inspire  efforts  to  redress,  and  such  grass-roots  redress 
activities  become  institutionalized. 

Much  of  his  discussion  of  victims  focuses  on  children  who  have  been 
sexually  abused  by  Catholic  priests  and  adult  women  who  have  had  non- 
consensual  relations  with  Protestant  clergy.  Like  Fortune,  LeBacqz  and 
Barton,  Cooper- White  and  others,  Shupe  contends  that  “consent”  cannot  be 
present  when  there  is  a power  imbalance,  which  is  invariably  the  case  in 
pastor-parishioner  relations.  He  also  considers  the  victimization  suffered  by 
the  clergyman’s  family  (noting  the  expectation  that  his  wife  will  “forgive  and 
forget  with  the  best  of  the  congregation,  an  extension  of  her  expected  role  as 


398 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


his  primary  supporter”)  and  by  the  congregation  itself,  a volatile  situation  that 
is  likely  to  create  future  victims,  as  such  congregations  often  become  locked 
into  complementary  and  destructive  conflict  with  successor  clergy. 

By  viewing  clergy  malfeasance  as  deviant  behavior  made  possible  by  the 
very  fact  that  religious  institutions  are  “trusted  hierarchies,”  Shupe  shows 
that  the  “a  few  bad  apples  in  every  bushel”  explanation  is  itself  a rationaliza- 
tion in  behalf  of  the  institution  and  its  trusted  image.  His  theory  also  explains 
why  clergy  malfeasance  is  more  scandalous  than  similar  malfeasance  in  other 
institutions  (as  religious  organizations  are  “trusted  hierarchies”)  and  why 
religious  institutions  are  so  slow  to  hear  and  redress  grievances  (as  preserva- 
tion of  their  “trusted  hierarchy”  status  encourages  denial  and  efforts  to 
suppress  the  charges).  But  this  leads  to  still  another  paradox  that  Shupe  does 
not  explicitly  identify,  namely,  the  fact  that  when  the  elite  close  ranks  behind 
the  clergy  offender  in  order  to  maintain  membership  trust,  it  thereby  damages 
trust  by  seeming  to  condone  behavior  that  it  would  otherwise  denounce. 
Moreover,  the  unscrupulous  offender  may  thereby  play  the  institutional  elite 
and  his  victims  off  one  another.  Normalization  of  his  conduct  is  officially 
rejected  but  recidivism  is  subtly  encouraged. 

Shupe  goes  further  than  most  writers  on  clergy  malfeasance  in  addressing 
the  structural  issues  involved.  Because  he  does,  his  book  breaks  important  new 
ground  on  this  vexing  and  volatile  issue.  However,  his  theory  is  strongest  in  its 
exposure  of  institutional  bureaucracies.  It  is  less  effective  in  explaining  why 
clergy  malfeasance  occurs  in  some  local  congregations  and  not  in  others.  Is 
this  due  entirely  to  psychological  factors,  or  is  there  something  structural 
going  on  here  as  well?  Do  some  congregations  provide  greater  opportunities 
for  neutralization  of  clergy  malfeasance  than  others?  It  should  not  be  too 
difficult  to  study  congregations  where  clergy  malfeasance  has  and  has  not 
occurred,  and  to  determine  whether  the  primary  methods  of  neutralization 
(inertia,  sentimentality,  pseudo-reconciliation,  bargaining,  and  intimidation) 
are  more  typical  of  the  ways  that  the  former  regularly  function. 

Donald  Capps 
Princeton  Theological  Seminary 


REVIEW  ARTICLE 


Koester,  Helmut.  Ancient  Christian  Gospels:  Their  History  and  Development. 
Philadelphia:  Trinity  Press  International,  1990.  Pp.  xxxii  + 448.  $19.95. 

Schneemelcher,  Wilhelm,  and  R.  McL.  Wilson,  eds.  New  Testament  Apocry- 
pha. Rev.  ed.  2 vols.  Louisville:  Westminster  John  Knox  Press,  1991-92.  Pp. 
560;  771.  $32.00;  $40.00. 

Elliott,  J.  K.  The  Apoayphal  New  Testament:  A Collection  of  Apocryphal  Christian 
Literature  in  an  English  Translation.  Oxford:  Clarendon  Press,  1993.  Pp.  xxv  + 
747.  $45.95. 

Where  can  one  obtain  insight  regarding  what  is  reliably  a New  Testament 
apocryphal  or  pseudepigraphical  work?  The  search  begins  with  the  definition 
of  such  a corpus.  A working  definition  seems  to  be  the  following:  The  New 
Testament  Apocrypha  and  Pseudepigrapha  is  a modern  collection  of  writings 
that  were  composed  before  the  end  of  the  fourth  century,  when  there  was  not 
yet  an  accepted  definition  of  orthodoxy,  heresy,  or  canon;  they  were  usually 
written  in  imitation  of  the  documents  eventually  considered  canonical;  hence, 
the  New  Testament  Apocrypha  and  Pseudepigrapha  contains  letters  (or 
epistles),  gospels,  acts,  and  apocalypses.  Fortunately,  now  is  an  opportune 
time  to  assess  what  is  available.  I shall  focus  on  three  major  publications  that 
have  appeared  this  decade:  Ancient  Christian  Gospels  (1990),  New  Testament 
Apocrypha  (1992),  and  The  Apoctyphal  New  Testament  (1993). 

Ancient  Christian  Gospels  (1990).  The  John  H.  Morison  Professor  of  New 
Testament  fitudies  and  the  Winn  Professor  of  Ecclesiastical  History  at 
Harvard  Divinity  School,  Helmut  Koester,  is  famous  for  his  insistence  that 
Christian  origins  must  not  be  reconstructed  with  only,  or  primarily,  the 
canonical  writings  in  mind.  He  has  argued  since  the  early  sixties  that  some 
so-called  apocryphal  writings  are  early  and  independent  of  the  New  Testa- 
ment works.  For  example,  he  claims  that  the  Gospel  of  Thomas  is  not 
dependent  on  the  canonical  Gospels;  it  often  preserves  sayings  of  Jesus  as 
early  and  reliable  as  those  in  the  Synoptics  and  John.  In  Ancient  Christian 
Gospels,  Koester  argues  persuasively  that  the  Gospel  of  Thomas  was  composed 
in  eastern  Syria.  Most  important— in  contrast  to  R.  M.  Grant  and  E. 
Haenchen,  who  brand  it  heretical  and  reject  it  as  a fabrication  — he  contends 
that  the  tradition  of  Jesus’  sayings  in  the  Gospel  of  Thomas  predates  the 
canonical  Gospels.  The  author  of  this  work  “was  certainly  not  trying  to 
compose  a ‘gospel’  of  the  type  that  is  known  from  the  Gospels  of  the  New 
Testament”  (p.  80),  and  the  sequence  of  sayings  is  “most  puzzling”  (p.  81).  In 


400 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


light  of  the  penchant  among  many  scholars  to  view  the  Gospel  of  Thomas  only 
with  an  eye  on  the  Synoptics,  Koester  shows  how  important  it  is  for  an 
interpretation  of  the  Gospel  of  John.  He  argues  that  in  certain  passages 
Thomas  and  John  preserve  early  traditions  about  Jesus,  which  each  developed 
in  often  strikingly  different  ways. 

Koester  demonstrates  that  originally  “gospel”  ( euangelion ) denoted  not  a 
literary  genre  but  the  message  of  salvation  (i  Thess.  3:6;  1 Cor  1:17;  15:1-15; 
cf.  Acts  15:7;  20:24).  He  shows  that  the  titles  of  the  “Gospels”  were  clarified 
only  in  the  late  second  century  (a  claim  that  will  be  debated  by  experts, 
notably  M.  Hengel)  and  that  none  of  the  Nag  Hammadi  “gospels”  were 
designated  by  their  authors  with  this  term. 

Koester’s  book  begins  with  an  examination  of  the  development  of  “gospel” 
from  oral  preaching,  through  “memoirs  of  the  apostles,”  to  a literary  genre. 
After  examining  collections  of  Jesus’  sayings  (in  Paul  and  the  postapostolic 
writings,  the  Gospel  of  Thomas,  and  Q),  he  traces  the  development  of  gospel 
dialogues  from  the  Dialogue  of  the  Savior  through  the  miracle  catenae  to  the 
Gospel  of  John.  He  then  studies  the  Synoptic  Gospels  in  light  of  such 
compositions  as  the  Secret  Gospel  of  Mark  and  the  Proto-Gospel  of  James. 
He  concludes  by  exploring  the  origin  of  Gospel  harmonies,  which  do  not 
appear  for  the  first  time  with  Tatian  (who  composed  the  Diatessaron  in 
Syriac)  but  can  be  traced  back  through  Justin  Martyr  to  harmonizations  in 
Matthew  and  Luke.  Particularly  appealing  is  Koester’s  full  view  of  Christian 
origins,  his  recognition  that  we  must  be  sensitive  to  the  ways  many  early 
Christians  revered  writings  that  Western  culture  eventually  rejected  or 
ignored,  his  perception  of  the  significance  of  Eastern  Christianity,  and  his 
appreciation  of  Thomas  and  his  importance  in  the  development  of  Christian- 
ity. 

New  Testament  Apocrypha  (1992).  After  the  fervent  interest  in  early  sources 
and  the  intermittent  excitement  with  the  discovery  of  such  treasures  as  Codex 
Sinaiticus,  Syrus  Sinaiticus,  the  Didache,  and  the  Oxyrhynchus  Papyri,  the 
need  was  felt  for  a handy  edition  of  the  New  Testament  Apocrypha.  A 
scholarly  yet  convenient  collection  of  translations  was  required.  This  was 
supplied  by  Edgar  Hennecke  in  1904,  and  a subsequent  edition  was  edited  by 
Wilhelm  Schneemelcher  of  Bonn  University  and  translated  into  English  by 
R.  McL.  Wilson  of  the  University  of  St.  Andrews  in  Scotland.  In  1989  the 
fifth  edition  of  volume  two  and  in  1990  the  sixth  edition  of  volume  one 
appeared  in  German.  They  were  edited  by  Schneelmelcher  alone,  since 
Hennecke  had  died  in  1951,  and  were  then  edited  and  translated  into  English 
by  R.  McL.  Wilson. 


REVIEW  ARTICLE 


401 


The  first  volume  contains  the  so-called  apocryphal  gospels  and  related 
writings.  It  also  presents  a general  introduction  that  discusses  the  time  in 
which  these  apocryphal  works  were  composed  and  the  processes,  sociological 
and  theological,  that  led  to  a closed  canon.  Of  considerable  interest  to  pastors 
and  laypersons  will  be  the  discussions  not  only  of  unknown  and  lost  gospels 
but  also  of  “gospels”  attributed  to  Jesus’  disciples  and  people  linked  with  him 
according  to  the  canonical  Gospels,  notably  introductions  to  and  translations 
of  the  following:  the  Secret  Gospel  of  Mark,  the  Gospel  of  Thomas,  the 
Gospel  of  Philip,  the  Gospel  of  Peter,  the  Gospel  of  the  Twelve  Apostles,  the 
Gospel  of  the  Seventy,  the  Gospel  According  to  Matthias,  the  Gospel  of 
Judas,  the  Gospel  of  Bartholomew,  the  Gospel  of  Mary,  the  Protevangelium 
of  James,  the  Gospel  of  Nicodemus,  the  Gospel  of  Pseudo-Matthew,  and  the 
Gospel  of  Gamaliel.  Sections  on  the  infancy  and  on  the  passion  of  Jesus,  as 
well  as  on  the  relatives  of  Jesus,  are  full  of  data  important  for  an  understanding 
of  Christian  origins. 

The  second  volume  presents  introductions  to  and  translations  of  docu- 
ments attributed  to  the  apostles,  apocalypses,  and  related  subjects.  The 
volume  also  contains  a reliable  introduction,  including  a section  on  “apostle” 
in  early  Christian  tradition.  The  various  Books  of  Acts  attributed  to  Jesus’ 
apostles  Andrew,  John,  Paul,  Peter,  Thomas,  and  Peter  and  the  Twelve 
Apostles  are  also  discussed.  The  second  volume  further  contains  a study  of 
apocalypticism  in  early  Christianity  and  apocalypses  attributed  to  Peter,  Paul, 
and  Thomas.  Wisely  included  are  the  Christian  sections  of  the  Ascension  of 
Isaiah,  the  Fifth  and  Sixth  Books  of  Ezra,  the  Sibyllines,  and  the  Book  of 
Elchasai.  More  than  a dozen  European  New  Testament  and  early  church 
history  experts  have  contributed  to  these  volumes.  R.  McL.  Wilson  informs 
the  reader  that  while  the  English  is  based  on  the  German  introductions,  the 
German  translations  of  the  apocryphal  works  themselves  have  been  checked 
with  “the  Latin,  Greek  or  Coptic”  — he  should  also  have  included  Syriac. 

The  Apocryphal  New  Testament  (1993).  Long  before  Hennecke  and 
Schneemelcher’s  massive  work  was  first  translated  into  English  in  1962-65, 
the  need  was  felt  in  the  English-speaking  world  for  a translation  into  English 
of  the  major  apocryphal  works.  This  desideratum  was  supplied  in  1924  with 
the  handy  volume  of  translations  by  M.  R.  James,  Provost  of  Eton  and 
“Sometime  Provost  of  King’s  College,  Cambridge.”  It  was  titled  The  Apoay- 
phal  New  Testament.  Now  this  work  is  updated  in  a volume  about  the  same 
width  but  an  inch  taller  by  J.  K.  Elliott,  Senior  Lecturer  in  Theology  and 
Religious  Studies  at  the  University  of  Leeds.  It  is  not  as  extensive  as  New 
Testament  Apoaypha,  and  it  perpetuates  some  of  James’  errors;  but  it  is 


402  THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 

intermittently  more  up-to-date  and  a direct  English  translation  of  the  ancient 
texts. 

These  modem  collections  of  the  “noncanonical”  gospels,  epistles,  and 
apocalypses  present  in  attractive  formats  documents  that  were  written  in  the 
early  centuries  of  this  area  and  were  once  considered  authoritative  and 
inspired  within  numerous  Christian  circles.  In  some  communities  several 
were  accepted  as  part  of  the  New  Testament  canon,  and  many  were  read  with 
the  understanding  that  they  were  full  of  God’s  revelation.  As  well  as  the 
so-called  Patristics,  the  New  Testament  Apocrypha  and  Pseudepigrapha  are 
simply  indispensable  documents  for  reconstructing  the  origins  of  Christianity 
and  its  sacred  texts. 

Unfortunately,  the  word  “apocrypha”  connotes  that  which  is  spurious  or 
unauthentic,  and  hence,  some  Christians  avoid  the  writings  as  if  they  would  be 
contaminated  by  reading  them.  These  writings  should  not  be  considered 
“scriptural”  in  a theological  sense,  but  they  were  considered  scriptural  by 
some  early  Christians  and  are  as  important  for  understanding  the  early 
centuries  as  some  of  the  writings  of  the  early  scholars  of  the  church  (like 
Ignatius,  Justin,  Irenaeus,  Origen,  and  Eusebius).  They  also  are  essential  in 
discerning  the  developments  in  the  transmission  of  Jesus’  sayings,  and  they 
contain  insights  for  helping  us  reconstruct  what  Jesus  intended  to  teach.  It  is  a 
pity  that  they  do  not  receive  the  attention  they  deserve  in  theological  and 
academic  circles  and  in  seminary  and  university  curricula. 

What  is  most  surprising  about  these  new  editions  of  the  New  Testament 
Apocrypha?  It  is  the  incorporation  of  the  so-called  Secret  Gospel  of  Mark.  An 
introduction  to  and  translation  of  this  work  appears  in  each  collection,  but  it 
may  well  be  spurious  and  late.  It  was  allegedly  found  in  1958,  but  searches  for 
the  document  have  all  ended  in  failure.  Elliott  includes  the  work  but  rightly 
warns  that  “its  antiquity  and  genuineness  are  questioned  by  scholars.” 

Perhaps  a section  concerning  documents  not  to  be  considered  among  the 
New  Testament  Apocrypha  and  Pseudepigrapha  would  be  a helpful  addition 
in  future  editions  of  the  two  major  collections.  Likewise,  many  works  listed  in 
The  New  Testament  Apocrypha  and  Pseudepigrapha  are  not  even  mentioned 
in  any  of  the  recent  collections.  It  is  disappointing  also  to  observe  that  none  of 
the  recent  collections  offers  the  reader  a translation  of  the  earliest  Christian 
hymnbook,  which  is  attributed  to  Solomon.  One  was  included  in  earlier 
editions  of  Hennecke  and  Schneemelcher’s  collection,  but  it  was  relegated  to 
an  appendix  in  the  English  translation  of  1965.  R.  McL.  Wilson  justified  the 
omission  of  the  Odes  of  Solomon  because  the  volumes  needed  to  be  reduced 
in  size  and  the  Odes  were  available  in  other  editions.  These  “Odes”  are 


REVIEW  ARTICLE 


4°  3 

poetical  compositions  that  are  full  of  beautiful  theological  insights  and  are 
worth  reading  for  numerous  reasons,  including  devotional  ones. 

If  one  is  looking  for  a full  introduction  with  comments  by  an  international 
team  of  experts,  then  the  best  collection  of  the  early  Christian  apocryphal 
works  is  the  New  Testament  Apocrypha.  If  one  prefers  a more  succinct  collec- 
tion with  translations  by  an  English  scholar,  then  the  choice  is  The  Apociyphal 
New  Testament. 


James  H.  Charlesworth 
Princeton  Theological  Seminary 


INDEX  TO  VOLUME  1 7 

1996 


Articles  and  Sermons 

Bartlett,  David  L.  “Preaching  as  Interpretation”  1 54 

Bartow,  Charles  L.  “Who  Says  the  Song?  Practical  Hermeneutics  as  Humble 
Performance”  143 

Bassler,  Jouette  M.  “A  Plethora  of  Epiphanies:  Christology  in  the  Pastoral 

Letters’  310 

Evans,  James  H.,  Jr.  “Health,  Disease,  and  Salvation  in  African  American 

Experience”  326 

Faculty  Publications  (1995)  225 

Florence,  Anna  Carter.  “The  Voice  You  Find  May  Be  Your  Own”  2 1 1 

Gaventa,  Beverly  Roberts.  “Our  Mother  St.  Paul:  Toward  the  Recovery  of  a 

Neglected  Theme”  29 

Gillespie,  Thomas  W.  “Growing  in  the  Knowledge  of  God”  1 

“Jehovah’s  Bystanders?”  279 

Guthrie,  Shirley  C.  “The  Way,  the  Truth,  and  the  Life  in  the  Religions  of  the 

World”  45 

Hanson,  Geddes  W.  “Heavenly  Soundings”  219 

Jacks,  G.  Robert.  “Just  Do  It”  202 

Juel,  Donald  H.  “ ‘Your  Word  Is  Truth’:  Some  Reflections  on  a Hard  Saying”  9 
Livingston,  Michael  E.  “Remembering  David”  351 

Long,  Thomas  G.  “Bruised  Reeds  and  Dimly  Burning  Wicks”  196 

Macleod,  Donald.  “Conrad  H.  Massa:  A Personal  Tribute”  129 

Mattison,  Joel.  “Secondary  Gain”  216 

Migliore,  Daniel  L.  “Mission  in  a Violent  World”  71 

Sakenfeld,  Katharine  Doob.  “David  Weadon:  A Tribute”  348 

“Fences  and  Neighbors”  58 

Seow,  Choon-Leong.  “The  Socioeconomic  Context  of  ‘The  Preacher’s’ 

Hermeneutic”  168 

Tisdale,  Leonora  Tubbs.  “Leaders  with  Heart”  283 

“Preaching  as  Local  Theology”  132 

. “Serving  Lessons”  64 

Waetjen,  Herman  C.  “The  Actualization  of  Christ’s  Achievement  in  Our 

Historical  Existence:  Breaking  out  of  the  New  Babylonian  Captivity”  291 

Book  Reviews 

Adam,  A.  K.  M.  Making  Sense  of  New  Testa?nent  Theology:  “ Modern ” Problems 

and  Prospects  (Deirdre  Good)  359 


INDEX 


405 

Albertz,  Rainer.  A History  of  Israelite  Religion  in  the  Old  Testament  Period , 2 vols. 

(J.J.  M.  Roberts)  365 

Allen,  Joseph  J.  Widowed  Priest:  A Crisis  in  Ministry  (Edward  M.  Huenemann)  127 
Anderson,  Herbert,  and  Susan  B.  W.  Johnson.  Regarding  Children:  A New 

Respect  for  Childhood  and  Families  (Carol  A.  Wehrheim)  126 

Ashjian,  Mesrob.  Armenian  Church  Patristic  and  Other  Essays  (S.  Peter  Cowe)  1 1 3 
Banker,  Mark  T.  Presbyterian  Missions  and  Cultural  Interaction  in  the  Far 
Southwest,  1850-1950  (Paul  E.  Pierson)  1 19 

Betz,  Hans  Dieter.  The  Sermon  on  the  Mount:  A Commentary  on  the  Sermon  on 
the  Mount,  including  the  Sermon  on  the  Plain  (Alatthew  5:5-7:27  and  Luke 
6:20-4.9)  (A.  K.  M.  Adam)  369 

Boyarin,  Daniel.  Radical  Jew:  Paul  and  the  Politics  of  Identity  (Robin  Scroggs)  101 

Brueggemann,  Walter.  Texts  under  Negotiation:  The  Bible  and  Postmodern 
Imagination  (Thomas  G.  Long)  249 

Brueggemann,  Walter,  Charles  B.  Cousar,  Beverly  R.  Gaventa,  and  James  D. 
Newsome.  Texts  for  Preaching:  A Lectionary  Commentary  Based  on  the  NRSV— 

Year  A (Ronald  J.  Allen)  242 

Butin,  Philip  Walker.  Revelation,  Redemption,  and  Response:  Calvin's  Trinitarian 

Understanding  of  the  Divine-Human  Relationship  (Charles  Partee)  375 

Calhoun,  David  B.  Princeton  Seminary.  Vol.  1,  Faith  and  Learning,  1812-1868 

(James  H.  Moorhead)  266 

Camp,  Carole  Ann,  ed.  From  Flicker  to  Flame:  Women's  Sermons  for  the  Revised 
Common  Lectionary  Year  A.  Vol.  1,  Advent  to  Pentecost  (Leonora  Tubbs 
Tisdale)  250 

Carter,  Warren.  What  Are  They  Saying  about  the  Sermon  on  the  Mount? 

(A.  K.  M.  Adam)  100 

Charlesworth,  James  H.,  ed.  The  Lord's  Prayer  and  Other  Prayer  Texts  from  the 

Greco-Roman  Era  (Randall  D.  Chesnutt)  88 

Charlesworth,  James  H.,  and  Walter  P.  Weaver,  eds.  Earthing  Christologies: 

From  Jesus'  Parables  to  Jesus  the  Parable  (James  D.  G.  Dunn)  373 

Cherry,  Kittredge,  and  Zalmon  Sherwood,  eds.  Equal  Rites:  Lesbian  and  Gay 

Worship,  Ceremonies , and  Celebrations  (Ruth  C.  Duck)  262 

Colby,  Gerard,  with  Charlotte  Dennett.  Thy  Will  Be  Done:  The  Conquest  of  the 
Amazon:  Nelson  Rockefeller  and  Evangelism  in  the  Age  of  Oil  (Alan  Neely)  390 

Cooper- White,  Pamela.  The  Cry  of  Tamar:  Violence  against  Women  and  the 

Church's  Response  (Maureen  A.  Wallin)  393 

Davis,  Ellen  F.  Imagination  Shaped:  Old  Testament  Preaching  in  the  Anglican 

Tradition  (W alter  Brueggemann)  2 54 

Duck,  Ruth  C.  Finding  Words  for  Worship:  A Guide  for  Leaders  (N.  J . Robb)  2 6 1 

Elliott,  J.  K.  The  Apocryphal  New  Testament:  A Collection  of  Apocryphal  Christian 

Literature  in  an  English  Translation  (James  H.  Charlesworth)  399 

Erskine,  Noel  Leo.  King  among  the  Theologians  (Peter  J.  Paris)  381 


4°6  THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 

Fernandez,  Eleazar  S.  Toward  a Theology  of  Slruggle  (William  Greenway)  108 

Fortune,  Marie  M.,  and  James  N.  Poling.  Sexual  Abuse  by  Clergy:  A Crisis  for  the 
Church  (Donald  Capps)  82 

Gaustad,  Edwin  S.  Sworn  on  the  Altar  of  God:  A Religious  Biography  of  Thomas 
Jefferson  (James  H.  Moorhead)  379 

Gaventa,  Beverly  Roberts.  Mary:  Glimpses  of  the  Mother  of  Jesus  (John  T. 

Carroll)  271 

Gold,  Victor  Roland,  et  al.,  eds.  The  New  Testament  and  Psalms:  An  Inclusive 

Version  (Morna  D.  Hooker)  371 

Goldingay,  John.  Models  for  Scripture  (Donald  K.  McKim)  90 

Greenspahn,  Frederick  E.  When  Brothers  Dwell  Together:  The  Preeminence  of 

Younger  Siblings  in  the  Hebrew  Bible  (Patrick  D.  Miller)  93 

Guthrie,  Shirley  C.  Christian  Doctrine.  Rev.  ed.  (A.  J.  McKelway)  273 

Harris,  James  H.  Preaching  Liberation  (Alyce  M.  McKenzie)  248 

Hodgson,  Peter  C.  Winds  of  the  Spirit:  A Constructive  Christian  Theology  (Cyril 
O’Regan)  106 

Hubbard,  Dolan.  The  Sermon  and  the  African  American  Literary  Imagination 

(Henry  H.  Mitchell)  245 

Hunsinger,  Deborah  van  Deusen.  Theology  and  Pastoral  Counseling:  A New 
Interdisciplinary  Approach  (Elisabeth  Koenig)  272 

Isichei,  Elizabeth.  A History  of  Christianity  in  Afi'ica:  From  Antiquity  to  the 

Present  (Mercy  Amba  Oduyoye)  3 84 

Jacks,  G.  Robert.  Getting  the  WORD  Across:  Speech  Communication  for  Pastors 

and  Lay  Leaders  (Neil  Clark  Warren)  244 

Koester,  Helmut.  Ancient  Christian  Gospels:  Their  History  and  Development 

(James  H.  Charlesworth)  399 

Lehmann,  Paul  L.  The  Decalogue  and  a Human  Future:  The  Meaning  of  the 

Commandments  for  Making  and  Keeping  Human  Life  Human  (Barry  Harvey)  362 

Long,  Thomas  G.  Whispering  the  Lyrics:  Sermons  for  Lent  and  Easter:  Cycle  A, 

Gospel  Texts  (Patrick  J.  Willson)  241 

Luedemann,  Gerd.  The  Resurrection  of  Jesus:  History , Experience,  Theology. 

Trans.  John  Bowden  (Reginald  H.  Fuller)  98 

Mays,  James  Luther.  The  Lord  Reigns:  A Theological  Handbook  to  the  Psalms 

(W erner  E.  Lemke)  9 1 

McCormack,  Bruce  L.  Karl  Bank's  Critically  Realistic  Dialectical  Theology:  Its 

Genesis  and  Development,  1909-1936  (B.  A.  Gerrish)  354 

Meier,  John  P.  A Marginal  Jew:  Rethinking  the  Historical  Jesus.  Vol.  2,  Mentor, 

Message,  and  Miracles  (W arren  Carter)  96 

Minear,  Paul  Sevier.  Christians  and  the  New  Creation:  Genesis  Motifs  in  the  New 

Testament  (Kathryn  Greene-McCreight)  95 

Morimoto,  Anri.  Jonathan  Edwards  and  the  Catholic  Vision  of  Salvation  (Don 

Schweitzer)  378 


INDEX 


4°7 

Myers,  William  H.  God's  Yes  Was  Louder  Than  My  No:  Rethinking  the  African- 
American  Call  to  Ministry  (CleoJ.  LaRue,  Jr.)  246 

Neely,  Alan.  Christian  Mission:  A Case  Study  Approach  (Dana  L.  Robert)  269 

Newbigin,  Lesslie.  Proper  Confidence:  Faith , Doubt , and  Certainty  in  Christian 

Discipleship  (Frederick  R.  Trost)  388 

Norton,  David.  A History  of  the  Bible  as  Literature.  Vol.  1,  From  Antiquity  to 

1700;  vol.  2,  From  1700  to  the  Present  Day  (Bruce  M.  Metzger)  276 

Oduyoye,  Mercy  Amba.  Daughters  of  Anowa:  African  Women  and  Patriarchy 

(Willette  A.  Burgie)  386 

Olson,  Dennis  T.  Numbers  (Thomas  B.  Dozeman)  356 

Pannenberg,  Wolfhart.  Systematic  Theology , vol.  2.  Trans.  Geoffrey  W.  Bro- 

miley  (Ted  Peters)  105 

Pelikan,  Jaroslav.  Christianity  and  Classical  Culture:  The  Metamorphosis  of  Natu- 
ral Theology  in  the  Christian  Encounter  with  Hellenism  (Edward  F.  Duffy)  1 1 2 

Plantinga,  Cornelius,  Jr.  Not  the  Way  It's  Supposed  to  Be:  A Breviary  of  Sin 

(Stephen  L.  Stell)  360 

Puckett,  David  L.  John  Calvin's  Exegesis  of  the  Old  Testament  (Gary  Neal 

Hansen)  376 

Raboteau,  Albert  J.  A Fire  in  the  Bones:  Reflections  on  African-American  Religious 
History  (Stephen  D.  Glazier)  383 

Robb,  Nigel.  Let  All  God's  People  Say  Amen  (Donald  Macleod)  252 

. Sermons  at  St.  Salvator's  (Donald  Macleod)  252 

Rohler,  Lloyd.  Ralph  Waldo  Emerson:  Preacher  and  Lecturer  (Charles  L.  Bartow)  258 
Sakenfeld,  Katharine  Doob.  Journeying  with  God:  A Commentary  on  the  Book  of 
Numbers  (W alter  Brueggemann)  2 68 

Sample,  Tex.  Ministry  in  an  Oral  Culture:  Living  with  Will  Rogers,  Uncle  Remus, 
and  Minnie  Pearl  (John  W.  Stewart)  256 

Schmidt,  Gary  D .John  Bunyan's  Pilgrim's  Progress.  Illustrated  by  Barry  Moser 

(Conrad  H.  Massa)  260 

Schneemelcher,  Wilhelm,  and  R.  McL.  Wilson,  eds.  New  Testatnent  Apocrypha. 

Rev.  ed.  2 vols.  (James  H.  Charlesworth)  399 

Seow,  Choon-Leong,  ed.  Homosexuality  and  Christian  Community  (W.  Eugene 
March)  353 

Shupe,  Anson.  In  the  Name  of  All  That's  Holy:  A Theory  of  Clergy  Malfeasance 

(Donald  Capps)  395 

Sloan,  Douglas.  Faith  and  Knowledge:  Mainline  Protestantism  and  American 
Higher  Education  (Daniel  Sack)  1 2 1 

Soards,  Marion  L.  Scripture  and  Homosexuality:  Biblical  Authority  and  the  Church 

Today  (Robin  Scroggs)  392 

Stern,  Ephraim,  Ayelet  Lewinson-Gilboa,  and  Joseph  Aviram,  eds.  The  New 
Encyclopedia  of  Archaeological  Excavations  in  the  Holy  Land,  4 vols.  (James  H. 
Charlesworth)  275 


408  THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 

Tamburello,  Dennis  E.  Union  with  Christ:  John  Calvin  and  the  Mysticism  of  St. 

Bernard  (Luke  Anderson)  116 

Thistlethwaite,  Susan  B.,  and  George  F.  Cairns,  eds.  Beyond  Theological 
Tourism:  Mentoring  as  a Grassroots  Approach  to  Theological  Education  (David  L. 
Lindberg)  122 

Torrance,  Thomas  F.  Preaching  Christ  Today:  The  Gospel  and  Scientific  Thinking 

(Robert  A.  Cathey)  no 

Wakefield,  Gordon.  Bunyan  the  Christian  (Conrad  H.  Massa)  1 18 

Westerhoff,  John  H.  Spiritual  Life:  The  Foundation  for  Preaching  and  Teaching 

0.  Randall  Nichols)  253 

White,  L.  Michael,  and  O.  Larry  Yarbrough,  eds.  The  Social  World  of  the  First 

Christians:  Essays  in  Honor  of  Wayne  A.  Meeks  (Brian  K.  Blount)  367 

White,  Susan  J.  Christian  Worship  and  Technological  Change  (W.  Jack  Coogan)  264 

Willimon,  William  H.,  and  Richard  Lischer,  eds.  Concise  Encyclopedia  of 

Preaching  (James  F.  Kay)  238 

Wind,  James  P.,  and  James  W.  Lewis,  eds.  American  Congregations.  Vol.  1, 
Portraits  of  Twelve  Religious  Communities ; vol.  2,  New  Perspectives  in  the  Study 
of  Congregations  (John  W.  Stewart)  85 

Winter,  Miriam  Therese,  Adair  Lummis,  and  Allison  Stokes.  Defecting  in  Place: 

Women  Claiming  Responsibility  for  Their  Own  Spiritual  Lives  (Janet  R.  Wal- 
ton) 1 24 

Witherington,  Ben  III.  Paul's  Narrative  Thought  World:  The  Tapestry  of  Tragedy 

and  'Triumph  (John  Reumann)  103 

Wolterstorff,  Nicholas.  Divine  Discourse:  Philosophical  Reflections  on  the  Claim 

That  God  Speaks  (George  I.  Mavrodes)  363 


History  of  Princeton  Seminary 

2 VOLUME  SET 
by 

David  B.  Calhoun 

published  by  Banner  of  Truth  Trust 


0-85151-607-X  $35.99 


“This  splendid,  thoroughly  researched,  two-volume 
history  of  Princeton  Seminary  reads  like  a novel.  It  tells 
the  story  of  one  of  the  key  institutions  that  shaped  the 
transformation  of  post-colonial,  adolescent  America 
into  a world  power,  and  that  for  the  first  time  made  the 
Christian  faith  global,  carrying  it  literally  to  the 
uttermost  ends  of  the  earth.  Calhoun  has  the  ‘gift’  - he 
makes  historical  characters  spring  to  life.  His  story  is 
more  than  the  story  of  a theological  seminary,  it 
captures  the  essence  of  a whole  century  and  a quarter 
(1812-1929)  of  the  coming  of  age  in  America.” 

Samuel  Hugh  Moffet 
Henry  W.  Luce  Professor  of  Missions  Emeritus 


“Professor  Calhoun’s  two  volumes  about  Princeton 
Theological  Seminary  are  based  on  years  of  painstaking 
research  into  all  kinds  of  records,  some  made  public 
now  for  the  first  time.  Written  in  a clear  and  engaging 
style,  the  narrative  traces  a succession  of  Christian 
scholars  dedicated  to  the  preparation  of  young 
students  for  the  Christian  ministry.  Events,  people, 
and  thought  are  all  given  their  place,  and  readers  will 
be  both  instructed  and  gratified  with  the  author’s 
thorough  and  balanced  account.” 

Bruce  M.  Metzger 

Collord  Professor  of  New  Testament  Emeritus 


0-85151-695-5  $29.99 


To  Order  - Call 
Theological  Book  Agency 
Princeton,  NJ  08542 
609-497-7735 

for  price  8c  shipping  cost  information  or 
contact  your  local  Bookstore 


“I  am  delighted  with  David  Calhoun’s 
History  of  Princeton  Seminary.  I have 
been  thoroughly  charmed  and 
humbled  by  his  account  of  this  grand 
old  school...  it  is  good  for  the  soul.” 

Dr.  Thomas  W.  Gillespie 

President,  PrincetonTheological  Seminary 


For  a catalog  of  additional  titles  send  your  request  to  Banner  ofTruth,  P.O.  Box  621,  Carlisle,  PA  17013 


Princeton  Theological  Seminary  Library 


012  01467  8850 


FOR  USE  IN  LIBRARY  ONLY 
PERIODICALS 


FOR  USE  IN  LIBRARY  ONLY. 


FOR  USE  IN  LIBRARY  ONLY